SPI-Configure Users Guide.

SmartPlant I-Configure
User's Guide
Version 2008 Service Pack 1
October 2008 / May 2009
DISO-PE-200007A-UPDATED
Copyright
Copyright 1991-2009 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) t hrough (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation P.O. Box 240000 Huntsville, AL 35813 Street address: 170 Graphics Drive, Madison, AL 35758
Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement and Limited Product Warranty ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools, ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, Spoolgen, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... v What's New In SmartPlant I-Configure ............................................................................................. vii Welcome to SmartPlant I-Configure .................................................................................................... 9 Legacy System Support................................................................................................................... 10 Getting Started .................................................................................................................................... 11 Configuration Files ......................................................................................................................... 12 Backing Sheets ......................................................................................................................... 12 Templates ................................................................................................................................. 12 CreateTutorial_<application name>.xml ................................................................................... 13 IsoDirList.xml .......................................................................................................................... 13 Project_Data.xml ...................................................................................................................... 13 ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml .................................................................................... 13 ProjectList.xml ......................................................................................................................... 15 ProjectPipeline.xml................................................................................................................... 15 Style.xml .................................................................................................................................. 15 Tutorial Project ............................................................................................................................... 16 Set up a Network Project................................................................................................................. 17 Create User Templates .................................................................................................................... 18 Modify the User ProjectConfig File .......................................................................................... 19 Comment ........................................................................................................................................ 20 Objects ........................................................................................................................................... 20 Properties........................................................................................................................................ 21 Values ............................................................................................................................................ 21 Collections...................................................................................................................................... 22 Add to Collection ..................................................................................................................... 23 Remove from Collection ........................................................................................................... 23 Controls .......................................................................................................................................... 23 Mouse ...................................................................................................................................... 24 Keyboard .................................................................................................................................. 24 Shortcut Menu .......................................................................................................................... 24 Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface ............................................................................... 29 Menus............................................................................................................................................. 31 File Menu ................................................................................................................................. 31 Edit Menu................................................................................................................................. 36 Wizards Menu .......................................................................................................................... 39 Tools Menu .............................................................................................................................. 64 Help Menu................................................................................................................................ 77
SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................... 78 Project View Panel.......................................................................................................................... 79 Properties Panel .............................................................................................................................. 80 Overview Panel............................................................................................................................... 81 Detail Panel .................................................................................................................................... 82 Status Bar ....................................................................................................................................... 85 Isometric Directories ........................................................................................................................... 87 Isometric Directory Object Properties ............................................................................................. 87 Create an Isometric Directory.......................................................................................................... 88 Delete an Isometric Directory.......................................................................................................... 89 Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory ............................................................................................ 90 Projects ................................................................................................................................................ 91 Project Object Properties................................................................................................................. 91 Name ........................................................................................................................................ 93 Path .......................................................................................................................................... 93 Source ...................................................................................................................................... 93 AppList .................................................................................................................................... 93 AppCount ................................................................................................................................. 93 WeldGaps................................................................................................................................. 94 ElbowConversion ..................................................................................................................... 94 ChangeStyleList ....................................................................................................................... 95 AccessRights ............................................................................................................................ 96 LockedBy ................................................................................................................................. 96 Project Defaults .............................................................................................................................. 96 Application............................................................................................................................... 97 Material Database ..................................................................................................................... 97 Repeat Style ............................................................................................................................. 98 Imported Weld Numbers ........................................................................................................... 98 Imported Part Numbers ............................................................................................................. 99 Imported Split Points ...............................................................................................................100 Imported Spool IDs .................................................................................................................101 Import Directory ......................................................................................................................101 PreProcessor ............................................................................................................................102 GED Configuration..................................................................................................................102 Project Work Folder ................................................................................................................103 Straight Length ........................................................................................................................103 Project ID Type .......................................................................................................................104 SmartPlant Integration .............................................................................................................104 Default Support Category ........................................................................................................105 Attributes .......................................................................................................................................106 Pipeline Attributes ...................................................................................................................108 Component Attributes..............................................................................................................110 Weld Attributes .......................................................................................................................111 Bolt Attributes .........................................................................................................................111 Spool Attributes.......................................................................................................................112 Material Attributes...................................................................................................................112
ii
Add a New Attribute................................................................................................................112 Edit an Attribute ......................................................................................................................113 Delete an Attribute...................................................................................................................114 Import PipeHeader Attributes ..................................................................................................115 Attribute Expressions...............................................................................................................115 Copy and Paste a Project ................................................................................................................121 Create a Project..............................................................................................................................121 Delete a Project..............................................................................................................................122 Styles ...................................................................................................................................................125 Style Object Properties...................................................................................................................125 Name .......................................................................................................................................126 Path .........................................................................................................................................126 ExportBehavior .......................................................................................................................126 StyleState ................................................................................................................................126 StyleType ................................................................................................................................127 CanWrite .................................................................................................................................127 CanExport ...............................................................................................................................127 Detail Panel ...................................................................................................................................127 AlternativeTexts ......................................................................................................................130 Drawing ..................................................................................................................................166 DrawingFrame .........................................................................................................................334 MaterialList .............................................................................................................................355 WeldList..................................................................................................................................412 CutList ....................................................................................................................................435 Supplementary Object..............................................................................................................457 Copy and Paste a Style ...................................................................................................................558 Create a Style.................................................................................................................................559 Delete a Style.................................................................................................................................560 Export a Style ................................................................................................................................561 Save a Style ...................................................................................................................................561 Select a Style .................................................................................................................................561 Techniques ..........................................................................................................................................563 Bar Codes ......................................................................................................................................563 AutoCAD Barcode ..................................................................................................................564 Bends and Elbows ..........................................................................................................................565 Bends ......................................................................................................................................565 Elbows ....................................................................................................................................565 External Data .................................................................................................................................566 External Data Source ...............................................................................................................566 XML Configuration File ..........................................................................................................567 Pipeline Data ...........................................................................................................................568 Component and Information Data ............................................................................................569 Example XML Configuration File............................................................................................570 Welding .........................................................................................................................................571 Weld Lists ...............................................................................................................................571 Weld Logic..............................................................................................................................572
iii
Weld Constructions .................................................................................................................574 Cut Lists ........................................................................................................................................578 Detail Sketch and Information Notes ..............................................................................................579 Dynamic File Naming ....................................................................................................................583 Flange Rotation..............................................................................................................................584 HeatTreatment-NDE ......................................................................................................................587 Location Points ..............................................................................................................................588 Site Assemblies..............................................................................................................................593 Traceability and Unique Numbers ..................................................................................................595 Work Measurement ........................................................................................................................596 Index ...................................................................................................................................................601
iv
Preface
This document is a user's guide for SmartPlant I-Configure and provides conceptual information and procedural instructions for creating and managing the isometric directories, projects and styles that are used by other SmartPlant piping solutions products to generate isometric drawings and reports using ISOGEN. The content is identical to the online Help that is delivered as part of the SmartPlant I-Configure software. Intergraph gives you permission to print as many copies of this document as you need for noncommercial use at your company. You cannot reprint this document for resale or redistribution outside your company.
Preface
vi
What's New In SmartPlant I-Configure

Version 2008 Service Pack 1 Documentation of AText reference data, including a listing of AText identification numbers, is delivered as part of the SmartPlant I-Configure user documentation. For more information, see Alternative Text (on page 130). The following new properties have been added to the Drawing Format object to help you control the format of the information on the isometric: AngleAccuracy (on page 243) OletBranchOrientationMessage (on page 265) SpecBrkEnclosure (on page 282)
The AngleStyle property has been enhanced to give you additional control over the output of angle data. For more information, see AngleStyle (on page 243). A printable user's guide is now delivered with the software. The content is identical to the online Help that is also delivered with the SmartPlant I-Configure software. You can access the SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
vii
What's New In SmartPlant I-Configure
viii
SECTION 1
Welcome to SmartPlant I-Configure

SmartPlant I-Configure allows you to create and manage the isometric directories, projects and styles that are used by other SmartPlant products to generate isometric drawings and reports using ISOGEN. ISOGEN is the industry-standard software for the automatic production of piping isometric drawings. It is integral to most of the major plant design systems on the market, including PDS and SmartPlant 3D, and is used in the vast majority of process plant projects involving the design of pipework. A significant factor in the success of ISOGEN is its broad range of configuration options. Virtually everything about the piping isometric drawing from the style of dimensioning and format of weld and part numbers to the location and layout of the material take-off is configurable. This allows you to produce isometric drawings to your own specifications. SmartPlant I-Configure has been specifically designed to simplify the customization of piping isometrics produced by ISOGEN. It allows ISOGEN's substantial array of control switches and files to be easily managed. Easy to learn and simple to use, SmartPlant I-Configure makes ISOGEN features available to more users and allows them to configure SmartPlant Isometrics, SmartPlant Isometrics I-Tools, and SmartPlant Spoolgen. SmartPlant I-Configure includes the following features: Support for projects (see "Import Project" on page 69) and styles created in Project Manager (PipMan). Connections (see "Connect to Isometric Directory" on page 33) to network projects (see "Set up a Network Project" on page 16) . Object (see "Objects" on page 20) -based user interface for the configuration of ISOGEN control files. Explorer type windows (see "Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface" on page 29) to navigate the available projects and styles. Wizards (see "Wizards Menu" on page 38) to quickly set-up and configure styles. XML (see "Configuration Files" on page 11) files for storage of project and style information. Built-in drawing previewer (see "Preview Drawing" on page 64) to graphically examine onthe-fly the impact of modifications made to styles. Password protection (see "Project Access Rights" on page 76) to avoid unauthorized alterations to projects and styles.
Welcome to SmartPlant I-Configure
Legacy System Support

SmartPlant I-Configure allows you to import style settings from earlier versions of I-Sketch, IConfigure and SPOOLGEN, and even from IDF files.
Information for I-Configure 2.8 Users

The MLD/WDF format created by the software was changed in subsequent version of the software. However, you can use the Comment (on page 20) field to control the format more precisely. This will impact on SmartPlant Isometrics I-Data Integrator, which uses the comment field in the MLD to control the name of fields created in its database tables. Consequently, you must manually set up projects used by SmartPlant Isometrics I-Data Integrator to ensure that the new formats match the old. For details of all other changes made in this version of the software, refer to the Release Notes.txt file that is delivered with the software. By default, this file is delivered to C:\Program Files\Common Files\Intergraph\I-Configure during installation.
Information for I-Sketch Users

The introduction of SmartPlant I-Configure impacts SmartPlant Isometrics users as follows. SmartPlant Isometrics works against existing PipMan projects and styles without any modification being necessary, and without PipMan being installed on the machine. SmartPlant I-Configure replaces PipMan and the ISOGEN Options and AText editors. The AText.pdf is delivered by default to C:\Program Files\Common Files\Intergraph\IConfigure\resdlls\0009 during installation of the software. PipMan projects were fixed format and always included: Projects - Pipes, Exports and Inputs folders. Styles - Drawings, Messages, Reports folders.
SmartPlant I-Configure projects are controlled by an XML configuration file. All ISOGEN settings (inputs and outputs) are written to this file, which is held in the Style folder. The outputs from SmartPlant I-Configure are the same as from PipMan - the FLS and ISOGEN control files: DDF, MLD, WDF, POS and so on. Project properties are not held in registry. Instead, they are contained in a variety of XML configuration files (on page 11). Existing PipMan projects and styles must be imported (see "Import Project" on page 69) before they can be changed in SmartPlant I-Configure.
10
SECTION 2
Getting Started
SmartPlant I-Configure brings all of ISOGEN's controls together into a single application. In its interface, these are represented as a series of control objects which have properties. For example, the control objects have an OutputFormat property which controls the CAD format of the drawing. Where appropriate, the allowable options are presented to the user to minimize error.
Convenient Style Wizards

You can choose from hundreds of properties to set, some of which must be set in combination with other properties. To assist the user, I-Configure features a number of wizards which guide the user step by step through setting particular sets of related properties. The drawing wizard helps the user configure the drawing template. This is usually a companystandard backing sheet on which ISOGEN plots the drawing and related data such as the material take-off, welding report, and project-related data. The drawing wizard has a graphical interface, overlaying the location of key items onto the backing sheet. The dimensioning wizard helps the user set up the dimensioning styles used by ISOGEN. Other wizards assist with the setup of welding controls such as weld numbering styles and numbering sequences, and in the creation of report files.
Preview Mode
SmartPlant I-Configure allows the user to quickly preview the results the settings configured using a built-in test file. ISOGEN can be run to check the output without ever leaving the IConfigure environment. To function correctly, the Drawing Setup Wizard (on page 39) and the Preview Drawing (on page 64) command both require that VoloView Express is installed on the workstation that is running SmartPlant I-Configure. Also, if you do not have access to any other 2D CAD system for isometric drawing productions, you can use VoloView Express to produce DXF drawings in any of the other products and tools delivered on the product DVD. VoloView Express is delivered on the Intergraph SmartPlant Isometrics product DVD. For information about installing VoloView Express, see the SmartPlant Isometrics Installation Guide, which is available using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
11
Getting Started
Configuration Files
SmartPlant I-Configure stores configuration information in a variety of XML files. CreateTutorial_<application name>.xml (on page 12) IsoDirList.xml (on page 13) Project_Data.xml (on page 13) ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml (on page 13) ProjectList.xml (on page 15) ProjectPipeline.xml (on page 15) Style.xml (on page 15)
Although you can view configuration files using Internet Explorer; Intergraph PPM cautions against modifying them in any way.
See also
Backing Sheets (on page 12) Templates (on page 12)
Backing Sheets
To help you get started with SmartPlant I-Configure, a set of backing sheets, commonly referred to as drawing frames, is supplied. During a default installation of the software, these backing sheets are delivered to <Installation Folder>Program Files\Common Files\Intergraph\IConfigure\Backing Sheets.
See also
TemplateFile (on page 338)
Templates
To help you get started with SmartPlant I-Configure, a set of template Styles is supplied with the software. During a default installation, these template styles are delivered to <Installation Folder>:\Program Files\Common Files\Intergraph\I-Configure\Templates.
See also
Style.xml (on page 15)
12
Getting Started
CreateTutorial_<application name>.xml
The CreateTutorial_<application name>.xml configuration file controls the creation of the tutorial project. Each product installs its own version of this file. The CreateTutorial configuration file uses the same syntax as the ProjectConfig_< application name>n.xml file--CopyFile and CreateFolder--but also supports the setting of project defaults to specific values.
See also
Tutorial Project (on page 15) ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml (on page 13)
IsoDirList.xml
Contains the list of isometric directories set-up on the current machine. SmartPlant I-Configure creates this configuration file %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Application Data\Alias. Windows 2000, XP - ALLUSERSPROFILE = Documents and Settings\All Users Windows NT - ALLUSERSPROFILE = WINNT\Profiles\All Users
Project_Data.xml
Each project folder contains a Project_Data file, which is used to store application-specific project defaults (on page 37) and other project level data. For example, in the file name P1000_Data.xml, P1000 is the name of the project.
ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml
The structure of SmartPlant I-Configure projects is controlled by the ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file configuration file--for example, ProjectConfig_Spoolgen.xml. In a default setup, this file is delivered to <Installation Folder>:\Program Files\Common Files\Intergraph\I-Configure\Application Data. Although projects are application-specific, they can be enabled for multiple applications from the same source, if necessary. The project configuration file defines: Any data files that must be copied to the project (or style). Any folders that must be created. Any mandatory styles that must be created. For example, SmartPlant Spoolgen must have a style called SGImport and one called Spool. Any application-specific project defaults.
13
Getting Started When you create a new SmartPlant I-Configure project, you must use the Application list to specify the associated application. The software displays a list of supported applications in the Application list on the New Project dialog box, depending on what has been installed.
Using a User-Defined ProjectConfig_App.xml File

If a file with the name UserProjectConfig_<application name>.xml is found in the same folder as the supplied ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file, it is used in preference to define the project structure, style content and so on. This allows you to create a user-specific project configuration that is not overwritten by the next installation of SmartPlant I-Configure. For example, if both UserProjectConfig_SPIsometrics.xml and ProjectConfig_SPIsometrics.xml are found in the same folder, the software uses the former XML configuration file when you set-up a new project for SmartPlant Isometrics.
14
Getting Started Initial Settings New syntax in ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file allows you to specify an initial setting (in the form of an XML file) for any property using the following syntax:
<SetProjectProperties PROPERTY='FILENAME' />
Consider the following example:

<SetProjectProperties WeldGaps='$APPCONFIG$\Application Data\WeldGaps_Template.xml' ElbowConversion='$APPCONFIG$\Application Data\ElbowConversion_Template.xml'/>
SmartPlant I-Configure then loads the specified property with the contents of the specified file.
See also
Create a Project (on page 121) Enable Project (on page 34) Source (on page 93) Project Defaults (on page 37)
ProjectList.xml
Each isometric directory contains a ProjectList.xml file, which contains a list of projects and styles.
ProjectPipeline.xml
The ProjectPipeline.xml file is an application-specific configuration file, which can be present in the project folder. For example, it is be found in SmartPlant Spoolgen- and SmartPlant Isometrics-enabled projects. The ProjectPipeline.xml file contains the user specified extensions to Pipeline, Component, Weld and Bolt attributes that have been defined for the project.
See also
Pipeline Attributes (on page 108) Component Attributes (on page 110) Weld Attributes (on page 110) Bolt Attributes (on page 111) Project Defaults (on page 37)
Style.xml
Each style folder contains a Style.xml file, such as Final-Basic.xml, which is used to store the style configuration data. To help you get started with SmartPlant I-Configure, a set of template styles is supplied with the software. However, before a style can be used by an application, the style must first be exported. If you have not already exported the style, the application can perform this step for itself.
See also
Export (on page 35) Templates (on page 12) View Isogen Controls (on page 69)
15
Getting Started
Tutorial Project
Any product which uses SmartPlant I-Configure, such as SmartPlant Spoolgen or SmartPlant Isometrics, installs a sample tutorial project that you can use to help you get started (see "Getting Started" on page 11) with the software. If you alter the tutorial project in anyway, you can use the Create Tutorial Utility to restore its out-of-the-box default settings. To launch the utility, click Start > All Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant Isometrics > Create Tutorial Project. The following table shows the styles made available under the tutorial project structure depending on which application is installed:
Application
SmartPlant Isometrics
Command Line Switch

-aSPIsometrics
Result
SmartPlant Spoolgen
-aSpoolgen
Do not use the tutorial project as a basis for production work, as subsequent installations of the same application overwrite the tutorial project. If you make changes to the tutorial project and wish to keep them, rename the SampleIsoDir or the project before reinstalling any software which installs and runs CreateTutorial.exe as part of its installation, or before running Create Tutorial Project from the Start menu.
See also
CreateTutorial_application.xml (see "CreateTutorial_<application name>.xml" on page 12) Configuration Files (on page 11)
16
Getting Started
Set up a Network Project

You can set up projects on a network server so that users working on multiple client workstations can access and share project configurations concurrently.
What do you want to do?

Set Up a Project on a Network Server (on page 17) Connect to a Network Project (on page 18)
For a description of use of mapped drives and UNC paths for network projects, see Options (on page 77). For more information about connecting to network isometric directory and associate projects, see Connecting to an Isometric Directory (see "Connect to Isometric Directory" on page 33).
See also
Project View Panel (on page 79) Supplementary ReportFiles Object (on page 532) Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 534)
Set Up a Project on a Network Server

1. Create an isometric directory (on page 88). 2. Create a project (on page 121) and its associated styles. To avoid file conflict errors, it is also necessary to change the output path for the Message file for each style in the project configuration, so that the file is written locally-for example to C:\TEMP--when users attempt to use the same style concurrently. ISOGEN then outputs the Message file it creates to this local folder instead of to the same folder on the network server. 3. Use Windows Explorer to create the Message file path, such as C:\TEMP, if one does not exist.
17
Getting Started 4. For each style in the project, add a definition (see "Add to Collection" on page 23) to the Supplementary ReportFiles object's ISOGENFiles collection, which sets the message path to C:\TEMP\Message filename.
You can use the Reports wizard (on page 63) can be used to set the message file path. Use an appropriate filename for the message file, such as Spool mes for the spool style. Set the drive on which the isometric directory and project to be connected to resides to be shared, and set the required permissions for the share.
Connect to a Network Project

1. Click Create Isometric Directory . 2. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, browse to the network path where the isometric directory to be connected to resides, select the project, and then click OK. The project appears in the Project View panel.
Create User Templates

1. Create the style (see "Create a Style" on page 559) using your own company standard backing sheet and settings. 2. Save the style XML file and copy it to a folder designated to hold your company templates. For the purposes of this example, assume that the style template is stored in \\Server\CompanyTemplates folder. File paths in the project/style hierarchy are automatically converted to use $PROJECT$ or $STYLE$ instead of the actual file path. This means that the style XML files can readily be copied between styles and do not need modification.
18
Getting Started 3. Copy the ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file to a file named UserProjectConfig_<application name>.xml and modify this file to reference your new template. By default, the ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file is delivered to in <Installation Folder>:\Program Files\Common Files\Intergraph\IConfigure\Application Data and is application-specific. That is, there is a file called ProjectConfig_Spoolgen.xml that defines SmartPlant Spoolgen projects and another called ProjectConfig_SPIsometrics.xml for SmartPlant Isometrics projects.
See also
Modify the ProjectConfig File (see "Modify the User ProjectConfig File" on page 19) Save (on page 35)
Modify the User ProjectConfig File

Before proceeding, make a backup copy of the ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file. You can safely modify the following two sections of the file. Immediately after the <AppSpecificProjectConfiguration> tag, you can create additional CreateFolder and/or CopyFile commands to create and populate new folders in the project folder.
<AppSpecificProjectConfiguration Source="Alias">  <CopyFile From="$APPCONFIG$\Application Data\ProjectPipeline.xml" To="$PROJECT$\"/>  <CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Inputs"/> <CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Pipes"/> <CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Data"/> <CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Data\Materials"/> <CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Data\Sketches"/>
Between the <Optional-Styles> and </Optional-Styles> tags, you can delete existing <Style> blocks--to reduce the number of styles that are available when a project is created-and add new entries, pointing to the company specific template.
<Style Name="CoSpecific" Template="\\server\CompanyTemplates\CoSpecific.xml" > <CopyFile From="\\server\CompanyTemplates\CoSpecific.dwg" To="$STYLE$\" />  <CreateFolder Name="$STYLE$\Drawings"/> <CreateFolder Name="$STYLE$\Reports"/> <CreateFolder Name="$STYLE$\Messages"/> </Style>
The ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file is updated when a new version of SmartPlant I-Configure is installed (CreateTutorial.exe overwrites all tutorial project files).
19
Getting Started Creating the UserProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file prevents any changes you make from being lost.
Comment
You use the Comment column to enter a text comment for any definition contained in TextColumns and XYColumns collections.
If any text is entered in this field, it is output as a comment--preceded by a "!"--to the relevant data or summary report file. As an example, consider the following:
Declared attribute names are no longer output automatically as a comment in the MLD/WDF If a SmartPlant Isometrics I-Data Integrator project is dependent on this to generate column names in output files, you can now manually set these values in the Comment column instead. Any comment field in an imported MLD is preserved.
Objects
Objects are used to contain and control the properties which define isometric directories, projects and styles. An object contains a set of related properties. For example, the DrawingFrame object contains a set of properties that define the drawing frame. An object can also contain other objects, called sub-objects. For example, the WeldList object contains the following subobjects: FixedLayout VariableLayout UserDefined SummaryFile
An object can contain a collection of other objects, also known as definitions, or a set of identical objects. For example, the MaterialList.SummaryFile object can contain a set of TextColumn objects. Each one defines a single column in the SummaryFile output. Other examples of collections are the AlternativeTexts object, the Drawing.Definitions object and the MaterialList.UserDefined object.
See also
. (Dot) Notation 20 SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
Getting Started Properties (on page 21) Collections (on page 22) Values (on page 21)
Properties
An object contains a set of related properties. When you change the object properties that belong to a style, it alters the content and appearance of the isometric drawing and report file outputs that are produced when the style is used in those products that use SmartPlant I-Configure. You can display and access objects of a style using the Detail panel (on page 82); however, you can only modify properties by changing values in the Properties panel (on page 80). Depending on the purpose of the property, you can set different values in the Value field of each property. Some properties have a selection list that displays automatically when you double-click the property. Other properties are typed entries--simply click in the Value field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Some properties are read only and are set automatically by the software when other properties are defined.
See also
Find (on page 66) Objects (on page 20) Collections (on page 22) Values (on page 21)
Values
The values that object properties or collection definitions possess, are determined by their purpose. For example, a value can be a character or number, a filename and/or file path, an ISOGEN attribute, or some or other keyword used in an ISOGEN input control or output report file. You can clear the value of a property using the Clear command on the shortcut menu (on page 24). Alphanumeric - Characters or numbers (real or integer).To enter an alphanumeric value: Click in the Value field. Type the alphanumeric value. Double click in the Value field to open the Browse to File dialog box. Navigate to the required file or folder and click OK.
Path - Path to a file or folder. To enter a path value:
Drop-down list - List that contains various options. For more information about the options available for the property, read Properties (on page 21), To enter a value in a list: Double click in the Value field and select the option required from those available in the list.
Pop-up list - Pop-up list of various ISOGEN attributes or keyword syntax. To enter a value from this list:
21
Getting Started Double click in the Value field and select the option required from those available in the list.
See also
Objects (on page 20) Collections (on page 22)
Collections
A collection is a special type of object that holds a set of other objects. The collection has its own properties, which apply to the collection as a whole. For example, the MaterialList.UserDefined object is a collection of XYColumn objects, such as the headers used for the Material list. All collections have a Count property that shows the number of objects in the collection. When you select a collection in the Detail panel (on page 82), the Properties panel (on page 80) displays its definitions.
You can use the Clear (on page 26) command on the shortcut menu to clear the value of a definition. You can use the commands on the shortcut menu to manipulate the order of the definitions (as rows in the collection). To change the value of a definition, do one of the following:
22
Getting Started a. Double-click it and select a new value from those available in a drop-down or pop-up list. b. Click in the field and type in a new value. c. Browse to a file to set a file path.

Add to Collection (on page 23) Remove from Collection (on page 23)
See also
Row Manipulation (on page 26) Values (on page 21)
Add to Collection
There are several different collections in SmartPlant I-Configure, but they all use the same mechanism to add data entries. Click Add to Collection . Alternatively, you can click Add Row on the shortcut menu.
Remove from Collection

There are several different collections in SmartPlant I-Configure, but they all use the same mechanism to remove data entries. Click Remove from Collection . Alternatively, you can click Delete Row on the shortcut menu.
Controls
Various ways of controlling SmartPlant I-Configure are available, such as the following: Menus (on page 31) Toolbar (on page 78) Mouse (on page 24) Keyboard (on page 24) Shortcut Menu (on page 24)
23
Getting Started
Mouse
SmartPlant I-Configure makes extensive use of the mouse to control the application. Left-hand button - The left mouse button (LHB) is used mainly to select items. Right-hand button - The right mouse button (RHB) displays a shortcut menu that is specific to the item that you select. A single RHB click is equivalent to selecting an object using the left mouse button and then clicking a toolbar button or a menu item to perform a function. If you right-click an item in any other part of the SmartPlant I-Configure Main window and no shortcut menu is available for the item, the right mouse button acts like the left mouse button and simply selects the item. The Properties panel updates to reflect the selection. Middle button - The middle mouse button moves the scroll bar in any of the panels of the SmartPlant I-Configure Main window.
See also
Shortcut Menu (on page 24)
Keyboard
Like other Windows applications, you can access some SmartPlant I-Configure commands using the Hot Keys. For example, you can press CTRL+C to copy an object.
Shortcut Menu
The shortcut menu displays when you do any of the following. The commands that display on the shortcut menu are dependent upon where you rightclick Right-click an object is selected in the Project View panel (Getting_Started_Interface_Project_View_Panel.htm)
Paste only becomes available when something is available to paste from the Copy buffer.
24
Getting Started Right-click the property/value of an object in the Properties panel (on page 80) :
Right-click an object (Definition/Row) of a Collection in the Properties panel:
See also
Mouse (on page 24) Row Manipulation (on page 26)
Copy
Copies an isometric directory, project or style.

Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89) Copy and Paste a Project (on page 121) Copy and Paste a Style (on page 558)
25
Getting Started
Paste
Pastes an isometric directory, project or style.

Clear
Clears the value field of a property. Available on the shortcut menu (on page 24)
Row Manipulation
There are various features available on the shortcut menu (on page 24) that allow the user to control the number and order of the objects (Definitions/Rows) that make up the contents of a collection (see "Collections" on page 22).

Add a Row (on page 26) Delete a Row (on page 27) Copy a Row (on page 27) Move Up a Row (on page 27) Move Down a Row (on page 27)
See also
Shortcut Menu (on page 24) Collections (on page 22) Add to Collection (on page 23) Remove from Collection (on page 23)
26
Getting Started
Add a Row
1. Click in the last row in the collection. 2. Right-click and then click Add Row in the shortcut menu. 3. Double-click the various fields of the row to change the values, to set file paths, and so on.
Delete a Row
1. Click in the row you want to delete. 2. Right-click and then click Delete Row in the shortcut menu.
Copy a Row
1. Select the row to be copied. 2. Right-click and then click Copy Row in the shortcut menu. The row is copied and appears beneath the row that was copied. 3. Double-click the various fields of the row to change some of the values, to set file paths, and so on.
Move Up a Row
1. Select the row you want to move up the list. 2. Right-click and then click Move Row Up in the shortcut menu. The row moves up one level to be higher in the list. 3. Repeat to move the row further up the list.
Move Down a Row

1. Select the row that you want to move down the list. 2. Right-click and then click Move Row Down in the shortcut menu. The row moves down one level to be higher in the list. 3. Repeat to move the row further down the list.
27
Getting Started
Context Sensitive Help

To use context sensitive help, click any value In the Properties panel and then press F1. The software displays the appropriate Help topic in the Help window.
28
SECTION 3
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface

The standard SmartPlant I-Configure Main window consists of the following components as shown in the following illustration:
The SmartPlant I-Configure Main window is made up of several panels, each of which you can use to perform specific key tasks.
29
A - Menu Bar
Click the name of a menu to display the menu commands. Many menu commands have equivalent keystrokes, such as CTRL+C for the Copy command that you can use to quickly perform an action. For more information, see Menus (on page 31).
B - Toolbar
Toolbars are groups of icons that provide rapid access to commonly used commands. They are an alternative to using menu items or keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see Toolbar (on page 78).
C - Project View Panel

The Project View panel displays all of the available isometric directories, projects and styles in tree structure format. For more information, see Project View Panel (on page 79).
D - Overview Panel
The Overview panel displays a simplified overview of the key properties of a style, for both the drawing and report output. For more information, see Overview Panel (on page 81).
E - Detail Panel
The Detail panel shows the objects of style in a tree view format. For more information, see Detail Panel (on page 82).
F - Properties Panel
The Properties panel displays the defined values for each object property or the definitions for a collection. For more information, see Properties Panel (on page 80).
G - Status Bar
The status bar contains summary information. For more information, see Status Bar (on page 85). To help get you started, a tutorial project (on page 15) is installed during setup of the software.
See also
Keyboard (on page 24) Mouse (on page 24) Shortcut Menu (on page 24)
30
Menus
SmartPlant I-Configure has several menus that provide access to its main features and most frequently used commands. File (see "File Menu" on page 31) Edit (see "Edit Menu" on page 35) Wizards (see "Wizards Menu" on page 38) Tools (see "Tools Menu" on page 64) Help (see "Help Menu" on page 77)
See also
Toolbar (on page 78) Shortcut Menu (on page 24)
File Menu
The File menu provides access to the following commands: New (on page 31) Connect to Isometric Directory (on page 33) Disconnect Isometric Directory (on page 33) Enable Project (on page 34) Export (on page 35) Save (on page 35) Exit (on page 35)
See also
Menus (on page 31) Toolbar (on page 78) Shortcut Menu (on page 24)
31
New
New is a sub-menu of the File menu. It contains the commands used to create new isometric directories, projects and styles.

Create an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Create a Project (on page 121) Create a Style (on page 559)
Isometric Directory
You can use File > New > Isometric Directory to create a new isometric directory. Isometric directories are displayed in the Project View panel. Isometric directories can contain many projects. Its configuration information is contained in various configuration files and its own object (see "Isometric Directory Object Properties" on page 87).
See also
Configuration Files (on page 11) Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89) Create an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Delete an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Reset Isometric Directories
Project
You can use File > New > Project to create a new project. Projects are displayed in the Project View panel. You can only create a new project under an Isometric directory. Multiple projects can exist under a single Isometric directory. Projects contain styles. Project configuration information is contained in various configuration files and its own object (see "Project Object Properties" on page 91).
See also
Configuration Files (on page 11) Copy and Paste a Project (on page 121) Create a Project (on page 121) Delete a Project (on page 122)
32
Style
You can use File > New > Style to create a new style. Styles are displayed in the Project View panel. You can only create a style under a project. Multiple styles can exist under a single project. Style configuration information is contained in various configuration files and its own object (see "Style Object Properties" on page 125).
See also
Configuration Files (on page 11) Create a Style (on page 559) Delete a Style (on page 560) Export a Style (on page 560) Save a Style (on page 561) Select a Style (on page 561)
Connect to Isometric Directory

Adds an existing (usually remote) isometric directory, without creating the isometric directory folder. 1. Click File > Connect to Isometric Directory. Alternatively, you can click Connect to Isometric Directory . 2. In the Connect to Isometric Directory dialog box, navigate to the Project List.xml, select it and click Open. The isometric directory is displayed in the Project View panel. Whether a mapped drive or full UNC path is shown is dependent on options (on page 77) set for the project.
See also
Isometric Directory (on page 32) Create an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Disconnect Isometric Directory (on page 33) Set up a Network Project (on page 16)
33
Disconnect Isometric Directory

Removes an isometric directory from the Project View panel without deleting the (usually remote) folder. In addition, deleting a remote isometric directory now only removes the reference to it from the Project View panel, the folder is not deleted. You cannot delete remote projects and style folders. 1. In the Project View panel, click the isometric directory you want to remove. 2. Click File > Disconnect Isometric Directory. Alternatively, you can click Disconnect Isometric Directory The isometric directory disappears from the Project View panel. .
See also
Isometric Directory (on page 32) Connect to Isometric Directory (on page 33)
Enable Project
When you first create a project, it is for use with a specific application, such as SmartPlant Isometrics. This is because different applications require different styles to be available, which is determined by the type of isometric and report deliverables the application is required to produce. For example, SmartPlant Isometrics must be capable of providing as-designed or asbuilt piping isometrics, whereas SmartPlant Spoolgen needs to be able to produce isometrics suitable for pipe fabrication in the shop and erection/construction of the spools on-site. 1. Click the project you want to enable in the Project View panel (on page 79). 2. Click File > Enable Project. Alternatively, you can click Enable Project . 3. Select the application that the project is to be enabled for in the Application list. 4. Select the (optional) styles required by checking/un-checking the boxes of those available. The project cannot be re-enabled for itself. In other words, the application that the project was first created for is not shown in the list. Existing projects can be enabled to work with other applications installed on the same workstation. For example, a Project initially created for I-Run, can also be enabled for use with SmartPlant Isometrics. For more information, see the following Enable Project Matrix:
Default SmartPlant Isometrics Y N SmartPlant Isometrics ITools Y Y SmartPlant Spoolgen Y Y
Default SmartPlant Isometrics
N Y
34

Default SmartPlant Isometrics Y SmartPlant Isometrics ITools N SmartPlant Spoolgen Y
SmartPlant Isometrics I-Tools
Y Y Y N SmartPlant Spoolgen Some styles are considered mandatory and some optional. For example, SmartPlant Spoolgen requires the SGImport.xml and Spool.xml. As such, these are considered mandatory styles. All other styles are optional.
Mandatory styles cannot be unselected (un-checked).
See also
ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml (on page 13) Tutorial Project (on page 15)
Save
Writes the current SmartPlant I-Configure settings to the Style.xml (on page 15) file. Before any new settings become available in the application being used, you must first save them.
See also
Save a Style (on page 561)
Export
Creates the ISOGEN control files--*.opl, *.pos, *.alt, *.fls--based on the settings made for the style in SmartPlant I- Configure. This is not a required step since the products will do it for themselves before running ISOGEN. The Export command is useful for debugging and, if the ExportBehaviour property for the style is set to Never Export, allows the style to be manually modified.
See also
ExportBehaviour (on page 126) Export a Style (on page 560) View Isogen Controls (on page 69)
Exit
Closes the software. If you have not saved your changes, the software prompts you to do so.
35
Edit Menu
The Edit menu provides access to the following commands: Copy (on page 25) Delete (on page 36) Paste (on page 25) Project Defaults (on page 37)
See also
Copy
Copies an isometric directory, project or style.

Paste
Pastes an isometric directory, project or style.

36
Delete
Deletes an isometric directory, project or style. Exercise caution when using the Delete command. You cannot undo a deletion.

Delete an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Delete a Project (on page 122) Delete a Style (on page 560)
Project Defaults
1. In the Project View panel, select a project. 2. Click Project Defaults . Alternatively, you can click Edit > Project Defaults. The software displays the Project Defaults dialog box. 3. Define values for the properties as required. The project defaults that the software displays are product-specific. Consequently, not all properties display for all products. Material Database (on page 97) Repeat Style (on page 98) Imported Weld Numbers (on page 98) Imported Part Numbers (on page 99) Imported Split Points (on page 100) Imported Spool Ids (on page 100) Import Directory (on page 101) PreProcessor (on page 102) GED Configuration (on page 102) Project Work Folder (on page 103) Straight Length (on page 103) Project ID Type (on page 104) SmartPlant Integration (on page 104) Default Support Category (on page 105)
37
In the case of the default application, such as I-Run, no project defaults are displayed. You can click the Attributes tab to display pipeline, component, weld and bolt attribute information.
See also
Attributes (on page 105) ProjectConfig_application.xml (see "ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml" on page 13)
38
Wizards Menu
The Wizards menu provides access to four wizards that you can use to help define various aspects of a style. Drawing Setup Wizard (on page 39) Welding Wizard (on page 51) Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Reports Wizard (on page 63)
You can also access the SmartPlant I-Configure wizards using the Wizards toolbar in the Overview panel (on page 81).
Drawing Setup Wizard

You use the Drawing Setup wizard to customize the various parts of the isometric drawing.
The Drawing Setup wizard requires VoloView Express. Without VoloView Express, the Drawing Setup wizard does not run. For information about installing VoloView Express, see the SmartPlant Isometrics Installation Guide. You can access the installation guide using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software. SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide 39
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface The Drawing Setup wizard consists of the following pages: Drawing Area (see "Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 42) Report Options (see "Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 43) Material List (see "Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 46) Attributes (see "Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 47)
Drawing Setup Wizard Toolbar

The following table lists the commands that are available on the Drawing Setup Wizard toolbar. Help Cancel Go back to previous step Go forward to next step Finish Pan Zoom Window Zoom In/Out Zoom All
Click Go forward to next step and Go back to previous step to move through the pages of the Drawing Setup wizard. If you right-click anywhere in the Drawing Setup wizard, the VoloView Express shortcut menu displays. VoloView Express provides a 2D CAD environment for the display of the backing frame. You are advised not to use the facilities available on the VoloView shortcut menu. Instead, use only the commands available on the Drawing Setup wizard.
See also Template File (see "Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 41)
40
Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)

The Template File page of the Drawing Setup wizard allows you to customize the drawing frame, which includes the extents of the area shown by the green highlighted border.
You can define the following Template File properties: Drawing output format - Controls the 2D CAD file format that ISOGEN creates. For more information, see OutputFormat (on page 186) Drawing Size - Controls the size of the drawing. For more information, see DrawingSize (on page 182). Template file may be specified - Specifies the file to be used for the backing sheet. For more information, see TemplateFile (on page 338). Backing Sheet Units - Specifies the drawing units to be used for the project. For more information, see Options (on page 77). Isogen to generate standard drawing frame - Ignores the user-specified template backing sheet. ISOGEN generates drawings using its own in-built drawing frame.
41
See also
Drawing Setup Wizard (on page 39) Drawing Area (see "Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 42) Report Options (see "Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 43) Material List (see "Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 46) Attributes (see "Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 47)
Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)

The Drawing Area page of the Drawing Setup wizard allows you to customize the drawing area, or the area contained within the blue highlighted border.
Change the Margins by Section 1. Click the margin you want to change. The software highlights the column in red and the cursor updates from a pointer to a cross, indicating that the margin is selected and ready to be altered. 2. Move the cross until it is over the margin, depress the left-mouse button, drag the margin boundary to a new position, and then release the mouse. The position of the margin updates and the new value appears in the Margins table.
42
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface To accurately fit the Drawing area, zoom in to each corner of the area being defined. Change the Margins by Editing Values 1. Double-click in the field of the margin to be edited. 2. Type in the new value and then press Enter. For more information about the Drawing Area properties that you can define, read the following topics: LeftMargin (on page 335) RightMargin (on page 336) TopMargin (on page 335) BottomMargin (on page 335)
See also
Drawing Setup Wizard (on page 39) Template File (see "Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 41) Report Options (see "Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 43) Material List (see "Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 46) Attributes (see "Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 47)
Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)

The Report Options page of the Drawing Setup wizard allows you to customize the various lists.
43
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface The options shown on the next pages of the wizard are dependent upon the options selected on the following page, such as whether the backing frame has sections for the material, welding and cutting lists.
44
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface Consider the following illustration. This template backing frame has only a two-part Material list: a Fabrication section, shown by the boxes highlighted in blue, and an Erection section, shown by the boxes highlighted in green.
You can use the options in the Material List grid to define the layout and appearance of the reported materials. Then, when ISOGEN processes the style to produce isometric drawings, the material list is automatically populated to report the materials that make-up the pipeline (or spool). If this backing frame had sections for welding and cutting information, it would have also been necessary to define attributes for these reports, too. For more information about the specific properties that you can define, see the following topics: Material List (see "Material List Object" on page 355) OneSection (see "MaterialList UserDefined OneSection Object" on page 380) TwoSection (see "MaterialList UserDefined TwoSection Object" on page 382) ThreeSection (see "MaterialList UserDefined ThreeSection Object" on page 385) Weld List (see "WeldList Object" on page 412) Cut List (see "CutList Object" on page 435)
45
See also
Drawing Setup Wizard (on page 39) Template File (see "Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 41) Drawing Area (see "Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 42) Material List (see "Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 46) Attributes (see "Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 47)
Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)

The Material List page of the Drawing Setup wizard allows you to customize the Material list (those boxes shown highlighted in blue).
For the previous example, see the following topics MaterialList Object (see "Material List Object" on page 355) UserDefined Object (see "MaterialList UserDefined Object" on page 372) TwoSection Object (see "MaterialList UserDefined TwoSection Object" on page 382)
Click on any of the attributes in the grid and the corresponding rectangle in the graphical view is highlighted to show its plotted position on the isometric.
46
See also
Drawing Setup Wizard (on page 39) Template File (see "Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 41) Drawing Area (see "Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 42) Report Options (see "Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 43) Attributes (see "Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 47)
Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)

The Attributes page of the Drawing Setup wizard allows you to customize the pipeline attribute areas on the title block (those areas shown highlighted in magenta).

Add a New Attribute (on page 48) Remove Attributes (on page 48) Graphically Move an Attribute (on page 49) Select an Attribute Graphically and Edit its Value in the Attributes Grid (on page 49) Change Column Widths in the Attribute Grid (on page 49) Copy and Paste Attributes (on page 50)
47
See also
Drawing Setup Wizard (on page 39) Template File (see "Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 41) Drawing Area (see "Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 42) Report Options (see "Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 43) Material List (see "Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 46)
Add a New Attribute

1. Click +/- to open the Drawing Frame Attributes dialog box:
2. In the Available list, select the attribute (or attributes) to be added. 3. Click > to add the attribute In Use list. 4. Click Quit. The dialog box closes, and the new attribute is located on the left-hand side of the drawing frame. 5. Position as required, by graphically selecting and moving it, and then adjust its position by editing it in the attribute grid.
Remove Attributes
1. 2. 3. 4. 48 Click +/- to open the Drawing Frame Attributes dialog box. In the In Use list, select the attribute (or attributes) to be removed. Click < to remove the attribute from In Use list. Click Quit. SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
Graphically Move an Attribute

1. Click the attribute you want to move. The software highlights the attribute in red and the pointer changes to a cross. 2. Click the attribute again and move it to a new position.
Select an Attribute Graphically and Edit its Value in the Attributes Grid
1. Click an attribute box. The software highlights the attribute in red in the Attributes grid.
2. Double-click the field of the attribute to be edited. 3. Type in the new value and press Enter. Alternatively, you can select the value required from the shortcut menu.
Change Column Widths in the Attribute Grid

Click and drag the left or right border of the column to increase or decrease the width.
49
Copy and Paste Attributes

1. Right-click in the Attributes grid and click Copy in the shortcut menu.
2. Right-click again in the Attributes grid and click Paste in the shortcut menu.
50
Welding Wizard
You can use the Welding wizard to manage the numbering, types and appearance of welds on the isometric drawing.
Welding Wizard Toolbar

The following table lists the commands that are available on the Welding Wizard toolbar. Help Cancel Go back to previous step Go forward to next step Finish Pan Zoom Window Zoom In/Out Zoom All
See also
Weld Types (on page 52)
51
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface All Weld Types (on page 54) Drawing Welds Object (on page 301) ShowWelds (on page 303) WeldTypes (on page 327) ShowWeldNumbers (on page 303) WeldNumberSequence (on page 326) SupportWeldSeq (on page 325)
Weld Types
The Weld Types page of the Welding wizard allows you to specify which weld types will have their appearance changed from the default settings, such as those used for erection welds. You can change the settings for each weld type by clicking > (single) or >> (all).

Change Settings for a Single Weld Type (on page 53) Change Settings for All Weld Types (on page 53) Remove Weld Types (on page 53)
See also
Drawing Welds Object (on page 301) Welding Wizard (on page 51)
52
Change Settings for a Single Weld Type

1. Select a weld type in the These weld types will share settings list. 2. Click > to move the selected weld type to the These weld types will have different settings list. 3. Click Go forward to the next step to change weld type settings. The template settings, such as those used for erection welds, are displayed first on the next page of the Welding wizard and apply to all weld types except those chosen to be different. Subsequent pages in the Welding wizard allow you to define the settings for the other weld types individually.
Change Settings for All Weld Types

1. Click >> to include all weld types on the These weld types will have different settings list. 2. Click Go forward to the next step to change weld type settings. The template settings, such as those used for erection welds, are displayed first on the next page of the Welding wizard. Settings for other weld types display on all subsequent pages
Remove Weld Types

1. Select a weld type in the These weld types will share settings list. 2. Click < and the weld type is shown in the These weld types will share settings list. Click << and all weld types are included in the These weld types will share settings list.
53
All Weld Types
See also
Welding Wizard (on page 51)
54
Dimensioning Wizard
The Dimensioning wizard is used to customize the style of dimensioning used on the isometric drawing.
Dimensioning Wizard Toolbar

The following table lists the commands that are available on the Dimensioning Wizard toolbar. Help Cancel Go back to previous step Go forward to next step Finish Pan Zoom Window Zoom In/Out Zoom All
55
See also
Dimension Format (see "Dimension Format Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 56) Dimensioning Style (see "Dimensioning Style Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 57) Overall Dimensioning (see "Overall Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 58) Gasket Dimensioning (see "Gasket Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 59) Elevations/Vertical Dimensions (see "Elevations/Vertical Dimensions Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 60) Coordinates (see "Coordinates Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 61) Units Formatting (see "Units Formatting Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 62)
Dimension Format Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Dimension Format page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to specify the format of dimensioning used.
See also
Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) Format (on page 207)
56
Dimensioning Style Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Dimension Style page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to define the style of dimensioning.
See also
Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) USAStyle (on page 228)
57
Overall Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Overall Dimension page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to specify overall dimensioning.
See also
Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) Overall (on page 215)
58
Gasket Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Gasket Dimensioning page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to specify the dimensioning of gaskets.
See also
Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) Gaskets (on page 210)
59
Elevations/Vertical Dimensions Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Elevation/Vertical Dimensions page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to specify how elevations and vertical dimensions are shown on the isometric.
See also
Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) VertOption (on page 236)
60
Coordinates Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Co-ordinates page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to specify how coordinates are shown at elevations and vertical dimensions.
See also
Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) CoordOutputBranches (on page 205) CoordOutputBends (on page 204) CoordSupports (on page 205)
61
Units Formatting Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Units Formatting page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to define how units used for both dimensions and coordinates.
See also
Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) Options (on page 77) ImperialFormat (on page 211) FtInTolerance (on page 209) MetresDimensions (on page 213) MetresCoordinates (on page 213)
62
Reports Wizard
You use the Reports wizard is used to customize the various report file outputs available in SmartPlant I-Configure. The reports selected apply to the current style.
Reports Wizard Toolbar

The following table lists the commands that are available on the Reports Wizard toolbar. Help Cancel Go back to previous step Go forward to next step Finish Pan Zoom Window Zoom In/Out Zoom All
63

Include a Report File (on page 64) Remove a Report File (on page 64)
See also
CutList SummaryFile Object (on page 450) WeldList SummaryFile Object (on page 428) Supplementary Object (on page 456)
Include a Report File

1. Select the report in the Available Report Files list. 2. Click > to move the report to the Report Files in current style list. For each report file chosen to be output, a separate page is displayed by the Reports wizard so that you can customize it.
Remove a Report File

1. Select the report in the Available Report Files list. 2. Click < and the report is included in the Report Files in current style list.
Tools Menu
The Tools menu provides access to the following commands: Preview Drawing (on page 64) Find (on page 66) View Isogen Controls (on page 69) Import Style Settings (on page 73) Import Style Fragment (on page 75) Project Access Rights (on page 76) Options (on page 77)
See also
64
Preview Drawing
Exports the current style and runs ISOGEN on a standard PCF to create an isometric drawing so that you can see the effect of the style's current settings.

Preview the Drawing (on page 65) View the Drawing (on page 66) View the Message File (on page 66) View the Report Output (see "View Report File Output" on page 66)
The default drawing output is DXF. The default text editor linked to this dialog box is Notepad. To view any errors reported by ISOGEN, open the message file.
See also
Export (on page 35)
Preview the Drawing

Click Tools > Preview Drawing . Alternatively, you can click Preview Drawing on the toolbar.
65
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface ISOGEN executes, and when finished, SmartPlant I-Configure displays the Isogen Preview dialog box:
View the Drawing

Click DRAWING from the File Type column and then click View.
View the Message File

Click MESSAGE from the File Type column and click View.
View Report File Output

Click the report from the File Type column and click View.
66
Find
Locates items by Property, Option Switch, and File Section.

Search by Property (on page 67) Search by Option Switch (on page 67) Search by File Section (on page 68)
Search by Property
1. Click Tools > Find. 2. Click the Property button, type a text string in the Property box and press Enter. The software lists all the properties containing the specified text string in the Search results list.
When you double-click a property in the Search results list, the software displays that property in the Properties panel (on page 80).
Search by Option Switch

1. Click Tools > Find. 2. Click the Option switch button. 3. In the Options switch box, type the option switch number, SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide 67
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface 4. Type the position of the option switch in the Position box. The software lists all the properties containing the specified option switch criteria in the Search results list.
When you double-click a property in the Search results list, the software displays that property in the Properties panel (on page 80).
Search by File Section

1. Click Tools > Find. 2. Click the File section button to base the search on a specific section of an input file. 3. Select the file in the list:
68
View Isogen Controls

Opens the View ISOGEN Controls window in which you can preview the ISOGEN settings for the style. 1. Click Tools > View Isogen Controls to open the ISOGEN Control Files dialog box.
2. Click OK to close the dialog box. If you double-click a file in the dialog box, the software opens it using your default text editor. To close the file, click File > Cancel.
Import Project
Imports an existing PipMan, Spoolgen 4 or I-Configure-based projects into SmartPlant IConfigure.
69
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface PipMan and Spoolgen 4 projects must be imported into SmartPlant I-Configure before they can be used with any other product that now uses SmartPlant I-Configure to create and manage projects and styles. After the import is complete, the imported project appears in the Project View panel. You can now edit the project and modify its properties using SmartPlant I-Configure. Import of project and style settings is intelligent. If a project folder is replicated-- that is, there is a common structure apart from the drive--then the software modifies the path in the style (OPT or FLS) so that it points to the referenced file in its new location. For example, if you copy a project folder from G:\M5000 to C:\USERS\DATA\COMPANYNAME\MP4000, the software identifies the common root (MP4000). Any file referenced from an OPT file in this path, will have its path modified--G:\MP4000\DATA\CPT.FDF is modified to C:\USERS\DATA\COMPANYNAME\MP4000\DATA\CPT.FDF, provided this file exists.

Import a PipMan Project (on page 70) Import a Spoolgen 4 Project (on page 71) Import an I-Configure Project (on page 72)
See also
Export Behaviour (on page 126) Import Style Settings (on page 73) Import Style Fragment (on page 75)
Import a PipMan Project

1. Create a new isometric directory (see "Create an Isometric Directory" on page 88) in SmartPlant I-Configure. 2. Click Tools > Import Project.
3. In the Import Project dialog box, click Browse
and navigate to the project's *.pip file.
70
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface 4. Specify the required import options, and then click OK.
5. Select the application to which the project applies in the Application list.
6. Click OK. 7. If required, click Yes to view the log file; otherwise, click No. Until they're imported, PipMan projects are always shown in magenta in the Project View panel. After import, the original PipMan project remains on the drive as a backup copy.
Import a Spoolgen 4 Project

1. Create a new isometric directory (see "Create an Isometric Directory" on page 88) in SmartPlant I-Configure.
71
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface 2. Click Tools > Import Project.
3. In the Import Project dialog box, click Browse and navigate to the project's *.ini file. 4. Define the required import options and then click OK. 5. Select the application to which the project belongs in the Application list and then click OK. 6. If necessary, click Yes to view the log file; otherwise, click No. Existing Spoolgen 4 projects are not shown in the Project View panel. The imported Spoolgen 4 project is only available for use with Spoolgen 5. After import, the original Spoolgen 4 project remains on the drive as a backup copy.
Import an I-Configure Project

Import of a SmartPlant I-Configure project involves selecting a Project_Data.xml (on page 13) file. By default, the project settings (project defaults, attributes) and data (all files in the source project folder) are copied to a new project. Optionally, the copying of data files can be suppressed, leaving the new project with the identical structure as the old one but empty. 1. Create a new isometric directory (see "Create an Isometric Directory" on page 88). 2. Click Tools > Import Project.
72
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface 3. In the Import Project dialog box, click Browse project to be imported: and navigate to the *.xml file for the
4. Do one of the following: a. Click OK to accept the defaults. b. Select Import Project settings only if only the project settings are to be imported and then click OK.
The project and all associated styles--existing drawing files and all files in the source project folder--are copied to a new project. If you selected Import Project settings only, only the style files are imported. Drawing and report files generated previously are not.
73
Import Style Settings

Imports existing styles from various sources. You can import any of the following: I-Configure .xml file Personal Isogen .fls file SPOOLGEN .opt file PDS Isogen .def file Alias .idf file
In the following example, an existing SPOOLGEN v4 *.opt style is imported. 1. Click Tools > Import Style.
2. Click Browse and navigate to the file you want to import. 3. Select the file type required from the Files of type list, select the file you want to import, and then click Open.
74
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface 4. Specify the import options required and then click Open. 5. Depending on the current status of the styles within the project, do one of the following: If the style being imported does not exist in the project, the only option available is to import it as a completely new style. If the style already exists within the project but will be used as a basis for another new style, click Create a new style (to create a completely new style) and then type a name for the new style. If the style already exists in the project, to import it into an existing style so that its settings are overwritten, click Import into the current style and clear the Clear style first checkbox. To import into an existing style, but clear the contents of the style first, click Import into the current style and the Clear style first checkbox .
The style is imported and you have an opportunity to view a log file created during the style import process. After import, the style becomes available under the project into which is was imported, and is shown in the Project View panel
See also
Import Project (on page 69) Import Style Fragment (on page 75)
Import Style Fragment

Imports a style "fragment" into the current style. A style fragment is contained in an XML file that specifies a set of properties to be set and/or a set of members for a collection object, such as a set of TextColumns to be used with MaterialList SummaryFile object. If a style fragment file exists in the same folder as a template file, with the same name and with an .xml extension, it is automatically loaded. This allows the setting of properties specific to the template file, such as margins, list locations, and so on. 1. In the Project View panel, select the style to which the style fragment applies, such as Final-Basic. 2. Click Tools > Import Style Fragment. 3. Browse to the XML file for the style fragment and then click Open. SmartPlant I-Configure reads the content of the style fragment XML file and applies the new properties to the style.
See also
Import Project (on page 69) Import Style Settings (on page 73)
75
Export Style Fragment

Exports a style "fragment" to a file. 1. In the Project View panel, select the style to which the style fragment applies, such as FinalBasic. 2. Click Tools > Export Style Fragment. 3. Input style fragment file name and select open. SmartPlant I-Configure reads the content of the style and creates an XML file.
See also
Style.xml (on page 15) Import Style Settings (on page 73)
Project Access Rights

Modifies the access rights on a project. Access rights can be password protected--the first person to set the access rights is able to set a password to prevent other users from modifying it. In this way, a project can be set up in such a way that others can see and use it but cannot save changes to the project or any of the styles contained within it.
To avoid situations where the project cannot be modified, such as when the password is forgotten, ensure that you make a note of the password used for each project. See our disclaimer. Once a password is set, the access rights cannot be changed unless the correct password is supplied. If the access rights are set to Write, then all users of the project are allowed to save changes to the style and export the style settings. If set to Read Only, then users may make changes, but these cannot be saved or exported. When you set project access rights to Write using a valid password, any existing password is cleared.
See also
AccessRights (on page 96)
76
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface Export (on page 35) LockedBy (on page 96)
Options
Specifies the drawing units to be used for the project and controls how paths are displayed in the Project View panel for network projects.
1. Click Tools > Options. 2. In the Options dialog box, specify the appropriate Drawing units. Drawing units impacts text positioning of attributes, dimensional properties, such as CharHeight, CharWidth, and so on, used by several objects in SmartPlant I-Configure. The value entered for a property should be a real number, as illustrated in the following table: 3 or 3.0 for 3mm 0.125 for 1/8 inch - When drawing units set to mm. - When drawing units set to inches.
To use UNC paths, click Use UNC path when creating network isometrics directories . Alternatively, particularly when setting up a network project (see "Set up a Network Project" on page 16) with long path names that can exceed the current ISOGEN path length limitation, de-select the checkbox, and the path is displayed using a mapped drive.
Help Menu
The Help menu provides access to the following commands: About SmartPlant I-Configure (on page 78) SmartPlant I-Configure Help (on page 77)
See also
77
SmartPlant I-Configure Help

Displays the online documentation delivered with the software.
About SmartPlant I-Configure

Displays information about the current version of SmartPlant I-Configure. This information can be useful when support issues arise.
Toolbar
The SmartPlant I-Configure toolbar allows quick and easy access to some of the most frequently used commands. Create a new isometric directory Connect to an existing isometric directory. Disconnect from an existing isometric directory. Create a new project. Create a new style. Save the current style. Delete the selected item. Copy the selected object. Paste the copied object. Enable the project for application. Edit project defaults. Export the current style. Add to the collection. Remove from the collection. Preview ISOGEN output. Open the Help file.
See also
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface (on page 29) Menus (on page 31) Shortcut Menu (on page 24)
78
Project View Panel

The Project View panel displays all of the available isometric directories, projects and styles in a tree view format.
Clicking the + and - boxes situated directly to the left of the isometric directory, or project expands or collapses the tree structure, allowing you to navigate to the available styles and make modifications. You can use the Project View panel to create, edit and manage isometric directories, projects, and styles. As you select any level in the tree view, its properties are displayed in the Properties panel. Changing the value of each property ultimately determines the appearance of the isometric drawings and report file content produced when using the style in other products, such as SmartPlant Isometrics. SmartPlant I-Configure shows existing PipMan projects and styles in magenta. PipMan projects and styles (as read directly from the drive) cannot be modified in the software, but they can be imported. You can also import projects and styles from other products. For more information, see Import Style (see "Import Style Settings" on page 73).
See also
New (on page 31) Copy (on page 25) Paste (on page 25) Properties (on page 21) Properties Panel (on page 80) Import Project (on page 69)
79
Properties Panel
The Properties panel displays the values that are defined for each object property or the definitions (in row/spreadsheet format) of a collection.
See also
Clear (on page 26) Collections (on page 22) Find (on page 66) Objects (on page 20) Properties (on page 21) Values (on page 21)
80
Overview Panel
The Overview panel displays a simplified overview of the key properties of a style, for both the drawing and report output.
When you select any property from those shown, the Properties panel updates to show the location of the property and the object to which it belongs. Correspondingly, when you select the property in the Overview panel and click the Detail tab, the software automatically navigates to the object that the property belongs to and displays it in the Detail panel.
Wizards Toolbar
The Wizards toolbar provides quick access to the SmartPlant I-Configure wizards (see "Wizards Menu" on page 38). Drawing Setup Wizard Welding Wizard Dimensioning Wizard Reports Wizard
See also
Project View Panel (on page 79) Properties Panel (on page 80) Detail Panel (on page 82)
81
Detail Panel
The Detail panel shows all of the objects for the currently selected style in a tree view format.
A style is broken down into the following seven main objects. Each style object is in turn further broken down into sub objects. AlternativeTexts Object (on page 163) Drawing Object (on page 166) DrawingFrame Object (on page 334) MaterialList Object (see "Material List Object" on page 355) WeldList Object (on page 412) CutList Object (on page 435) Supplementary Object (on page 456)
82
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface When you click a style object in the Detail panel, the Properties displays all of its currently defined properties. In the following illustration, the properties of the Drawing Content object are displayed in the Properties panel.
As in Windows Explorer, you can click and tree in order to navigate the various style objects.
to expand and collapse the nodes of the
You can modify most of these object properties. Changing the value of each property ultimately determines the appearance of the isometric drawings and report file content produced when the style is exported for use in other products, such as SmartPlant Isometrics. Using the previous illustration as an example, changing the True/False settings controls whether the feature of the isometric drawing controlled by each of the Properties shown is displayed on the drawing or not.
83
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface An object can contain a collection of other objects, which is a set of identical and related objects that are also known as definitions). For example, the MaterialList SummaryFile object can contain a set of TextColumn objects. Each one defines a single column in the SummaryFile output.
In the previous illustration, the properties (AttributeName, Offset and MaxChars ) for the selected MaterialList UserDefined object are stored in a collection called XYColumns(5). The (5) indicates the number of definitions, or objects, in the collection. The Properties panel shows the corresponding properties.
See also
Add to Collection (on page 23) Collections (on page 22) Export (on page 35) 84 SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface Remove from Collection (on page 23)
Status Bar
The status bar is situated at the bottom of the SmartPlant I-Configure Main window and displays the following details: Current Isometric Directory - In the previous illustration, the Current Isometric Directory is C:\SampleIsoDir. This field updates when another Isometric directory is selected in the Project View panel. Current Project - In the previous illustration, the Current Project is Tutorial. This field updates when another project is selected in the Project View panel. Current Style - In the previous illustration, the Current Style is None. This field only shows a valid style name when a style is selected in the Project View panel. Contents of copy buffer - In the previous illustration, the Contents of the copy buffer is Final-Basic. If the copy buffer is empty, as in after a Paste action, the field displays None.
See also
Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface (on page 29) Shortcut Menu (on page 24) Toolbar (on page 78)
85
SECTION 4
Isometric Directories
Isometric Directory Object Properties
The properties for each isometric directory are stored in their own object.
When you click an isometric directory in the Project View panel, the Properties panel updates to show its corresponding object properties. In the previous illustration, the Properties panel is displaying the object properties of the SampleIsoDir isometric directory.
Object Properties
Path - Displays the isometric directory folder file path. This information is read-only and cannot be modified. Name - Displays the isometric directory folder name. This information is read-only and cannot be modified. ChangeProjectList - Specifies whether you can add or delete projects to and from the isometric directory. If set to True, adding and deleting projects is allowed. If there is not write access to the ProjectList.xml (on page 15), the property value is set to False and no add/delete functions can be completed.
87
Isometric Directories ChangeIsoDirList - Specifies whether you can add or delete isometric directories to and from the global list. If set to True, adding and deleting isometric directories is allowed. If there is no write access to the IsoDirList.xml (on page 13) file, the property value is set to False, and no add/delete functions can be completed. This property is not visible in SmartPlant I-Configure.
See also
Project Object Properties (on page 91) Style Object (see "Style Object Properties" on page 125) Create an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89) Delete an Isometric Directory (on page 88)
Create an Isometric Directory

1. Click New Isometric Directory . Alternatively, you can click File > New > Isometric Directory. 2. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, double-click the drive or specify the network path on which you want to create the new isometric directory. 3. Click New Folder. 4. Edit the name of the new folder to be the name of the new isometric directory and the then click OK. The new isometric directory appears in the Project View panel. Isometric directory object properties are shown in the Properties panel . After you create an isometric directory, you must next create a project (on page 121) to hold styles. If you select the No Projects level in the Project View panel, Create New Project unavailable. is
In order to create a project, you must first select the isometric directory. On Windows NT4 systems, New Folder does not appear on the Create Isometric Directory dialog box. Use Windows Explorer to create a folder with the required isometric directory name before selecting this as the isometric directory to be used.
See also
Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89) Delete an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Isometric Directory Object Properties (on page 87)
88
Delete an Isometric Directory

Deleting a remote isometric directory only removes the reference to it from the Project View panel, the folder is not deleted. You cannot delete remote project and style folders. 1. In the Project View panel, click the isometric directory you want to delete. 2. Click Delete .
Alternatively, you can click Edit > Delete. You can also right-click the isometric directory in the Project View panel and then click Delete on the shortcut menu.
Deleting an isometric directory cannot be undone.
See also
Delete (on page 36) Create an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89) Isometric Directory Object Properties (on page 87)
89
Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory

1. In the Project View panel, click the isometric directory you want to copy. 2. Click Copy . Alternatively, you can click Edit > Copy, or you can right-click the isometric directory and then click Copy on the shortcut menu (on page 24). 3. With the isometric directory still selected, click Paste . Alternatively, you can click Edit > Paste or click Paste on the shortcut menu. 4. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, double-click the drive or specify a network path on which the copied (new) isometric directory is going to be placed. 5. Click New Folder and then edit the name of the new folder to be the name of the pasted (new) isometric directory. 6. Isometric directories that exist on the same drive cannot have the same name. 7. Click OK. The Project View panel updates to show the newly pasted isometric directory, including all the projects and styles that were part of the original isometric directory.
See also
Create an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Delete an Isometric Directory (on page 88)
90
SECTION 5
Projects
Project Object Properties
The properties for each project are stored in their own object. The project object controls the following properties: Name (on page 93) Path (on page 93) Source (on page 93) AppList (on page 93) AppCount (on page 93) WeldGaps (on page 94) ElbowConversion (on page 94) ChangeStyleList (on page 95) AccessRights (on page 96) LockedBy (on page 96)
91
Projects When you select a project in the Project View panel, the software updates the Properties panel to display the properties specific to the selected project. In the following illustration, the Properties panel is showing the properties that have been defined for the SPITutorial project.
Project properties are read only and cannot be modified.
See also
Isometric Directory Object Properties (on page 87) Style Object Properties (on page 125) Import Project (on page 69) Create a Project (see "Project" on page 32) Copy and Paste a Project (on page 121) Delete a Project (on page 122)
92
Projects
Name
Specifies the project folder name.
Path
Specifies the project folder file path.
Source
Displays the vendor-specific string that was defined when the project was created. For example, a project created by an Intergraph product, such as SmartPlant Isometrics, has the Source set to Intergraph. The Source string is controlled by the SetSource method as described in the ProjectConfig_application.xml file. The Source property allows a vendor to judge whether its software can use the project, and allows the user to identify which projects are created by which vendor software products. Products such as SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen can share a project. This is a read only property and cannot be modified.
See also
Create a Project (on page 121) Enable Project (on page 34) ProjectConfig_application.xml (see "ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml" on page 13)
AppList
Displays the names of the enabled products in a semi-colon delimited list, such as Spoolgen;SmartPlant Isometrics.
AppCount
Displays the number of software products enabled (see "Enable Project" on page 34) on the project.
93
Projects
WeldGaps
Contains an XML-formatted text string, which defines the rules for ISOGEN to allow for weld gaps, weld shrinkage, connection gaps and connection insertion lengths, when dimensioning and adjusting cut piece lengths. Initially the WeldGaps property value is empty. To populate, you must double-click the property value box and then click File > Update in the WeldGaps window.
If any data is present in the WeldGaps property, you can set the UseWeldGapData property on the MaterialList CutList object to True so that so that data is written to the ISOGEN Welding Definition File (WDF). When you import a style, if the WDF contains a WELD-GAPS entry, the WeldGaps and MaterialList.CutList.UseWeldGapData properties are both set to True.
See also
CutList Object (on page 435) Import Style Settings (on page 73) UseWeldGapData (on page 439)
ElbowConversion
Contains an XML format text string. The ElbowConversion property defines the rules for the following: Conversion of elbows to pulled bends for products such as SmartPlant Spoolgen. Cut length adjustments that ISOGEN makes make to the length of cut pieces to allow for extra lengths of pipe to satisfy the requirements of particular bending machines.
94
Projects If any data is present in ElbowConversion property, it is used by SmartPlant Spoolgen for converting elbows to bends. Also, if data is present, then all styles which output cut list information must set the UseTangentData property on the MaterialList CutList object to True to make sure that the cut list values are correct. Initally, the ElbowConversion property value is empty. Double-click the property value box and then click File > Update in the ElbowConversion window.
When you import a style, if the DDF contains a STANDARD-BEND-LENGTHS entry, the ElbowConversion and MaterialList.CutList.UseTangentData properties are both set to True. The following is an example of a file for elbow to bend conversion:
See also
CutList Object (on page 435) Import Style Settings (on page 73) UseTangentData (on page 439)
ChangeStyleList
Specifies whether or not you add and delete styles from the project. If set to True, you can add and delete styles. If there is no write access to the ProjectList.xml file in the isometric directory on a network project, the ChangeListStyle property is set to False and add/delete functions are prohibited. If the project AccessRights property is set to ReadOnly, the ChangeStyleList property is also set to False.
See also
AccessRights (on page 96) ProjectList.xml (on page 15) Set Up a Network Project (on page 16)
95
Projects
AccessRights
Indicates the level of access to the project. The AccessRights property is either Write or ReadOnly. To change the access rights on a project, you must use the Project Access Rights (on page 76) command. You can lock the style files against unwanted modification in two ways: 1. Set the file system access control on the Style XML file or Style folder. 2. Set a password in the Project Access Rights dialog box. The style CanWrite and CanExport properties indicate whether the user has rights to save the style or export the style to ISOGEN control files. The AccessRights property is set to ReadOnly if the user does not have write access to the Project_data.xml file in the project folder. In this case, no changes can be saved to project properties.
See also
CanExport (on page 127) CanWrite (on page 127) Export (on page 35) LockedBy (on page 96) Set Up a Network Project (on page 16)
LockedBy
Displays the name of the individual who locked the project, presuming that the AccessRights property is set to ReadOnly. Otherwise, the property is blank.
See also
AccessRights (on page 96) Project Access Rights (on page 76)
Project Defaults
1. In the Project View panel, select a project. 2. Click Project Defaults . Alternatively, you can click Edit > Project Defaults. The software displays the Project Defaults dialog box. 3. Define values for the properties as required. The project defaults that the software displays are product-specific. Consequently, not all properties display for all products. Material Database (on page 97) Repeat Style (on page 98)
96
Projects Imported Weld Numbers (on page 98) Imported Part Numbers (on page 99) Imported Split Points (on page 100) Imported Spool Ids (on page 100) Import Directory (on page 101) PreProcessor (on page 102) GED Configuration (on page 102) Project Work Folder (on page 103) Straight Length (on page 103) Project ID Type (on page 104) SmartPlant Integration (on page 104) Default Support Category (on page 105)
In the case of the default application, such as I-Run, no project defaults are displayed. You can click the Attributes tab to display pipeline, component, weld and bolt attribute information.
See also
Attributes (on page 105) ProjectConfig_application.xml (see "ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml" on page 13)
Application
Specifies the software product, such as SmartPlant Spoolgen, to which the project defaults apply.
See also
Project Defaults (on page 37)
Material Database
Defines the path to the Material database used for additional material. You can create and modify the Material database using SmartPlant Material Editor. 1. Click Project Defaults . 2. Alternatively, you can click Edit > Project Defaults.
97
Projects 3. Click in the Value box for Material Database and then click .
4. In the Specify File dialog box, navigate to the required folder and then click Open.
See also
Repeat Style
Defines the style in the set of project styles that is used for drawing level Repeatability. 1. Click Project Defaults . 2. Alternatively, you can click Edit > Project Defaults. 3. Click in the Value box Repeat Style and then click . 4. Click a style in the list.
See also
Imported Weld Numbers

Specifies how imported weld numbers are handled. The following settings are available: Keep - Any weld numbers present in the PCF or IDF are kept. If none exist, then weld numbers are assigned by ISOGEN during import and kept. Weld numbers assigned on import use the SGImport style settings. Clear - Any weld numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are be cleared. Equivalent to the Tools > Weld Numbers > Clear command in SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen.
98
Projects Assign - Any weld numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import, are cleared and new weld numbers assigned. Weld numbers assigned are per pipeline with all welds having one sequence. Equivalent to the Tools > Weld Numbers > Assign command in SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen. Assign Repeat Data - The action depends upon whether it is the first time the pipeline has been processed or if it is a subsequent processing of the same pipeline. Pipeline processed for the first time - Any weld numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared and new weld numbers assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase. Subsequent processing of same pipeline - Any weld numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared. Weld numbers assigned during the initial run, which are stored in the pipeline object data (POD) file, are reinstated. Any new weld numbers are assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style settings match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase.
In all of the previously mentioned cases, when a revised pipeline data file is received, the weld numbers may not necessarily match those previously created.
See also
Repeat Style (on page 98) Project Defaults (on page 37)
Imported Part Numbers

Specifies how imported part numbers are handled. The following settings are available: Keep - Any part numbers present in the PCF or IDF are kept. If none exist, then part numbers are assigned by ISOGEN during import and kept. Part numbers assigned on import use the SGImport style settings. Clear - Any weld numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are be cleared. Equivalent to the Tools > Part Numbers > Clear command in SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen. Assign - Any part numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import, are cleared and new part numbers assigned. Part numbers assigned are per pipeline. Equivalent to the Tools > Part Numbers > Assign command in SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen. Assign Repeat Data - The action depends upon whether it is the first time the pipeline has been processed or if it is a subsequent processing of the same pipeline. Pipeline processed for the first time - Any part numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared and new part numbers assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style match those used in
99
Projects the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase. Subsequent processing of same pipeline - Any part numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared. Part numbers assigned during the initial run, which are stored in the pipeline object data (POD) file, are reinstated. Any new part numbers are assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style settings match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase.
In all of the previously mentioned cases, when a revised pipeline data file is received, the part numbers may not necessarily match those previously created.
See also
Imported Split Points

Specifies how imported split points are handled. The following settings are available: Keep - Any split points present in the PCF or IDF are kept. If none exist, then split points are assigned by ISOGEN during import and kept. Clear - Any split points present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are be cleared. Equivalent to the Tools > Clear Split Points command in SmartPlant Spoolgen. Assign Repeat Data - The action depends upon whether it is the first time the pipeline has been processed or if it is a subsequent processing of the same pipeline. Pipeline processed for the first time - Any split points present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared and new split points assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase. Subsequent processing of same pipeline - Any split points present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared. Split points assigned during the initial run, which are stored in the pipeline object data (POD) file, are reinstated. Any new split points will be assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style settings match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase.
In all of the previously mentioned cases, when a revised pipeline data file is received, the split points may not necessarily match those previously created.
See also
100
Projects
Imported Spool IDs

Specifies how imported spool IDs are handled. The following settings are available: Keep - Any spool IDs present in the PCF or IDF are kept. If none exist, then spool IDs are assigned by ISOGEN during import and kept. Clear - Any spool IDs present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are be cleared. Equivalent to the Tools > Clear Spool IDs command in SmartPlant Spoolgen. Assign Repeat Data - The action depends upon whether it is the first time the pipeline has been processed or if it is a subsequent processing of the same pipeline. Pipeline processed for the first time - Any spool IDs present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared and new spool IDs assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase. Subsequent processing of same pipeline - Any spool IDs present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared. Spool IDs assigned during the initial run, which are stored in the pipeline object data (POD) file, are reinstated. Any new spool IDs are assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style settings match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase.
In all of the previously mentioned cases, when a revised pipeline data file is received, the split points may not necessarily match those previously created.
See also
Import Directory
Defines the path to where the import files are stored. 1. Click Project Defaults . Alternatively, you can click Edit > Project Defaults.
101
Projects 2. Click in the Value box for Import Directory and then click .
3. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, navigate to the required folder and then click OK .
See also
PreProcessor
The two PreProcessor project defaults control the use of the Piping Data Processor utility in the piping work flow. PreProcessor Configuration - Specifies the path to the .ppc configuration file. PreProcessor on Import - If set to True, the software executes PipingDataProcessor.exe file to pre-process piping data input files on import into the project. If set to False, the PipingDataProcessor.exe file is not executed on import.
For more information, see the online documentation delivered with the Piping Data Processor utility.
See also
GED Configuration
Controls execution of the Get External Data functionality at various stages of the piping work flow. For each use of Get External Data, the content of the configuration file can be different. GED Configuration (Import) - Specifies the path to the External Data Configuration file used on import of piping data into the project. External Data on Import - If set to True, the Get External Data function is executed on import of piping data. If set to False, the Get External Data function is not executed on import.
102
Projects GED Configuration (Interactive) - Specifies the path to the External Data Configuration file used during the editing of piping data when you use the Tools > Get External Data command in SmartPlant Isometrics or SmartPlant Spoolgen. GED Configuration (Generate) - Specifies the path to the External Data Configuration file executed just prior to drawing generation. External Data on Generate Drawing - If set to True, the Get External Data function is executed prior to drawing generation. If set to False, the Get External Data function is not executed prior to drawing generation.
See also
External data (on page 565) XML Configuration File (on page 567) Project Defaults (on page 37)
Project Work Folder

Specifies the project Work folder where the user data is stored when checked out.
See also
Straight Length
Specifies the length of pipe to be used as the default for splitting long pipelines in SmartPlant Spoolgen.
See also
103
Projects
Project ID Type
Specifies what the SmartPlant Spoolgen project uses for files in the project: Pipeline Reference, File Name, or Reference and File Name. You define the Project ID Type when you create the project.
See also
Create a Project (on page 121) Project Defaults (on page 37)
SmartPlant Integration
A project must be registered before you can connect to the integrated environment to publish materials data. To register an isometric project with a SmartPlant Foundation plant, you use the SmartPlant Registration Wizard to define the following integration-specific project defaults: SmartPlant Foundation URL - Specifies the node name and virtual directory of the SmartPlant Foundation database with which you want to register your isometric project. Use the following format: http://SPFServer/VirtualDirectory. SmartPlant Foundation Plant - Specifies the SmartPlant Foundation plant with which you want to associate your isometric project. SmartPlant Foundation Signature - Unique 4-character code assigned to an authoring tool when it registers with SmartPlant Foundation.
Register a Project with a SmartPlant Foundation Plant 1. In the Project View panel, click the name of the isometric project you want to register. 2. Click Edit > Project Defaults. 3. Scroll down to SmartPlant Foundation URL in the Application list, and click in the Value cell to open the SmartPlant Registration Wizard. You can also click in the Value cell for SmartPlant Foundation Plant or SmartPlant Foundation Signature to open the SmartPlant Foundation Wizard.
104
Projects 4. On the SmartPlant Foundation URL page of the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, type the node name and virtual directory of the SmartPlant Foundation database with which you want to register. Use the following format: http://SPFServer/VirtualDirectory. 5. On the SmartPlant Foundation Plant page of the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, select the plant in the Plant name list with which you want to register and click Finish. 6. Click OK. The three SmartPlant Foundation project defaults are updated with the defined values.
You must first configure the software to work in an integrated environment by installing the Schema Component and the SmartPlant Client, which are both delivered with SmartPlant Foundation, on your SmartPlant Isometrics or your SmartPlant Spoolgen workstation. For more information, see the Integration Setup Guide, which delivered on the SmartPlant Foundation product DVD.
See also
Default Support Category

Specifies the default category for new supports: None, Fabrication, Erection, or Offshore.
See also
105
Projects
Attributes
You can use the Attributes tab on the Project Defaults dialog box to define names and default values for user attributes. You can also edit values to be taken by system attributes, such as Pipe Spec, Revision, and so on. DisplayName - Define the name required. In the following example, Weld Prefix (Fab) has been defined.
You can also use this field in external data configuration (see "GED Configuration" on page 102). DefaultValue - A value that can be set on Import, depending on the setting of the Set Value data field. Allowable Values - Displays the allowable values for this data field. Isogen Att - Displays the ISOGEN attribute to which the data field name is mapped. Attributes 1 to 99 map to ISOGEN -601 to -699. Attributes 100 to 199 map to ISOGEN -900 to -999.
106
Projects The following example shows a new attribute with a display name of P+ID-From as Attribute101 which is ISOGEN attribute -901.
Source - Indicates that the attribute is either a System or User attribute. Set Value - Displays one of the following: ISOGEN - if no DefaultValue is defined, in which case, the attribute cannot be modified. ISOGEN then Default - if there is a DefaultValue set, then SmartPlant Spoolgen uses the value in the ISOGEN input file if there is one; if not, it uses the DefaultValue. Default - SmartPlant Spoolgen uses the DefaultValue setting for the attribute regardless of whether there is a value in the input piping data file.
Units - Units applicable to the attribute, if required Visible - Controls whether the attribute is shown when the pipeline attributes are displayed in SmartPlant Spoolgen Editable - Controls whether the value can be changed in SmartPlant Spoolgen. Expression - For more information, see Attribute Expressions (on page 115). You can only delete user-defined attributes.
The Attributes tab allows you to manage attributes in any one of the following four attribute groups: Pipeline (see "Pipeline Attributes" on page 108) Component (see "Component Attributes" on page 110) Welds (see "Weld Attributes" on page 110) Bolts (see "Bolt Attributes" on page 111) Spool (see "Spool Attributes" on page 111) Material (see "Material Attributes" on page 112)
107
Projects The Context list organizes the attribute groups.
See also
Project Defaults (on page 37) Add a New Attribute (on page 112) Edit an Attribute (on page 113) Delete an Attribute (on page 114) Attribute Expressions (on page 115)
Pipeline Attributes
This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for the pipeline in SmartPlant I-Configure.
Pipeline Header Attribute

AREA data ATTRIBUTE1data to ATTRIBUTE199 data BATCH data BEND-RADIUS data DATE-DMY data HIGHEST-ASSEMBLY-NUMBER data HIGHEST-PART-NUMBER data HIGHEST-SPOOL-NUMBER data
Description
Identifies part of a project. Provides up to 199 user-defined pipe header attributes that can be used for any purpose.
Identifies part of a project. Standard pulled bend radius. D=Day M=Month Y=Year, such as 21/09/99. Specify in any order. Highest Assembly Number generated on the previous run of the pipeline. Highest Material List Part Number generated on the previous run of the pipeline. Highest Spool Number generated on the previous run of the pipeline.
108
Projects
Pipeline Header Attribute

HIGHEST-SUPPORT-WELDNUMBER data HIGHEST-UNIQUE-PARTIDENTIFIER data HIGHEST-WELD-NUMBER data INSULATION-SPEC data ITEM-ATTRIBUTE0 data to ITEM-ATTRIBUTE9 data MISC-SPEC1 data MISC-SPEC2 data MISC-SPEC3 data MISC-SPEC4 data MISC-SPEC5 data NOMINAL-CLASS data NOMINAL-RATING data OFFSET-IMPERIAL data OFFSET-METRIC data OUTPUT-FILE-NAME data PAINTING-SPEC data PIPELINE-REFERENCE data PIPELINE-TEMP data PIPELINE-TYPE data PIPING-SPEC data PROJECT-IDENTIFIER data REPLOT REVISION data SPECIFIC-GRAVITY data
Description
Highest Pipe Support Weld Number generated on the previous run of the pipeline. Highest Unique Part Identifier generated on the previous run of the pipeline. Highest Weld Number generated on the previous run of the pipeline. Insulation Spec reference. Provides up to 10 User defined material Attributes for use where component material descriptions are broken down into a series of short elements where data is defined in dynamic keywords like MATL RATING SPEC THKS etc. This provides an alternative method to having a single long material description in a component DESCRIPTION attribute. User defined Miscellaneous Specification Reference. User defined Miscellaneous Specification Reference. User defined Miscellaneous Specification Reference. User defined Miscellaneous Specification Reference. User defined Miscellaneous Specification Reference. Identifies pipeline design class. Identifies pipeline design class. Offset in feet from Datum point. Offset in meters from Datum point. Name to be used for drawing output file. Painting specification. Pipeline name. Pipeline operating temperature. Type of Pipeline construction. Pipeline specification reference. Project number or name. Single isometric re-plot request. Revision identifier. Specific gravity of pipeline contents.
109
Projects SPOOL-PREFIX data START-CO-ORDS data SUPPORT-WELD-PREFIXERECTION data SUPPORT-WELD-PREFIXFABRICATION data SUPPORT-WELD-PREFIXOFFSHORE data SYSTEM-ISOMETRICREFERENCE data TRACING-SPEC data WELD-PREFIX-ERECTION data WELD-PREFIX-FABRICATION data WELD-PREFIX-GENERAL data WELD-PREFIX-OFFSHORE data Prefix to be used on spool identifiers. Indicator to ensure IDF is generated with same start point on replot. Prefix to be used for the identification of all erection pipe support welds. Prefix to be used for the identification of all fabrication pipe support welds. Prefix to be used for the identification of all offshore pipe support welds. System isometric name. Tracing Specification reference. Prefix to be used for the identification of all erection welds. Prefix to be used for the identification of all fabrication welds General prefix to be used for the identification of all welds. Prefix to be used for the identification of all offshore welds.
Component Attributes
This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for components--pipes, flanges, valves, and so on--in SmartPlant I-Configure. ISOGEN supports a set of attributes that are available for all components, including a set of 10 user-definable ones. In addition, certain components have specific attributes. For example, a valve has a SPINDLE-DIRECTION attribute not used by other components. The Component Attributes tab shows the attributes available to all components. The following table shows the ISOGEN user-defined attributes:
Pipeline Data File Format

IDF PCF
Attributes
190 to -199 records COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENTATTRIBUTE10
110
Projects
Weld Attributes
This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for welds in SmartPlant I-Configure. ISOGEN supports a set of attributes that are available for all welds, including a set of 10 userdefinable attributes. Weld attributes are attached to welds in the 3D design system model, and it is recommended that you refer to your Design System Administrator for information on how to set them up. They are then passed to ISOGEN in extracted Piping Data files, either in IDF or PCF format. The following table lists the ISOGEN user-defined attributes:

IDF PCF
Attributes
180 to -189 records WELD-ATTRIBUTE1 to WELDATTRIBUTE10
In ISOGEN, in addition to being output on the isometric drawing, they can also be output to the Weld Summary file.
Bolt Attributes
This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for bolts in SmartPlant I-Configure. ISOGEN supports a set of attributes that are available for all bolts, including a set of 10 userdefinable attributes. The following table lists the ISOGEN user-defined attributes:

IDF PCF
Attributes
190 to -199 records
ASSEMBLY-ATTRIBUTE1 to ASSEMBLYATTRIBUTE10 In the case of bolts, ASSEMBLY-ATTRIBUTES are not included in the tab, but can be added clicking .
111
Projects
Spool Attributes
This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for Spools in SmartPlant I-Configure. The following table lists the ISOGEN user-defined attributes:

IDF PCF
Attributes
-28 -91 record -170 to -179 record SPOOL-IDENTIFIER SPOL-DRAWING-SEQUENCE- NUMBER SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE1 to SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE10
Material Attributes
This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for materials in SmartPlant I-Configure. The following table lists ISOGEN user-defined attributes:

IDF PCF
Attributes
-80 to -89 records MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to MATERIALATTRIBUTE10
Add a New Attribute

1. Click Project Defaults and then click the Attributes tab. 2. Click New. 3. In the New Attribute dialog box, use the Isogen attribute list to select the attribute you want to add.
112
Projects Isogen attribute is the name used in the PCF.
4. Define the attribute properties as required and then click OK . The new attribute is displayed in its group on the Attributes tab of the Project Defaults dialog box.
See also
Project Defaults (on page 37) Edit an Attribute (on page 113) Delete an Attribute (on page 114) Attribute Expressions (on page 115)
Edit an Attribute
1. Click Project Defaults and then click the Attributes tab. 2. Double-click the attribute you want to edit.
113
Projects 3. In the Attribute dialog box, edit the data as needed and then click OK.
Delete an Attribute
1. Click Project Defaults and then click the Attributes tab. 2. Select the attribute you want to delete and then click Remove. You can only delete user-defined attributes. Remove is only available when a user-defined attribute is selected.
See also
Project Defaults (on page 37) Add a New Attribute (on page 112) Edit an Attribute (on page 113)
114
Projects
Import PipeHeader Attributes

You can import project attributes from the PIPEHEADER-ATTRIBUTES section of a DDF or from the Personal ISOGEN .PIP file used in Project Manager (PipMan) projects. 1. Click Project Defaults and then click the Attributes tab. 2. Click Import on the Attributes tab. 3. In the Browse for Project Data dialog box, select the required input file format from the Files of type list. 4. Navigate to the required file, select it, and then click Open to import. If the Pipe Header attributes are imported, use care when using the External Pipeline attributes file.
Attribute Expressions
You can define an attribute as containing an expression that references other attributes in the same collection and can contain functions. The value of the attribute is then the result of evaluating the expression.
ATTRIBUTE1 = P-100-ABC ATTRIBUTE2 = Left($ATTRIBUTE1$,1) & Right($ATTRIBUTE1$,3)
In the previous example, ATTRIBUTE2 contains an expression. Its value (as seen in the properties dialog box in SmartPlant Spoolgen) is reported as PABC (the left most character plus the three right-hand characters from the string P -100-ABC). A good analogy is a spreadsheet, where a cell can reference the contents of another cell and built in spreadsheet functions. Cells can contain both values and formulas.
Expression Building Rules

References can be made only to other attributes in the same collection of attributes. That is, you cannot reference a pipeline attribute from a component. References to other attributes are made using the $ATTRIBUTE_NAME$ syntax. The ATTRIBUTE_NAME must be the underlying unique name for the attribute, not the DisplayName, which can be redefined by the user. The Expression Builder is used to help build correctly-defined expressions. Expressions are evaluated using the VBScript engine. That is, the syntax of the attribute expression must be valid VBScript syntax and can contain any function supported by that language. If an expression cannot be evaluated, regardless of the reason, the value reported is the original expression.
ATTRIBUTE2 = Left($ATTRIBUTE1$,1) : ATTRIBUTE2 would display P ATTRIBUTE2 = Lft($ATTRIBUTE1$,1) ATTRIBUTE2 would display Lft($ATTRIBUTE1$,1) [Lft is not a valid VBScript function]
115
Projects If the expression is expecting a string-- for example, the Left function takes a string value for its first argument--then the double quote () must be used around the attribute reference, whether or not the referenced attribute is defined as a string is irrelevant. Valid - Left($ATTRIBUTE1$,1) Invalid - Left($ATTRIBUTE1$,1)
The attribute containing the expression must be defined as a string. All the POD user-defined attributes (ATTRIBUTE1..ATTRIBUTE200, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1..COMPONENTATTRIBUTE10) are suitable for use as expressions.
Specifying That an Attribute Contains an Expression

1. Create a new attribute (see "Add a New Attribute" on page 112) (or edit an existing one) from the project defaults. 2. Select Evaluate Expression
Build becomes available on the dialog box. Although you can type an attribute expression directly into the Default value box, clicking Build displays the Expression Builder.
116
Projects
Expression Builder
The Expression Builder is divided into the following areas: Attributes - Lists all available (defined) attributes. Functions - Lists the functions that can be executed as part of expression. Expression - Type the expression Result -Displays the result when the expression is executed.
117
Projects 1. To add a new attribute reference, double-click the row containing the attribute you wish to add.
2. To add a function reference, select a function from the tree view on the right-hand side of the Expression Builder and then double-click it. The function is inserted in the Expression edit box at the cursor position. The tree view shows the function name and a one line help string.
3. To test the expression, type a value for any referenced expression in the grid on the left-hand side and click Test.
118
Projects The expression is evaluated using the values entered for the referenced attributes and the result displayed in the lower text box. In the event that the expression cannot be evaluated, an error message appears in the Result text box, indicating the cause.
In the previous illustration, the following errors are causing the Expression Builder to fail to evaluate: The right bracket on the Left function must be after the $PIPELINE-REFERENCE$. The Left function needs a parameter specifying how many characters to extract from the left most end of the string. The $PIPELINE-REFERENCE$ must be enclosed in quotes.
119
Projects When you correct the errors and re-run Expression Builder the result is C, the left-most character from the string CS150.
New Workflow Attributes

SmartPlant I-Configure is aware of the new work flow attributes that are added to the POD by SmartPlant Spoolgen when files are imported. These attributes are available in the Expression Builder for SmartPlant Spoolgen projects.
Expressions in the Alias Attribute Editor

The Attribute Editor control (AttributeEditor.ocx, 1.4 or later) supports the editing of expressions (using the Expression Builder defined in the previous section). Clicking an attribute that contains an expression displays the standard edit button:
120
Projects When you click , the software displays the Expression Builder. The dialog box is populated with current values of the attributes. Operation of the dialog box is the same as described in the previous sections. Editing an expression in SmartPlant Spoolgen only affects the current POD file. In order to change the expression for all future POD files in the project, the expression must be changed in SmartPlant I-Configure project defaults as previously described.
Copy and Paste a Project

1. In the Project View panel, click the project you want to copy. 2. Click Copy . Alternatively, you can click Edit > Copy, or you can right-click the project and then click Copy on the shortcut menu (on page 24). 3. In the Project View panel, click the isometric directory in which you want to paste the project. 4. Click Paste . The project and all of its associated styles are pasted into the Isometric directory. You can repeat steps 1-4 to copy and paste multiple projects.
Create a Project
1. Do one of the following: Create a new isometric directory (see "Create an Isometric Directory" on page 88) Select an existing isometric directory in the Project View panel.
2. Click Create New Project . Alternatively, you can click File > New > Project. 3. On the Create New Project dialog box, type a name for the new project in the New Project Name box. 4. In the Application list, click the name of the product to which the new project applies. 5. In the Available Styles list, select the styles required for the new project. You can include and exclude styles by checking and un-checking their check boxes. 6. Click OK. The software creates the project and its associated styles. A project must be created for use with a specific product. However, it is possible to enable a project for use with other products. The styles that are available in the Available Styles list depends on which product is selected from the Application list..
121
Projects By default, all styles suitable for use with the selected product are shown as checked. If any styles are not required, simply un-check them, and they are excluded when the project is created. When you create a project for SmartPlant Spoolgen, you must also initialize the project attributes by specifying the value for the Project ID Type.
See also
Enable Project (on page 34) Import Project (on page 69) ProjectConfig_application.xml (see "ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml" on page 13) Project Defaults (on page 37) Project ID Type (on page 104)
Delete a Project
Deleting a project cannot be undone. 1. In the Project View panel, click the project you want to delete. 2. Click Delete .
Alternatively, you can click Edit > Delete. You can also right-click the project in the Project View panel and then click Delete on the shortcut menu.
122
Projects
123
SECTION 6
Styles
Style Object Properties
The style object contains the controlling properties of a style. The style can be displayed as an overview (see "Overview Panel" on page 81), or in detail (see "Detail Panel" on page 82). The style object controls the following properties: Name (on page 126) Path (on page 126) ExportBehavior (on page 126) StyleState (on page 126) StyleType (on page 127) CanWrite (on page 127) CanExport (on page 127)
When you select a style in the Project View panel, the software updates the Properties panel to display the properties specific to the selected style. In the following illustration, the Properties panel is showing the properties that have been defined for the Final-Basic style.
125
Styles You can modify each of the properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.
See also
Isometric Directory Object Properties (on page 87) Project Object Properties (on page 91) Import Style (see "Import Style Settings" on page 73) Import Style Fragment (on page 75) Create a Style (on page 559) Copy and Paste a Style (on page 558) Delete a Style (on page 560) Select a Style (on page 561) Export a Style (on page 560) Save a Style (on page 561)
Name
Displays the name of the style.
Path
Displays the file path to the style directory. The Options file and the Data Definition file are located in the style directory.
ExportBehavior
Controls the behavior of the File > Export command. Always Export - Style property is exported to the ISOGEN control files. Export if Pending - Style property is only exported if the StyleState property is defined as Export Pending or Export and Save Pending . Never Export - Style property is not exported.
See also
Export (on page 35) StyleState (on page 126)
StyleState
StyleState is a read only property that reports whether the style has been changed. If the style has been changed, StyleState also indicates whether it has been saved and/or exported since the last change was made. Unchanged - No changes have been made. Export Pending - Changes have been saved but not exported. Save Pending - Changes have been exported but not saved. Export and Save Pending - Changes have not been saved or exported.
126
Styles
StyleType
Indicates whether the style is a system one, such as the special purpose SGImport style (used by SmartPlant Spoolgen) or a general purpose user one. The property is read only and has no effect on SmartPlant I-Configure behavior.
CanWrite
Controls whether the changes can be written back to the Style.xml file. To do so, requires write access to the Style.xml file. By default, the CanWrite property is set to False if the project AccessRights property is set to Read.
See also
AccessRights (on page 96) Style.xml (on page 15)
CanExport
Controls whether the style can be exported. Exporting a style requires write access to the style folder.
Detail Panel
The Detail panel shows all of the objects for the currently selected style in a tree view format.
A style is broken down into the following seven main objects. Each style object is in turn further broken down into sub objects. AlternativeTexts Object (on page 163) Drawing Object (on page 166)
127
Styles DrawingFrame Object (on page 334) MaterialList Object (see "Material List Object" on page 355) WeldList Object (on page 412) CutList Object (on page 435) Supplementary Object (on page 456)
When you click a style object in the Detail panel, the Properties displays all of its currently defined properties. In the following illustration, the properties of the Drawing Content object are displayed in the Properties panel.
As in Windows Explorer, you can click and tree in order to navigate the various style objects.
to expand and collapse the nodes of the
You can modify most of these object properties. Changing the value of each property ultimately determines the appearance of the isometric drawings and report file content produced when the style is exported for use in other products, such as SmartPlant Isometrics. Using the previous
128
Styles illustration as an example, changing the True/False settings controls whether the feature of the isometric drawing controlled by each of the Properties shown is displayed on the drawing or not. An object can contain a collection of other objects, which is a set of identical and related objects that are also known as definitions). For example, the MaterialList SummaryFile object can contain a set of TextColumn objects. Each one defines a single column in the SummaryFile output.
In the previous illustration, the properties (AttributeName, Offset and MaxChars ) for the selected MaterialList UserDefined object are stored in a collection called XYColumns(5). The (5) indicates the number of definitions, or objects, in the collection. The Properties panel shows the corresponding properties.
See also
Add to Collection (on page 23) Collections (on page 22) SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide 129
Styles Export (on page 35) Remove from Collection (on page 23)
AlternativeTexts
Alternative Text, or AText has it is often called, is a powerful ISOGEN feature that enables any text on the isometric drawing to be easily changed or removed. The feature operates by assigning a unique identification number to each standard text string. The ID number is then referred to whenever a change needs to be done to the text string that the number represents. For a complete list of available ATexts and their default values, see Grouping of AText Listings (on page 133). By definition, a standard text string can either be a single character, a single word, or a group of words. However, some ATexts are, by default, set to an all blank word. The total number of separate standard text strings held by the software in this way is in excess of 300.
Identification Number Format

Because identification numbers are always negative, they are must be preceded by a minus sign. For example, AText -249 (see "The Isometric Drawing Area" on page 133) represents the default word WEST, which is used in the main isometric drawing area.
See also
Examples (on page 132) Specify Alternative Texts (on page 162) Using Alternative Text (on page 130)
Using Alternative Text

AText allows you to substitute your own text terminology or language in place of the standard ISOGEN words on the isometric. To make a word change, you do not have to replace all the standard AText--you can change as little as just one word if that is all is required. Although the AText feature has a considerable degree of built-in flexibility, you must exercise a certain amount of care when defining your own words, particularly in terms of word lengths. As a general rule, newly defined words or word strings should be about equal in length or shorter than the text that is being replaced. Obvious exceptions to this are the cases of the single line headings in the material list region. In this respect, you must take full responsibility for word definition. ISOGEN does not warn you in cases where words are too long and cannot be accommodated in the standard space provided on the isometric. Badly designed AText can lead to undesirable results, such as over-writing or incorrectly positioned text.
Special Characters
The following special characters further extend the functionality of ATexts: The Dollar ($) Sign - The $ character, which is used in ISOGEN to force a new line in regular isometric message text, can also be used with ATexts. However, when using the $ character, it is recommended that you carefully check the output results of each occurrence.
130
Styles The Question Mark (?) - The ? character has the following two different uses: In ATexts -210, -211 and -212 (see "The Isometric Drawing Area" on page 133) to suppress the plotting of the single characters normally associated with these ATexts, without switching off their associated facility, as would normally happen when an AText is set to blank. For example, setting AText -210 ? suppresses the F that is normally plotted. It does not completely suppress the plotting of the flange material list part number as would normally happen when an AText item is set to blank. Using the ? character is particularly advantageous on spool isometrics. In some special ATexts at points where the software dynamically inserts information. By default, AText -456 (see "The Isometric Drawing Area" on page 133) is set to DETAIL ?. As a result, the software inserts either a letter or a number, depending upon which system you have specified at the position of the ? character.
The "At" (@) Sign - You can use the @ character to pad out an AText string with trailing blanks. As a result, the text that follows the AText has a series blanks between it and the AText.
Foreign Language Use

AText is particularly beneficial to foreign language users who want to produce isometrics containing text in their native language. However, there are restrictions governing which characters are permissible. Those restrictions are outlined in The Usable Character Set.
The Usable Character Set

You can only use the following standard English and special purpose characters in AText definitions: Upper- or lower-case letters in the range A to Z. Numeric characters in the range 0 to 9 inclusive. A blank space character. The following special purpose symbols: * + - . , : [ ] ( ) # ' < > = | & %
Other foreign language characters, such as those used in the Cyrillic, Greek, or Chinese alphabets are excluded, as are specially accentuated characters, such as , , , and so on.
AText and the Drawing Frame Symbols

The AText feature goes further than just controlling text characters. The standard symbols appearing in the line summary area across the bottom of the standard ISOGEN drawing frame, viz. for shop weld, field weld, and so on through traced pipe, can all be suppressed when they are not required by setting their associated ATexts to blank.
Composite Text Messages

Composite text messages are made up of more than one text item and the composition is done by ISOGEN automatically. Such messages can be composed in either of the following two ways: By combining two or more related ATexts By combining AText and an associated design database attribute value 131
Styles Generally, in those cases where AText operates together with design database attribute information to form a composite message, setting the AText part to blank to suppress the plotting of it causes suppression of the attribute text also. For example, if the composite message BATCH REF: 12/100A/C in the title block area needs to be completely suppressed, then setting AText -252, which contains the words BATCH REF, to blank causes both this and the attribute part, 12/100A/C, not to be plotted.
See also
Examples (on page 132) Grouping of ATexts Listings (see "Grouping of AText Listings" on page 133)
Examples
The following are some examples of standard ATexts: The material list heading ERECTION MATERIALS. The isometric connection messages CONN. TO and CONT. ON in the main drawing area. The BATCH REF and PIPING SPEC headings in the title block area.
Each of these are default AText words that are programmed in by ISOGEN but which you can re-program, if required, as explained in the following examples.
Example 1: ERECTION MATERIALS

You can find ERECTION MATERIALS as AText -310 (see "The Plotted Material and Cut Pipe List Heading Texts" on page 142). To change the default heading (ERECTION MATERIALS) to CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, the entry - 310 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS must appear in the appropriate data input file.
Example 2: CONN.TO
CONN TO. is an example of a composite message that is used at locations where pipelines are connected to equipment nozzles. You can find it as AText -208 (see "The Isometric Drawing Area" on page 133). To change the message CONN. TO to JOIN TO, the entry -208 JOIN TO must appear in the appropriate data input file. Information regarding the joined to component, that is, the nozzle name as extracted from the design database, is automatically appended to the AText by ISOGEN to form a composite message, such as JOIN TO D45-NZ12.
Example 3: BATCH REF

BATCH REF is another composite message example--AText -252 (see "The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas" on page 150). The message is used to convey plant zone or area information in the title block area of the isometric where the contents of the BATCH (AREA) type record in the pipeline input data file is automatically appended by ISOGEN. An example of this kind of message is BATCH REF : AR-A/TF/N12. To remove the batch reference entry from the isometric, set the AText entry in the input data file (IDF) to blank, thus: -252
132
Styles Doing so removes the entire composite message from the isometric, both the AText BATCH REF : part and the following design database attribute that holds the batch reference information.
Grouping of AText Listings

All the AText listings are logically grouped into the following isometric drawing regions: The main Isometric Drawing Area (see "The Isometric Drawing Area" on page 133) Plotted Material List and Cut List (see "The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts" on page 142) Specification Change indication (on page 149) Title Block/Drawing Frame (see "The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas" on page 150) Line Summary Area (see "The Line Summary Area" on page 152) Printed Material List (see "The Printed Material List" on page 154) Weld Box Summary (see "The Weld Box Summary" on page 154) Flat Spools and Flange Rotation text (see "Flat Spools and Flange Rotation" on page 156) Compipe Material Control link (see "The COMPIPE Material Control Links" on page 157) SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display (on page 157) Reference Plane System (on page 161)
The Isometric Drawing Area

-201 -202 -203 -204 -205 -206 -207 E N W S EL + EL ? NS Denotes East at east coordinates. Denotes North at north coordinates. Denotes West at west coordinates. Denotes South at south coordinates. Denotes a positive Elevation at elevation coordinates. Denotes a negative Elevation at elevation coordinates. Denotes the pipe nominal size. By setting the AText to blank, the nominal size message is suppressed. Using a ? symbol determines the format used for outputting the nominal size message. Denotes CONNected TO - where a pipeline/branch end is connected to a nozzle. Denotes CONTinued ON at the point where a pipeline/branch end is continued onto another pipeline. It is used in conjunction with END-CONNECTION type record. Is also used with AText -255 to create a CONT. ON DRG 2 type message when a pipeline is split into multiple drawings. (Isometric drawing area and Material List overflow).
-208 -209
CONN. TO CONT. ON
133
Styles
-210 -211 -212 -213 -214 -215 -216
F G B SPINDLE MM REDUCING FLANGE OFFSET
Denotes flange--the letter used with the material list crossreference pointer for flanges. Denotes gaskets--the letter used with the material list crossreference pointer for gaskets. Denotes bolts--the letter used with the material list crossreference pointer for bolts. Used to indicate the direction of an operating spindle on a valve when it is not pointing in a primary direction. Denotes millimeters. Used with arrowed dimensions on angle and multi-way valves to indicate leg length. An identification message that points at a reducing flange. This message is used where a dimensional offset occurs, such as eccentric reducer, offset reducing flange, all forms of offset blocks. You can use a ? symbol to determine format used for outputting the offset messages. By setting this AText to blank, the offset message is suppressed.
-217 -218 -219
MITRE LOBSTER REINFORCED
This message is used on mitered bends. (It is used in conjunction with AText -231 BEND). This message is used on lobster back bends. (It is used in conjunction with AText -231'BEND). An identification message that points to a reinforced tee or cross when the symbol key is TERF or CRRF and no reinforcement pad component is called for. A distinguishing message that points to a flange where the LOOSE indicator is set. Distinguishing message that points to a field fit weld. Used in conjunction with the Fall symbol to denote a FALLing line. You can use a ? symbol to determine the format used for outputting the falling line messages. By setting this AText to blank, the falling line message is now suppressed, but the fall indication symbol is still ,shown. Produces a program generated degree symbol () which is output at all angle indicators requiring a degree symbol (bends, Falls, and so on). This symbol is used for falling lines specified with a ratio, such as 1:10. Produces a system-generated % symbol used on falling pipelines
-220 -221 -222
LEFT LOOSE FFW FALL
-223
(Normally blank)
-224 -225
: (Normally blank)
134
Styles specified with a percentage indication -226 -227 -228 -229 -230 -231 -232 GRAD PER M PER FT SCREWED END VENT BEND SPEC Used where a falling line is specified in gradiens. Used where a falling line is specified as an incline in Metric units, such as millimeters per meter. Used where a falling line is specified as an incline in Imperial units, such as inches per foot). The message points to a pipe end that has been set to screwed in the pipeline input data file. The message points to a vent position at any open ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-VENT type record. Used in conjunction with AText -217 and AText -218 to identify miter and lobster back type bends. Identification message points to any place in the pipe where the piping specification changes. The name of the new specification is automatically indicated. Identifies a connector as part of a material list cross-reference, such as C13 in a box. Used to prefix liners and nut material part numbers that are output on the isometric drawing. Clamps use AText -233 to prefix their part number. Identifies a support as part of a material list cross-reference, such as S22 in a box. Is the inch sign indicator used in imperial dimensions coordinates and nominal size outputs. Is the feet sign indicator used in imperial dimensions and coordinates. The message points to a drain position any open-ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-DRAIN type record This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a message at any open-ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-OPEN type record. This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a message at any closed- ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-CLOSED type record. This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a message at any miscellaneous pipe end. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-NULL type record.
-233 -234
C (Normally blank)
-236 -237 -238 -239 -240
S " ' DRAIN (Normally blank)
-241
(Normally blank)
-242
(Normally blank)
135
Styles
-243
(Normally blank)
This AText has no default text, but if you set it to a word, such as FLAT, then that text acts as a trigger to output the flat direction of eccentric reducers that have their flat side pointing in a primary direction. (Is used in conjunction with ATexts -244 to -249 inclusive).
The following six ATexts (-244, -245, -246, -247, -248, and -249) are used to output directions in conjunction with other ATexts on items that carry a direction setting on the component record in the pipeline input data file. -244 -245 -246 -247 -248 -249 -275 -276 UP DOWN NORTH SOUTH EAST WEST SWEPT TEE CONT. FROM Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282 to append a primary direction as part of a composite message. Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282 to append a primary direction as part of a composite message. Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282 to append a primary direction as part of a composite message. Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282 to append a primary direction as part of a composite message. Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282 to append a primary direction as part of a composite message. Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282 to append a primary direction as part of a composite message. This message points to a tee whose symbol key starts with the characters TS. Denotes CONTinued FROM. This message is plotted when a pipeline is split onto two or more drawings, such as CONT. FROM DRG 1. (The text DRG comes from AText -255. For more information about this AText, see The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas) (see "The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas" on page 150). This text points to orifice flanges. This text points to instruments dials whose symbol key starts with the characters ID and is followed by a relevant direction letter. See the following Notes for more information. Denotes lap joint stub end the letter used with the material list cross-reference pointer for LJSE's. This text points to orifice plates and is followed by a relevant direction letter. See the following Notes for more information.
-277 -278
ORIFICE FLANGE DIAL FACE
-279 -280
L TAPPING
136
Styles
-281
TAIL
This text points to spectacle blinds and slip plates and is followed a by relevant direction letter. See the following Notes for more information. This text points to a site glass and is followed by a relevant direction letter. See the following Notes for more information. Used to identify non primary flat directions on eccentric reducers. The contents of this AText is output in front of the contents of a DIRECTION record containing the flat skew direction
-282 -283
WINDOW FLAT
AText Numbers -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282 are only output if a primary direction is set in the component record in the pipeline input data file. The appropriate direction (as defined by ATexts -244 to -249) is appended to the specific fitting text to make a composite message--such as DIAL FACE WEST. Alternatively, the content of any DIRECTION (Compound Directions) record can be appended. TEE BEND RATING FLANGE This text is plotted at bends that have an off-line leg. This text is a part of a facility that provides an extra message at a flange that has a different pressure rating to standard. This is achieved by giving the mating gasket a symbol key of the required rating (such as. 300#) in the Intermediate Data File (IDF). The facility is only used on fixed length piping. This AText is blank by default but if set it will output the text as a message on screwed erection (construction) fittings. Is used to identify the direction of skewed branches in cases where skew box indication has been suppressed. A program generated direction will be appended to this text to form a complete message. Is used on system Isometrics to denote the position(s) of a change in the pipeline reference. Is used to identify a tee elbow fitting. Is used to output the text D bend radius on individual pulled bends where the bend radius is expressed in terms of a number of pipe diameters. The bend radius value is extracted from a BEND-RADIUS type record in the pipeline input data file and used as a prefix to this AText.
-284 -285
-286 -287
(Normally blank) ORIENTATION DIRECTION
-288 -298 -337
PIPE TEE ELBOW D BEND RADIUS
137
Styles
-338
BEND RADIUS
Is used to output the text bend radius on individual pulled bends where the bend radius is expressed in terms of the dimensional units in use. The bend radius value is extracted from a BENDRADIUS type record in the pipeline input data file and used as a prefix to this AText. Is used in conjunction with directional information taken from a GEARBOX type record in the pipeline input data file and which is appended to this AText. Is used to indicate Personal Protection type insulation on Insulation Indication symbols having the symbol key 'INPP'. Is used to indicate a reducing elbow on fittings having the symbol key ER**. Special ATEXT used only to identify special type pulled bends. Is used both on the isometric area and on the material list. Special ATEXT used only to identify special type erection welds. Is used both on the isometric area and on the material list. Special ATEXT used only to identify special type fabrication welds. Is used both on the isometric area and on the material list. Used in special circumstances when it is necessary to identify a specific end on a spool isometric. (It also appears in the cut pipe list section for use as a column heading on the cut pipe list). Used to identify tangential / offset connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (AText No. -451) message will not be output. Used to identify tangential / offset connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (AText No. -451) message will not be output. Used to identify tangential / offset connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (AText No. -451) message will not be output. Used to identify tangential / offset connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (AText No. -451) message will not be output. Used where multiple components attributes are present for a particular material entry. Used to distinguish an accumulated pipe sub-total from an individual pipe entry. Default is ?. Used to output a modified heat tracing component part number.
-346
GEARBOX ORIENTATION PP REDUCING ELBOW U B W END$ONE
-349 -350 -356 -357 -358 -362
-388
TANGENTIAL CONNECTION OFFSET CONNECTION FROM ? ORIGIN (Normally Blank)
-389
-390
-391
-392 -394 -395
MULTIPLE TOT ?
138
Styles
-396
? INC ANGLE
Default is blank. If OS 67 set to 1 and this AText set ? character is substituted by angle value and combined with INC ANGLE text to indicate that angles displayed for elbows and bends on isometric are included (not deflected) angles. Used to label the viewpoint direction arrow. N denotes north and U denotes up. The default label for combined, fabrication, erection and normal spool isometrics is N, while U is the default label for flat spool isometrics. If set to Blank, the viewpoint direction arrow is suppressed. Used to indicate the weld type for seal welds on the isometric drawing. Distinguishing message that points to a user-positioned set on connections. Distinguishing message that points to a user-positioned set in connections. This AText has no default text but if it is set to a word (such as FLAT) by the user then that text acts as a trigger to output the flat direction of eccentric reducers that have their flat side pointing in a primary direction. (Is used in conjunction with ATexts -244 to -249 inclusive). Used to allow metric dimensions to have their dimensional units output on the isometric drawing. Used to show edge of pipe dimensions. Is output along with coordinate values at the tapping point on a user-defined fitting. Requires Option Switch 122 to be set to 1 for tapping coordinates output on the isometric drawing. Indicates that an unacceptable drawing split point has been found in tube. When used, the message is output in the top left-hand corner of each affected drawing. Used at un-developed set-on tees and olets (which have no branch leg and are indicated in dotted form on the pipeline) where the intended branch connection is in a skewed direction. A system-generated direction word is appended to this text to form a composite message.
-399
N or U
-425 -433 434 -243
SEAL WELD (Normally blank) STUB IN (Normally blank)
-437 -439 -451
(Normally blank) (EOP) TAPPING CONNECTION UNACCEPTABL E SPLIT CONNECTION ORIENTATION
-452
-454
139
Styles
-455
(Normally blank)
Used at flange positions in vertical pipe legs to optionally indicate the elevation coordinate of the flange connection face. The special characters ? and $ can be combined with this AText to allow you to control the final form of the output text. ? is used to cause the insertion of elevation value, and $ forces a new line of text. For example, a setting of ?$FLANGE FACE produces EL +22613 FLANGE FACE. Note that here the EL characters are obtained by the software also using AText -205 automatically. Used to provide a cross-reference message for detail sketches. This AText appears on the drawing part of the isometric. The sketch identifying number or letter is edited in by the software at the ? position. Used to identify miter welds. The software edits in the miter angle into the text string at the ? position which can be positioned anywhere in the string. Used to indicate the nominal size for metric bore units. For example, if set to mm the output is 32mm NS; if set to Blank, then 32NS is output. Used to show thickness of a penetration plate on the drawing. Used to identify a reference dimension Item coordinates. Used to identify pipe support coordinates. Used on the drawing to show the location of where material should be removed.
-456
SEE DETAIL ?
-457
MITRE ?
-458
(Normally Blank)
-459 -469 -470 -477
?THK REFERENCE POINT SUPPORT LOCATION CUT OUT ?
The following nine ATexts are all used for the identification of external Reference Items when using the Reference Dimension facility. Any associated text elements will be automatically pre-fixed or appended, as appropriate, to the specified AText element. In all these ATexts, the $ character causes a new line to be plotted, and a ? character is where the software edits in the element name (from any -37, 70, 71 or 72 type record) to derive the full text string. BEAM$? COLUMN$? ?$BUILDING CL Identifies horizontal steel-work element (SKEY HST*). Identifies vertical steel-work element (SKEY VST*). Identifies center-line of building (SKEY BLD*).
-460 -461 -462
140
Styles -463 -464 -465 -466 -467 -468 CL EQUIPMENT$? CL PIPELINE$? ?$FLOOR LEVEL ?$WALL GRID LINE$? ? Identifies center-line of equipment (SKEY EQU*). Identifies center-line of pipeline (SKEY PIP*). Identifies specified floor level (SKEY FLR*). Identifies specified wall position (SKEY WAL*). Identifies project grid line (SKEY GRD*). Used for miscellaneous user-defined elements (SKEY XXX*). The default ? character causes any identification name associated with the miscellaneous reference to be used when no other AText setting is made. Is used to indicate a location point position on the plotted isometric. If more than one is included on any single isometric, a simple ID number is generated and output in the position indicated by the ?. Used in SmartPlant Spoolgen - Probing module. If set, it is used to indicate the position of any location points that are included in an incoming pipeline data file. Used in SmartPlant Spoolgen to trigger the indication of drawing identifiers. If user-defined, the text points to a site weld. Points to either a site weld or a field fit weld that requires a shop test weld to be performed at the same location. (That is welds with the key WSST or WFST). Used to point to an offshore weld if user-defined. Used to indicate the orientation of a pipe support. Content of associated DIRECTION record (containing compound directions for skewed support) is appended to AText. Distinguishing message that points to a user-positioned tack weld. Used to identify field Items on an erection type isometric whenever a new style operations box is requested ( Option Switch 53 Position 2 set to 2). Used to identify a random length on an erection type isometric whenever a new style operations box is requested ( Option Switch. 53 Position 2 set to 2). Used to identify a pipe support on an erection type isometric whenever a new style operations box is requested ( Option Switch. 53 Position 2 set to 2).
-471
LOCATIONPOINT?
-475
(Normally blank)
-476 -498 -499
(Normally blank) (Normally blank) SHOP TEST WELD (Normally blank) SUPPORT
-501 -502
-512 -533
TACK WELD FI
-534
RL
-535
SU
141
Styles
-536
VL
Used to identify a valve on an erection type isometric whenever a new style operations box is requested ( Option Switch 53 Position 2 set to 2). Used as a delimiter between the material list cross-reference identifier and the suffix that is added as a unique component identifier in the new style of Identifier ( 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 as opposed to 3). Used as delimiter/identifier in general note names. Used as delimiter/identifier in general note names. Used in SmartPlant Spoolgen probing module. If set, is used to indicate the position of any special note names that are included in an incoming pipeline data file. Used in SmartPlant Spoolgen probing module. If set, is used to indicate the position of any additional materials that are included in an incoming pipeline data file. Used as a separator between part numbers when outputting dual numbers for associated additional material identification on the plotted isometric. (Default) Used as the first character of the drawing output file extension (used in conjunction with Option Switch 71 Pos. 7). (Default) Underline character. Used to distinguish horizontal skew angles from vertical skew angles on isometric drawings. Used to distinguish vertical skew angles from horizontal skew angles on isometric drawings. Used to output a nominal size message on reducing tees, such as TEE RED. Used to output a nominal size message on equal tees, such as TEE EQU. Used to output a nominal size message on concentric reducers, such as CONC RED. Used to output a nominal size message on eccentric reducers, such as ECC RED. AText for FF isometric continuation message delimiter.
-539
-541 -542 -543
_N _S (Normally blank)
-544
(Normally blank)
-545
-546 -547 -548 -549 -550 -551 -552 -553 -885
I _ HOR ? ? VER (Normally Blank) (Normally Blank) (Normally Blank) (Normally Blank) - FFISYS
142
Styles
The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts

-274 (Normally blank) If set, is used as a separator between the pipeline reference and the spool identifier in the spool isometric drawing identifier. Is the category heading under which components required for SHOP Fabrication are listed. Is the part number heading used in conjunction with AText -302 to form a composite message. Used in conjunction with AText -301 to form a composite message. Is the heading in the material listing under which components are described according to their catalog component description. Is the heading under which the nominal size of each item is listed. Is used in conjunction with AText -330 or AText -331 to form a composite message. Is the heading under which component identification codes are listed. Is the heading under which the required quantities are listed. Is the group sub-heading under which pipe is listed. Is the group sub-heading under which pipe fittings are listed, such as elbows tees, and so. Is the group sub-heading under which all flanges are listed. Is the category heading under which components required for SITE Erection--or Construction--are listed. Is the group sub-heading under which all gaskets are listed Is the group sub-heading under which all bolts are listed. Is the group sub-heading under which all valves and in-line Items are listed. Is the group sub-heading under which all instruments are listed.
-300 FABRICATION MATERIALS -301 PT -302 NO -303 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
-304 N.S.
-305 ITEM CODE -306 QTY -307 PIPE -308 FITTINGS -309 FLANGES -310 ERECTION MATERIALS
-311 GASKETS -312 BOLTS -313 VALVES / IN-LINE ITEMS -314 INSTRUMENTS
143
Styles
-315 SUPPORTS -316 PIPE SPOOLS -319 CUT PIPE LENGTH -320 PIECE
Is the group sub-heading under which all supports are listed. Is the sub-heading under which all spool numbers are listed. Is the heading under which all the cut pipe lengths are listed. Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which the cut pipe piece numbers are listed. This AText is used in conjunction with AText -321 to form a composite heading. Used in conjunction with AText -320 to form a composite heading. Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which the actual cut pipe lengths are listed. This AText is used in conjunction with AText -323 to form a composite heading. Used in conjunction with AText -322 to form a composite heading. Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which one of the ATexts -326, -327, -328, or -500, if applicable, is listed. Used for spool number separator on the material list. Used for a pulled bend remark, which is listed under AText -324 if a cut pipe length contains a pulled bend. Is a remark which will be listed under AText -324 if a cut pipe length has a loose flange requirement. Is the field fit weld remark which is listed under AText -324 if a cut pipe length contains a field fit weld. Used to denote lengths of pipe are in meters. Also used to indicate unit type Meters in center-line length summary. Used to denote nominal sizes are in inches. It is used in conjunction with AText -304 and AText 317.
-321 NO -322 CUT
-323 LENGTH -324 REMARKS
-325 (Normally blank) -326 PLD BEND
-327 LOOSE FLG -328 FF WELD
-329 M
-330 INS
144
Styles
-331 MM
Denotes the nominal sizes are in millimeters. Also used to indicate unit type Millimeters in centerline length summary. It is used in conjunction with AText -304 and AText -317. Is used only on fixed length piping. The contents of this AText is appended to the item code to form a composite code when one or more ends of the fixed length spool has a special flange. Is used only on fixed length piping. The contents of the AText are appended to the item description to form a composite message. Is used whenever AText -334 is used. Is the group sub-heading under which all noncategorized components are listed. Used to identify pipe required in the fabrication of induction bends. The induction bend tag is appended to the AText to form a complete text string. Is the sub-heading under which all equipment trim materials are listed. Is the sub-heading under which all materials associated with an individual nozzle are listed. The content of the related NOZZLEREFERENCE is appended to the AText to form a complete text string. Used on equipment trim drawings only. Used with AText -342 to identify situations where the listing of components for a nozzle is being continued from a previous drawing. Used on equipment trim drawings only. Is the group sub-heading under which all materials for end connectors for hygienic type piping are listed (liners, nuts, clamps, and so on.). Used with AText -342 to form a sub-heading under which all components associated with interconnected nozzles are output on the material list for an equipment trim drawing. The resultant heading is of the form NOZZLE REF - N22 AND N23.
-334 S
-335 WITH SPECIAL RATING FLANGE(S) (SEE ISO)
-339 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS -340 INDUCTION BEND ID -
-341 EQUIPMENT TRIM MATERIALS -342 NOZZLE REF -
-343 CONTINUED
-344 END CONNECTORS
-345 AND
145
Styles
-347 (Normally blank)
This has no default AText but is available as an alternative to the AText used when generating a material list overflow message at the bottom of the master drawing material list (an AText -209 and AText -255 combination). Any AText set by the user has a program generated cross-reference drawing number appended to it to form a composite message. This has no default AText but is available as an alternative to the AText used when generating a material list overflow message at the top of overflow material list drawings ( AText -276 and AText -255 combination). Any AText set by the user has a program generated cross reference drawing number appended. Used to identify fabricated bends when listed as separate items on the material list. Column heading for weight. Units indicator for kilogram weights. Used as part of Weight column heading and in pipeline weight summary area at bottom of material list. Units indicator for pound weights. Used as part of Weight column heading and in pipeline weight summary area at bottom of material list Identification text for total pipeline weight in Weight column and also in weight summary area at bottom of material list. Special ATEXT used only to identify special type pulled bends. Is used both on the material list and on the isometric area as a prefix to the part number. Special ATEXT used only to identify special type erection welds. Is used both on the material list and on the isometric area as a prefix to the part number. Special ATEXT only to identify special type fabrication welds. Is used both on the material list and on the isometric area as a prefix to the part number. Used for bolt units sub-heading. ISOGEN outputs in DIA x LENGTH sequence.
-351 FABRICATED (PULLED) BEND -352 WEIGHT -353 KGS
-354 LBS
-355 TOTAL WEIGHT-THIS DRG
-356 U
-357 B
-358 W
146
Styles
-362 END$ONE
Column heading on cut pipe list. (Also appears in the isometric drawing area section when it is necessary to identify a specific end of a cut piece). Column heading on cut pipe list. Last column heading on cut pipe list when item code heading is required. (See also AText -365). Alternative last column heading on cut pipe list. (See also AText -364). If part number is required on the cut list instead of item code, then AText 364 should be set to blank, and AText -365 set to the required alternative heading, such as part no. Used for square cut in End Condition columns on cut pipe list. Used for bevel in End Condition columns on cut pipe list. Used for screwed in End Condition columns on cut pipe list. Used for shaped in End Condition columns on cut pipe list. Used for mitered in End Condition columns on cut pipe list. Is the category heading under which components required for OFFSHORE erection are listed. Remarks region heading at bottom of material list where remarks text is collectively listed. Remarks column heading in material list. Remark reference numbers are listed in this column. Used on special type pulled bends where angle information is appended to the item Description field on the material list. Is the group sub-heading under which all welds are listed. Used to identify Fabrication material when category is used as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 material list. Used to identify Erection material when category is used as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 material list.
-363 END$TWO -364 ITEM$CODE -365 (Normally blank)
-366 SQ.CUT -367 BEVEL -368 SCREWED -369 SHAPED -370 MITRED -371 OFFSHORE MATERIALS -372 REMARKS -373 REM -374 ANGLE
-375 WELDS -376 FAB
-377 EREC
147
Styles
-378 OFF
Used to identify Offshore material when category is used as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 material list. Identification text for total fabrication weight in Weight column and also in weight summary area at bottom of material list. Identification text for total erection weight in Weight column and also in weight summary area at bottom of material list. Identification text for total offshore weight in Weight column and also in weight summary area at bottom of material list. Identification text for the total weight of unlisted items in the Weight column and also in the weight summary area at the bottom of the material list. Missing weight indicator. The * is a special marker that is used on both weight and C Of G outputs to indicate that component(s) with zero weight were encountered. Used in the REMARKS column of the cut list to indicate where extra material has been added to a cut piece length in order to provide a minimum tangent length for either a start or finish bend leg. Used in the cut piece remarks section against cut pieces that have additional material added between adjacent bends. Used to indicate grooved end preparation for Victaulic pipe connections on the cut pipe list/report. Used to indicate a flared end preparation on the cut pipe list/report. Used to indicate a female screwed end preparation on the cut pipe list/report. Used to indicate a female socket weld/compression/glued/push fit end preparation on the cut pipe list/report. Used to output a location point ID number on the drawing frame. Is only output when multiple location points are included on a single isometric. Used as part of a location point position on the drawing frame. SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
-379 TOTAL FABRICATION WEIGHT -380 TOTAL ERECTION WEIGHT
-381 TOTAL OFFSHORE WEIGHT
-382 TOTAL WEIGHT UNLISTED ITEMS -383 *
-384 TANGENT+
-385 CUT/WELD
-426 GROOVED
-427 FLARED -428 SCREWED -431 SOCKET
-472 No.?
-473 OF
148
Styles -474 ABOVE -500 SHOP TEST Used as part of a location point position on the drawing frame. Used on the cut list to identify cut pieces that need to have an additional shop test allowance. (That is welds with the SKEY WSST or WFST). Used as either a header or column identifier on the following printed output whenever spool identifiers are listed. i) Printed material list (Style 1 or 2). ii) Printed material control file. iii) Printed weld summary. -514 REINFPAD Used as the item code for a reinforcement pad whenever automatic item code generation is requested. Used as the first part of a description for a reinforcement pad whenever automatic description generation is requested. The second part of the pad description is the description of the main pipeline tube to which the pad is welded. If set, is used as an alternative units indication on any length output on any style of material list. (Overrules any length units setting in Option Switch. 24 ). If set, is used to offer an alternative form of bolt diameter/length output on any style of material list. If set, is used as an optional column heading for bolt diameter where the bolt units are different to the normal pipeline units. If set, outputs text to supplement scalar quantities output to the material list on the drawing and material control file. If set, identifies materials belonging to spools on the material list.
-503 SPOOL ID
-515 REINFORCEMENT PAD FOR @
-555 SPOOL -
149
Styles
Specification Change Indication

The following ATexts are used for the indication of specification changes on the isometric drawing. -289 MATL Used to indicate a piping material specification change. The content of the PIPING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used to indicate an insulation specification change. The content of the INSULATION-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used to indicate a tracing specification change. The content of the TRACING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used to indicate a PAINTING specification change. The content of the PAINTING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Reserved for user-defined AText. The contents of a MISCSPEC1 type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Reserved for user-defined AText. The contents of a MISCSPEC2 type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Reserved for user-defined AText. The contents of a MISCSPEC3 type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Reserved for user-defined AText. The contents of a MISCSPEC4 type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Reserved for user-defined AText. The contents of a MISCSPEC5 type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message.
-290
INSUL
-291
TRACE
-292
PAINT
-293
(Normally blank)
-294
(Normally blank)
-295
(Normally blank)
-296
(Normally blank)
-297
(Normally blank)
150
Styles
The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas

-250 DATE The date is taken from the DATE type record in the pipeline input data file and automatically appended in the required format (UK, EUR or USA) to the AText.
If the date format is set to UK (see Option Switch 6 for details) this AText also uses ATexts -258, -259, -260, -261, -262, -263, -264, -265, -266, -267, -268 and - 269 to form the month part of the date output text. -251 PROJECT NO. This is used in the title block if the project number has been set in a PROJECT-IDENTIFIER type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. This is used in the title block area if a batch reference has been set in a BATCH type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used in the title block if a piping specification has been set in a PIPING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used in the title block if an issue (also known as Revision) identifier has been set in a REVISION type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used in conjunction with AText -256 to generate a drawing identifier of the form - DRG n OF n - in cases where a pipeline is split into multiple isometrics.
-252
BATCH REF
-253
PIPING SPEC
-254
ISS
-255
DRG
This AText is used in conjunction with AText -209 and AText -276 to form a composite message.
-256
OF
Used in conjunction with AText -255.
151
Styles
-257
SPL
Used on spool isometric drawings for the identification of individual spool pieces. A program generated spool number is appended to the AText to form a composite message. This AText is not used if either a spool prefix (SPOOL-PREFIX type record) or spool identifiers (SPOOL-IDENTIFIER type records) are included in the pipeline input data file. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250. Used in conjunction with AText -250 . Used in the title block if an insulation specification identifier has been set in a INSULATION-SPEC record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used in the title block if a tracing specification identifier has been set in a TRACING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used in the title block if a painting specification identifier has been set in a PAINTING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. Used in the title block if a jacket specification identifier has been set in a JACKET-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message.
-258 -259 -260 -261 -262 -263 -264 -265 -266 -267 -268 -269 -270
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC THERMAL INSULATION SPEC
-271
TRACING SPEC
-272
PAINTING SPEC
-436
JACKET SPEC
152
Styles
The Line Summary Area

The ATexts that are used in the line summary area along the bottom of the isometric drawing can either have their ATexts changed or made blank. If the AText is changed, then its associated symbol is drawn. If it is set to blank, then the symbol is not drawn. In these ATexts, the inclusion of a $ character creates a forced line feed causing the text to be plotted over two lines. -400 -401 -402 -403 -404 -405 -406 -407 -408 &409 -410 [1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO$ 1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO If only the bottom line is required, the records in the pipeline input data file should be as shown below:-410 -411 $ 1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO SITE$CONNECTION TRACED$PIPE LAGGED$PIPE PIPE$SUPPORT COMPN$JOINT SCREWED$JOINT SOCKET$WELD FIELD$WELD SHOP$WELD These two ATexts have no default text but can be used for any user-specified general information on the drawing frame. A typical example is PULLED BEND RADIUS IS 3X NOMINAL PIPE BORE. This is a general note to signify how spool numbers and material list part numbers are shown on the isometric.
The following ATexts appear in the line summary area along the bottom of both the plotted and printed Material Lists. -317 PIPE NS Is used in conjunction with AText -318 to which the total center line length per bore is automatically computed and listed. Also uses AText 330 or AText -331 to indicate units.
153
Styles
-318 -360 -361 -386 -387
CL LENGTH FT FT-INS
Is used in conjunction with AText -317 . Also uses AText -329 or AText -331 or AText -360 or AText -361 depending on units being used Used to indicate unit type feet in pipe center-line length region. Used to indicate unit type feet-inches in pipe center-line length region. Blank is the default. used to control output of insulation length. Blank is the default. used to control output of heat trace length.
The Printed Material List

The following ATexts are used on the printed material list, in addition to those ATexts listed for the plotted material and cut pipe lists. -332 -333 -336 PAGE PIPELINE REF SYSTEM REF This has a page number automatically appended. This has the pipeline reference automatically appended. This is used as an alternative to AText -333 when producing material list or system isometrics. The contents of a SYSTEMISOMETRIC-REFERENCE record in the pipeline input data file is automatically appended to the AText.
The Weld Box Summary

Standard Weld Summary Box Weld Box header details (line 1): -412 WE LD SH OP WEL WELD D ER VISU AL N D T HA RD S. R FAB. QA
Continuation of Weld Box header details. (line 2): -413 /FL PRO ID ACCE N NO ACCE D C PT O PT The first column of this Weld Summary box is used for the software-generated weld number and optional prefix. The second column is for Weld category and contains the Shop / Field / Offshore indicators. This must be taken into account when making any changes to either of these two ATexts. -414 -415 S F Weld category identification - Shop. Weld category identification - Field. NO
-416 O Weld category identification - Offshore. One of the above characters is plotted in the Weld Category column (column 2), depending upon the type of weld.
154
Styles User-Defined Weld Summary Box -417 -418 -419 -420 -421 -422 -423 -424 -438 -504 -507 -508 BW SW MW LUG SOF SOB LET SLW SEAM (Normally blank) RPD LF Used for weld type identifier butt weld. Used for weld type identifier socket weld. Used for weld type identifier miter weld. Used for weld type identifier LUGG. Used for weld type identifier slip-on flange. Used for weld type identifier set-on branch. Used for weld type identifier LET, such as olet, latrolet, half coupling.. Used to indicate the weld type for seal welds in welding lists and reports. Weld type identifier for a seam weld. Can be user-defined and used to identify field fit welds only when the weld category attribute is output. Used for weld type identifier for a basic reinforcing pad weld, when one extra weld number is requested. Used for weld type identifier for a reinforcing pad to main pipeline weld, when two extra weld numbers are requested. (Used together with AText -509). Used for weld type identifier for a reinforcing pad to branch weld, when two extra weld numbers are requested. (Used together with AText -508). If set, it is used as the delimiter between the two material list Identifiers in the Location column of the operations box. Used as a part identifier in the Location column of the operations box in cases where a reinforcement pad has not been included on the material list. Weld type identifier for a tack weld. Weld type identifier for a trunnion weld (The weld that connects the trunnion to the main pipeline). Used for weld action identification for a manual weld on the operations list. Used for weld action identification for an automatic weld on the operations list. Used for pulled bend identification on the operations list. Used for random length identification on the operations list. Used for weld type identifier for a fillet weld. (The basic weld used for connecting pipe supports to the pipeline).
-509
L4
-510 -511
(Normally blank) PAD
-513 -516 -517 -518 -519 -520 -521
TW TRN 5 1 EB RL FW.
155
Styles -522 -523 -524 -525 -526 (Normally blank) (Normally blank) (Normally blank) (Normally blank) (Normally blank) (Normally blank) (Normally blank) (Normally blank) (Normally blank) (Normally blank) (Normally blank) If set, it is used as an alternative to AText -422 to identify the branch connection weld(s) for a reinforced tee or cross. If set, it is used as an alternative to AText -422 to identify the branch connection weld(s) for an angled (not 90) reinforced tee or cross. If set, it is used as an alternative to AText -422 to identify the branch connection weld(s) for an angled (not 90) set-on tee or cross. If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for any olet type component with an SKEY of HCSC or HCSW. If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a reinforcement pad to main pipeline weld on an angled branch when two extra weld numbers are requested. (Used together with AText -527). If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a reinforcement pad to branch weld on an angled branch - when two extra weld numbers are requested. (Used together with AText -526). If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a trunnion to elbow / bend connection. If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a 90 non-reinforced trunnion to main pipeline weld. If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for an angled non-reinforced trunnion to main pipeline weld. If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a 90 reinforced trunnion to main pipeline weld. If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for an angled reinforced trunnion to main pipeline weld.
-527
-528 -529 -530 -531 -532
Flat Spools and Flange Rotation

The following six ATexts are used in DIRECTION records in the pipeline input data file when indicating compound directions for certain components in skewed Pipelines. Also used when ISOGEN is generating ORIENTATION and CONNECTION DIRECTION messages on flat spools. -481 -482 -483 -484 -485 -486 -487 E N W S U D *** REFERENCE FLAT *** Denotes East. Denotes North. Denotes West. Denotes South. Denotes Up. Denotes Down. Used to identify which eccentric reducer flat direction is used as a reference for a given flange rotation.
156
Styles -488 -489 -490 -491 -492 *** REFERENCE SPINDLE *** *** REFERENCE SUPPORT *** *** REFERENCE BRANCH *** *** REFERENCE WINDOW *** FLAT DIRECTION Used to identify which spindle is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. Used to identify which support is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. Used to identify which branch is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. Used to identify which window is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. Used to point to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles at eccentric reducers to indicate a flat direction on flat spools. Used to point to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles located at spindles on flat spools. Used to point to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles located at supports on flat spools. Used to point to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles located at undeveloped set-on branches or single olets on flat spools. Used to point to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles located at sight glasses on flat spools. Used to identify flange rotations on flat spools. (The calculated angle is edited in by the program at the position of the ? character).
-493
SPINDLE DIRECTION
-494 -495
SUPPORT DIRECTION BRANCH DIRECTION
-496 -497
WINDOW DIRECTION FLANGE ROTATION ?
The COMPIPE Material Control Links

-299 / Single character delimiter used between the three data items that are required to be in each ITEM-CODE record when using the COMPIPE link facility. Used to separate nominal size and pipeline reference when ISOGEN generates a drawing number for use in the COMPIPE.MTO file.
-453
MM-
157
Styles
SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display

The following -800 series ATexts are used in SPOOLGEN probing and the FFISYS. -800 series ATexts are applicable only for SPOOLGEN 4 and earlier versions of the software. They are not used for SmartPlant Spoolgen. -800 -801 -802 -803 -804 -805 -806 -807 -808 -809 -810 -811 -812 -813 -814 -815 -816 -817 -818 -819 -820 -821 -822 -823 -824 -825 158 BEND ELBOW OLET TEE CROSS REDUCER TEE REDUCER REDUCING FLANGE TEE BEND/ELBOW ANGLE VALVE 3 WAY VALVE 4 WAY VALVE INSTRUMENT MISC COMPONENT PIPE (TUBE) FIXED PIPE PIPE BLOCK FLANGE LJSE FLANGE BLIND FLANGE CONNECTOR BACKING NUT CLAMP MISC HYGENIC COMPONENT CAP COUPLING Identification of BEND when probing. Identification of ELBOW when probing. Identification of OLET when probing. Identification of TEE when probing. Identification of CROSS when probing. Identification of REDUCER when probing. Identification of TEE REDUCER when probing. Identification of REDUCING FLANGE when probing. Identification of TEE BEND/ELBOW when probing. Identification of ANGLE VALVE when probing. Identification of 3 WAY VALVE when probing. Identification of 4 WAY VALVE when probing. Identification of INSTRUMENT when probing. Identification of MISC COMPONENT when probing. Identification of PIPE (TUBE) when probing. Identification of FIXED PIPE when probing. Identification of PIPE BLOCK when probing. Identification of FLANGE when probing. Identification of LJSE FLANGE when probing. Identification of BLIND FLANGE when probing. Identification of CONNECTOR when probing. Identification of BACKING NUT when probing. Identification of CLAMP when probing. Identification of MISC HYGENIC COMPONENT when probing. Identification of CAP when probing. Identification of COUPLING when probing. SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
Styles -826 -827 -828 -829 -830 -831 -832 -833 -834 -835 -836 -837 -838 -839 -840 -841 -842 -843 -844 -845 -846 -847 -848 -849 -850 -851 -852 UNION VALVE TRAP VENT FILTER SUPPORT INSTRUMENT TEE WELD NONE (Not Used) (Not Used) (Not Used) (Not Used) (Not Used) Changed to Bend Flange set to Loose Detail Sketch ? Support changed to Fabrication Support changed to Erection Support changed to Offshore Tack Weld Support(s) added Automatic Weld Shop Test REDUCINGCONCENTRIC REDUCING ECCENTRIC STUB/BACKING PAIR Identification of UNION when probing. Identification of VALVE when probing. Identification of TRAP when probing. Identification of VENT when probing. Identification of FILTER when probing. Identification of SUPPORT when probing. Identification of INSTRUMENT TEE when probing. Identification of WELD when Probing. Indication that NO component was located successfully when probing. Unused AText Unused AText. Unused AText. Unused AText. Unused AText. `Probing Action' message - Elbow changed to bend. `Probing Action' message - Flange set to loose. `Probing Action' message - Detail Sketch added. `Probing Action' message - Support changed to Fabrication. `Probing Action' message - Support changed to Erection. `Probing Action' message - Support changed to Offshore. `Probing Action' message - Tack Weld added. `Probing Action' message - Support Welds added. `Probing Action' message - Automatic Weld added. `Probing Action' message - Shop Test Weld added. Flange type REDUCING-CONCENTRIC selected when probing. Flange type REDUCING-ECCENTRIC selected when probing. Flange type STUB/BACKING PAIR selected when probing.
159
Styles -853 -854 -855 -856 -857 -858 -859 -860 -861 -862 -863 -864 -865 -866 -867 -868 -869 -870 -871 -872 -873 -874 -875 -876 -877 SCREWED SLIP-ON J TYPE SLIP-ON SOCKET-WELD WELD-NECK SLIP-ON ORIFICE WELD-NECK ORIFICE LAP-JOINT RING LAP-JOINT STUB END UNKNOWN Material added Flange type SCREWED selected when probing. Flange type SLIP-ON J TYPE selected when probing. Flange type SLIP-ON selected when probing. Flange type SOCKET-WELD selected when probing. Flange type WELD-NECK selected when probing. Flange type SLIP-ON ORIFICE selected when probing. Flange type WELD-NECK ORIFICE selected when probing. Flange type LAP-JOINT RING selected when probing. Flange type LAP-JOINT STUB END selected when probing. Flange type UNKNOWN selected when probing. `Probing Action' message - Indication of additional materials added to pipeline.
General Information Note - ? `Probing Action' message - General information note added. Specific Information Note - ? Weld deleted Support Weld(s) deleted Spool Name deleted Flow Arrow deleted Message deleted Detail Sketch deleted Information Note deleted Additional Material deleted Loose Flange un-set Location point added Location point deleted FLOOR/WALL PENETRATION `Probing Action' message - Specific information note added. `Probing Action' message - Weld deleted. `Probing Action' message - Support welds deleted. `Probing Action' message - Spool same deleted. `Probing Action' message - Flow arrow deleted. `Probing Action' message - Message deleted. `Probing Action' message - Detail Sketch deleted. `Probing Action' message - Information Note deleted. `Probing Action' message - Additional material deleted. `Probing Action' message - Loose flange un-set. `Probing Action' message - Location point added. `Probing Action' message - Location point deleted. `Probing Action' message - Identification of FLOOR/WALL PENETRATION when probing. SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
160
Styles -878 -879 -880 -881 -882 -883 -884 -886 -887 -888 -889 -890 -891 -892 FLOW ARROW INSULATION SYMBOL MESSAGE Drawing Identifier deleted Default Start Pipeline Start Default Bypass Closure Bypass Closure Pipe Support added Pipe Support deleted Properties Changed Coupling Added Coupling Deleted Pipe Support Changed `Probing Action' message - Identification of FLOW ARROW when probing. `Probing Action' message - Identification of INSULATION SYMBOL when probing. `Probing Action' message - Identification of MESSAGE when probing. `Probing Action' message - Identification of Drawing Identifier deleted. `Probing Action' message - Identification of Default Start positioned. In Probing - Indication of default pipeline start point. In Probing - Indication of default bypass closure point. `Probing Action' message - Redefined bypass closure point. `Probing Action' message - Pipe support added. `Probing Action' message - Pipe support deleted. `Probing Action' message - Category change for gaskets and bolts. `Probing Action' message - Label showing where a coupling has been added. `Probing Action' message - Label showing where an existing coupling has been removed. `Probing Action' message - Label showing where an existing pipe support has been changed.
Reference Plane System

The following ATexts are used to output the relative directions associated with reference planes. ^ is substituted with the reference plane name. ? is substituted with the distance from the reference plane. VOL ? ^+? ^-? ^+? Default is blank. Controls the output of sub-volume names at co-ordinate positions on the isometric. Used for positive relative position in E/W plane. Used for negative relative position in E/W plane. Used for positive relative position in N/S plane.
-398 -443 -444 -445
161
Styles -446 -447 -448 -449 ^-? ^+? ^-? ^+? Used for negative relative position in N/S plane. Used for positive relative position in U/D plane. Used for negative relative position in U/D plane. Set to blank. Only outputs the relative position.
Specify Alternative Texts

Add a definition to the collection (see "Add to Collection" on page 23). Double-click the ISOGENTextID property to display a list of all available ATexts. In the list, select the AText you want to use. Click the AlternateText box to place the cursor and type the new Alternate Text to replace the text shown in the DefaultText box. For a complete list of available ATexts and their default values. see Grouping of ATexts Listings (see "Grouping of AText Listings" on page 133). 1. 2. 3. 4.
See also
AlternateText (on page 164) DefaultText (on page 165) ISOGENTextID (on page 165)
162
Styles
AlternativeTexts Object
The AlternativeTexts object contains a collection called ATexts, which is used to store the definitions of changes to ISOGEN standard text. The object has one property, Count, which defines the number of definitions in the AlternativeTexts collection. The Count property is defined by the software.
See also
Alternative Texts ATexts Collection (on page 164) Count (on page 163)
163
Styles
Count
Displays the number of ATexts stored in the ATexts collection.
See also
Alternative Texts ATexts Collection (on page 164)
Alternative Texts ATexts Collection

The AternativeTexts ATexts collection is used to store the definitions of changes to ISOGEN standard text. The value that the software displays after the name is a count of how many definitions are stored in the collection, as indicated in the following illustration by ATexts(13) in the Detail panel and again in the Value column of the Properties panel.
See also Add to Collection (on page 23) Remove from Collection (on page 23)
164
Styles AlternateText Stores the text to be used to replace the standard ISOGEN text. ISOGENTextID Stores the number used by ISOGEN to identify a standard text string. DefaultText Displays the standard text that ISOGEN outputs if you choose not to use an Alternative Text.
165
Styles
Drawing
Drawing Object
The Drawing object contains several sub-objects whose properties can be set to control the format and appearance of the isometric that is generated by ISOGEN. Content object (see "Drawing Content Object" on page 167) Controls object (see "Drawing Controls Object" on page 178) Definitions object (see "Drawing Definitions Object" on page 194) Dimensions object (see "Drawing Dimensions Object" on page 199) Format object (see "Drawing Format Object" on page 239) Layers object (see "Drawing Layers Object" on page 298) Welds object (see "Drawing Welds Object" on page 301)
The Drawing object itself has just one property - Visible (on page 166).
166
Styles
Visible
Controls whether the drawing is generated. True - Generates the drawing. False - Does not generate the drawing.
Defines OS 21, Pos 1
167
Styles
Drawing Content Object

The Drawing Content object controls what is shown on the isometric drawing. When you click the Drawing Content object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify any of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. ShowBIP (on page 169) ShowClosedEnd (on page 169) ShowCoordAtRefItem (on page 169) ShowContAtSplitPoint (on page 170) ShowCoordAtSplitPts (on page 170) ShowCptFlowArrows (on page 171) ShowDrainPosition (on page 171) ShowEquipConn (on page 171) ShowFlangeRotation (on page 171) ShowIsometricSpindles (on page 172) ShowMiscPosition (on page 173)
168
Styles ShowNozzles (on page 173) ShowNSUnitsOnDrg (on page 173) ShowNSUnitsInReports (on page 174) ShowOpenEnd (on page 175) ShowPipeLineCont (on page 175) ShowReferenceDims (on page 175) ShowRPads (on page 175) ShowSiteAssemblyTable (on page 176) ShowSupports (on page 176) ShowTapBrnchCoords (on page 177) ShowVentPosition (on page 177)
ShowBIP
Controls whether the coordinate information for break in points is shown on the isometric drawing. True - Shows the coordinates. This is the default setting. False Suppresses the display of coordinates on the isometric drawing.
Defines OS 5 Pos 8
ShowClosedEnd
Controls whether the coordinate information for closed end of pipe work and ISO TEXT are shown on the isometric drawing. True - Shows the coordinates. This is the default setting. False Suppresses the display of coordinates on the isometric drawing coordinates. The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for closed end is -241; the default is Blank. Defines OS 5 Pos 4
See also
Specify Alternative Texts (on page 162)
ShowCoordAtRefItem
Controls whether the co-ordinate information for referenced Items is shown on the isometric. True - Shows the coordinates. False - Does not show the coordinates. This is the default setting.
Defines OS 66 Pos 5 SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide 169
Styles
ShowContAtSplitPoint
Controls the location of drawing continuation messages on the isometric drawing at drawing split points. True - If ShowCoordsAtSplitPts is True, full set of coordinates output and message points to drawing split point. If ShowCoordsAtSplitPts is False, coordinates not output and message points to drawing split point.
False - Coordinates not output message points to end of continuation components.
Defines OS 66 Pos 4
See also
ShowCoordAtSplitPts (on page 170)
ShowCoordAtSplitPts
Controls whether the coordinate information at split points and ISO TEXT are shown on the isometric. True - ISOGEN displays a full set of coordinates in both drawings when a user-defined split point is used. False - Does not show coordinate information. This is the default setting.
Defines OS 66 Pos 4
170
Styles
ShowCptFlowArrows
Controls the use of flow arrows that are plotted alongside certain types of in-line components. Their purpose is to show the fluid or gas flow direction in a pipeline. True - Shows flow arrows. This is the default setting. False - Does not show flow arrows.
Defines OS 17 Pos 1
ShowDrainPosition
Controls whether the coordinate information at drain positions and ISO TEXT are shown on the isometric. True - Shows the coordinate information. This is the default setting. False - Does not show the coordinate information.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for Drain Position is -239; the default text is DRAIN. Defines OS 5 Pos 6
See also
ShowEquipConn
Controls whether the coordinate information at connection to equipment nozzles and ISO TEXT are shown on the isometric. True - Shows coordinate information. This is the default setting. False - Does not show coordinate information.
Note: The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for connections to equipment nozzles is -208; the default is CONN. TO. Defines OS 5 Pos 2
See also
171
Styles
ShowFlangeRotation
Controls the output of flange rotation angles that are used by the fabricator when welding on flanges that have to be rotated away from the normal off-center axes. Although the facility can be used on all types of isometrics, it is of particularly benefit on spool isometrics. There are a variety of enclosure box styles that can be used for the output of flange rotation angles on the isometric controlled by FlangeRotationStyle property. True - Shows flange rotation angles. False - Does not show flange rotation angles.
Defines OS 124 Pos 1
See also
FlangeRotationStyle (on page 255) Flange Rotation (on page 584)
ShowIsometricSpindles
Controls display of valve and instrument spindles in isometric projection. True - Shows valve and instrument spindles in isometric projection.
False - Shows valve and instrument spindles as flat.
Defines OS 95 Pos 6
172
Styles
ShowMiscPosition
Controls the whether the coordinate information at miscellaneous positions and ISO TEXT is shown on the isometric. True - Shows the coordinate information. This is the default setting. False - Does not show the coordinate information.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for miscellaneous positions is -242; the default is Blank. Defines OS 5 Pos 7
See also
Specify Alternate Texts (see "Specify Alternative Texts" on page 162)
ShowNozzles
Controls whether or not equipment nozzle indicators are plotted (in dotted line style) on the isometric. True - Shows equipment nozzle indicators. False - Does not show equipment nozzle indicators. This is the default setting.
ShowNSUnitsOnDrg
Controls how nominal size information is output in a number of tables and lists appearing on the isometric drawing. ISOGEN, however, does not have an option when outputting the nominal size on whether the units (typically the character) is appended to the output text. To give you control over the output of the nominal size units, SmartPlant I-Configure adds keywords to the appropriate control files. True - The keyword OUTPUT-UNITS is appended to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD when this appears in the control files for tables and lists appearing on the isometric drawing. False - The keyword SUPPRESS-UNITS is appended to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD when this appears in the control files for tables and lists appearing on the isometric drawing. You can control nominal size units for the following output tables and report files: Material List Style 2 Material List Style 3 Material List Style 4 Material Control File Cut Pipe List
173
Styles Cut Pipe Report File Weld List Welding Report File Site Welding Report File Operations List (default units output) Site Assembly Report File (default units output)
PRINTED-M/C-DATA-ITEMS 'PIPELINE-REFERENCE' 1 L 'REVISION' 18 L 'ITEM-CODE' 24 L 'N.S.' 41 L OUTPUT-UNITS 'QTY' 57 N 'GROUP' 64 L 'WEIGHT' 77 N
ShowNSUnitsInReports
Controls how nominal size information is output in a number of summary report files. ISOGEN, however, does not have an option when outputting the nominal size on whether the units (typically the character) is appended to the output text. To give you control over the output of the nominal size units, SmartPlant I-Configure adds keywords to the appropriate control files. True - The keyword OUTPUT-UNITS is appended to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD when this appears in the control files for summary report files. False - The keyword SUPPRESS-UNITS is appended to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD when this appears in the control files for Operations List and Site Assembly Report File (these reports have units output by default). You can now control nominal size units for the following output tables and report files: Material List Style 2 Material List Style 3 Material List Style 4 Material Control File Cut Pipe List Cut Pipe Report File Weld List Welding Report File Site Welding Report File Operations List (default units output) Site Assembly Report File (default units output)
174
Styles Consider the following example:

PRINTED-M/C-DATA-ITEMS 'PIPELINE-REFERENCE' 1 L 'REVISION' 18 L 'ITEM-CODE' 24 L 'N.S.' 41 L OUTPUT-UNITS 'QTY' 57 N 'GROUP' 64 L 'WEIGHT' 77 N
ShowOpenEnd
Controls whether the coordinate information at open end of pipe work and ISO TEXT are shown on the isometric. True - Shows coordinate information. This is the default setting, False - Does not show coordinate information.
Note: The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for open end is - 240; the default is Blank. Defines OS 5 Pos 3
See also
ShowPipeLineCont
Controls whether the coordinate information for pipeline continuations and ISO TEXT are shown on the isometric. True - Shows coordinate information. This is the default setting. False - Does not show coordinate information.
Note: The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for pipeline continuation is -209; the default is CONT. ON. Defines OS 5 Pos 1
See also
ShowReferenceDims
Controls whether reference dimensions are displayed. True - Outputs reference dimensions. False - Suppresses reference dimensions.
175
Styles
ShowRPads
Controls the automatic generation of an item code and material description on the material list and a plotted shape for the pad on the isometric. True - Generates item code / material description and plotted pad shape to be shown on isometric.
False - No generation of item code / material description and no plotted pad shape. This is the default setting.
Defines OS 77 Pos 3
ShowSiteAssemblyTable
Controls the display of the site assembly table is displayed on the isometric. True - Shows the site assembly table. False - Does not show the site assembly table.
Defines OS 79 Pos 4
176
Styles
ShowSupports
Controls the display of pipe supports. True - Shows pipe supports on the isometric and the material list.
False - Suppresses pipe supports from the isometric and the material list.
Defines OS 40 Pos 1
ShowTapBrnchCoords
Controls the output of coordinates at tapped branch connection points-- the point on the host component where the tapped branch is connected. True - Shows the coordinates. False - Does not show the coordinates.
177
Styles
ShowVentPosition
Controls the display of coordinate information at vent positions and ISO TEXT on the isometric. True - Shows coordinate information. This is the default setting. False - Does not show coordinate information.
Note: The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for connections to vent positions is -230; the default text is VENT. Defines OS 5 Pos 5
See also
178
Styles
Drawing Controls Object

The Drawing Controls object defines the drawing controls for the isometric. When you click the Drawing Controls object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
AppendStandardExts (on page 180) AutoDrawingSplit (on page 181) DateFormat (on page 181) DateSource (on page 181) DiagnosticLevel (on page 182) DisconnectionMessage (on page 182) DrawingSize (on page 182) FourDigitYear (on page 183) HeatTracingOptions (on page 183) IgnoreUserSplitPoints (on page 184) IsometricType (on page 184) IsoScale (on page 184) MinAngleOffset (on page 185) NoOfDrawings (on page 185)
179
Styles NorthDirection (on page 185) DrawingsPerFile (on page 186) OutputFormat (on page 186) OverwritePlotFile (on page 187) PipeLineScale (on page 187) PipeLineSplitting (on page 187) PipeLineSplittingInTube (on page 188) PipeNameInContMessages (on page 188) PipeNameStyle (on page 188) PlotFileLength (on page 189) PlotFilePath (on page 189) PostScriptSize (on page 189) PrintedOutputPageLen (on page 190) SetPipeLineDisconnected (on page 190) ShowIsogenVer (on page 190) StartDrawingNumber (on page 191) SupportAdditionsWeight (on page 191) TrueScale (on page 191) Units (on page 191) UseI01TypeExts (on page 192) WeightOutput (on page 193) LinearWeightDenominator (on page 193) ContinuationGraphicsOnSpoolIsos (on page 194)
You can modify each of the properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.
AppendStandardExts
True - Appends plot file output format extension to the I01 type file name extension on all plot files generated that do not use a user-defined plot file prefix. The UseI01TypeExts property must also be set to True. False - Does not append plot file output format extension to the I01 type file name extension on all plot files generated that do not use a user-defined plot file prefix.
Defines OS 71 Pos 7
See also
UseI01TypeExts (on page 192)
180
Styles
AutoDrawingSplit
True - The software calculates the volume of pipeline graphics that can be satisfactorily displayed on the selected drawing size, and generates the required number of isometrics to contain the complete pipeline. False - Uses the NoOfDrawings property to specify a fixed number of drawings. With this method, you are able to directly dictate how many isometric drawings are to be produced for a pipeline. Unless IgnoreUserSplitPoints is set to True, this property is ignored if you manually added pipeline split points are present in the pipeline data file, Only set the number of drawings in special cases, such as for single pipeline runs, since the setting is applied to all the pipelines in a run.
Defines OS 7 Pos 1, 2
See also
NoOfDrawings (on page 185) IgnoreUserSplitPoints (on page 184) PipeLineSplitting (on page 187) PipeLineSplittingInTube (on page 188) ShowCoordAtSplitPts (on page 170)
DateFormat
Controls the format of the date that is to be output on the isometric and in summary files. None - Displays no date. British - Displays the date in British format (dd/mm/yy) European - Displays the date in European format (dd/mm/yy). American - Displays the date in American format (mm/dd/yy).
Defines OS 6 Pos 1
See also
DateSource (on page 181) FourDigitYear (on page 183)
181
Styles
DateSource
Takes the actual date that is output from either the pipeline data file that has been created by the host 3D design system, or the computer system date at run time. DataFile - Uses the date contained in the pipeline data file. System - Uses the system clock date.
Defines OS 6 Pos 2
See also
DateFormat (on page 181) FourDigitYear (on page 183)
DiagnosticLevel
Controls the amount of information written to the Message file. Low - Minimum of information written to the message file. ISOGEN program version identification and plot file generation messages are output. Medium - As for low with the addition of ISODAT and ISOPLOT module running messages. High - As for medium with the addition of information related to the progress of the isometric through the ISOPLOT module.
Defines OS 55 Pos 1
DisconnectionMessage
Controls output of Disconnection messages on isometric. True - Outputs Disconnection message local to pipeline break where increased tolerance used to connect pipeline. False - Suppresses local Disconnection message where increased tolerance used to connect pipeline.
Defines OS 55 Pos 2
182
Styles
DrawingSize
Controls the size of drawing. Use the DrawingSize list to select the appropriate size of drawing. A0 - For European A0 paper size (841 x 1189 mm). A1 - For European A1 paper size (594 x 841mm). A2 - For European A2 paper size (420 x 594mm). A3 - For European A3 paper size (297 x 420mm). A4 - For European A4 paper size (210 x 297mm). ANSI "A" - For ANSI 'A' paper size (8.1/2" x 11"). ANSI "B" - For ANSI 'B' paper size(11" x 17"). ANSI "C" - For ANSI 'C' paper size (17" x 22"). ANSI "D" - For ANSI 'D' paper size (22" x 34"). ANSI "E" - For ANSI 'E' paper size (34" x 44"). Custom - If set to Custom, then you must also set the CustomHeight and CustomWidth properties on the Drawing Frame Object.
See also
CustomHeight (on page 336) CustomWidth (on page 336)
FourDigitYear
Controls whether the year portion of the date is output as two or four digits. True - Outputs four-digit year, such as 2009. False - Outputs two-digit year, such as 09.
Defines OS 6 Pos 3
See also
DateFormat (on page 181) DateSource (on page 181)
HeatTracingOptions
Controls heat tracing options. On - Use heat tracing options. Off - Do not use heat tracing options.
Defines OS 21 Pos 4
183
Styles
IgnoreUserSplitPoints
True - Ignores user-defined drawing split points present in the piping data file. False - Processes user-defined drawing split points present in the piping data file.
Defines OS 7 Pos 3
IsometricType
Sets the style of isometric to be produced. Combined - For a combined isometric a combination of Fabrication, Erection and Offshore information as appropriate. Erection/Offshore - For an erection/offshore type isometric. Fabrication Only - For a fabrication only isometric. Flat Spool (Flat) - For individual flat spool isometrics. (maximum legs flat). Flat Spool (Parallel) - For individual flat spool isometrics. (maximum legs parallel). Spool - For individual spool isometrics - as-built orientation. Material List Only - For isometrics suppression - no isometric drawings generated. Combined Material - For a combined material list only, without pipeline graphics. Erection Material - For an erection material list only, without pipeline graphics. Fabrication Material - For a fabrication material list only, without pipeline graphics. Spool Material - For spool material list only, without spool graphics.
Defines OS 21 Position 1 & 2
IsoScale
Allows the increase or decrease of the final plotted isometric size, changing it from that defined by the DrawingSize property or the CustomHeight and CustomWidth properties . 0 or 100 - No scaling change (100% of set size). The software generates isometrics at the size defined by the DrawingSize property or the CustomHeight and CustomWidth properties . n - Scales the drawing to increase or decrease the final isometric size by n%. For example, n = 71 generates a reduced size drawing at 71% of the set size, such as A2 reduced to A3. Whereas n = 120 generates an increased size drawing at 120% of the set size.
Defines OS 32
See also
CustomHeight (on page 336) CustomWidth (on page 336)
184
Styles DrawingSize (on page 182)
MinAngleOffset
Controls how small, angular deviations detected in the input pipeline data file are to be interpreted and acted upon. These deviations can lead to small unwanted skews being generated on the isometric. You can define an angular cut-off value with this property whereby any skew that is found to have an angular deviation below this value is ignored by the software and not treated as a skew. 0 - Default for no angular offset tolerance is set. Value - Where value is set to the required angle tolerance in degrees, such as. 0.5 for 0.5 degrees.
Defines OS 115
NoOfDrawings
Controls the number of drawings notation shown on the isometric, such as 1 of 2. 0 - Automatic control of drawing numbers. Value - User-defined number of drawings. Unless IgnoreUserSplitPoints is set to True, this property setting is ignored if manually placed pipeline split points are present in the pipeline data file, Only set the number of drawings in special cases for single pipeline runs, since this setting applies to all the pipelines in a run.
Defines OS 7 Pos 1 & 2
See also
IgnoreUserSplitPoints (on page 184)
185
Styles
NorthDirection
Controls the viewing direction (isometric orientation). There are four orientation options you can choose: 1. Top Left 2. Top Right 3. Bottom Left 4. Bottom Right The option you select is indicated on the isometric by the direction the North Arrow is pointing. You can specify that the arrow be displayed in a box with the NorthArrowBox property on the Drawing Format object. Defines OS 42
See also
NorthArrowBox (on page 265)
DrawingsPerFile
Controls how and where any isometric drawings are to be output. All On Same Sheet - Outputs isometric drawings generated during a run to either a single plot file or a series of plot files, depending upon the PlotFileLenth property One Per File - Generates an individual plot file for each isometric drawing. One Per Sheet - Plots each ISOGEN drawing sheet to a separate sheet within a single drawing file. Only applies to SmartSketch (IGR) and SmartPlant Shape2D (SHA) formats. Defines OS 31 Pos 1
See also
PlotFileLength (on page 189)
OutputFormat
Controls the 2D CAD file format that ISOGEN creates. Use the OutputFormat list to select the required output format. AutoCAD DXF (DXF) MicroStation (DGN) Smart DWG (DWG) Smart DGN (DGN) Smart DGN v8 (DGN) SmartSketch (IGR)
186
Styles Shape2d (SHA) POD2 POD3 ISOGEN Postscript In the case of Smart DGN v8 output, template backing sheets (supplied by Alias) are suffixed with .dg8. To use .dg8 templates: a. Rename the .dgn v5 template backing sheets to .dg5. b. Rename the .dg8 templates to .dgn. Defines OS 71 Pos 1
OverwritePlotFile
Controls whether or not plot files previously created can be overwritten if their names match those currently being created. True - Allocate plot file name using selected sequence method after deleting previously generated files. False - Allocate next available plot file, generate name using selected sequence method.
Defines OS 31 Pos 2
PipeLineScale
Increases or decreases the scale of the pipeline picture part of the isometric only, while leaving all other parts, such as the drawing frame, material list, title block and line summary areas, unaltered. When using PipeLineScale, the whole of the pipeline picture and all text pointing to it can be rescaled to make it larger or smaller. 0 or 100 - Default scale. Value - Increase or decreases the scaling effect as a percentage.
Defines OS 34
187
Styles
PipeLineSplitting
Controls automatic pipeline splitting. The amount of piping information that can be accommodated on a single drawing is limited. Once the limit is exceeded, then pipeline splitting automatically occurs. When using PipeLineSplitting, you can either increase the information content on each drawing, or alternatively, reduce the content. 0 or 100 - Default for what ISOGEN considers to be the limit for drawing information content. This limit is set within the software and varies for each size of drawing. Value - Increases or decreases the drawing information content as a percentage.
Defines OS 38
PipeLineSplittingInTube
Allows you to control the actions taken by the software whenever the ISOGEN automatic pipeline split facility selects a split point that is located in a straight length of pipe. Normal - Default for pipeline splitting to function as normal when the split point occurs along a section of pipe. The relevant split point information is passed back to the 3D design system using the isometric repeatability file, if it is being used. Reject - If a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe, the warning message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, is written to the message file. No plots are produced and no information is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline. Message - If a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe, the warning message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, is written to the message file. Plots are produced with the message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT plotted at the top of each affected drawing. No information is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.
Defines OS 108
PipeNameInContMessages
Controls whether the pipeline name is output as part of the drawing continuation message on the isometric. True - Drawing continuation message includes pipeline name. False - Standard drawing message.
Defines OS 38 Pos 4
188
Styles
PipeNameStyle
Controls the style of pipeline name output for drawing continuation messages. If PipeNameInContMessage is True. Blank - Standard drawing continuation message. Drawing Identifier - Drawing continuation message includes CLIENT-DRAWINGIDENTIFIER. Pipe Reference - Drawing continuation message includes pipeline name. Sequence Number - Drawing continuation message includes PIPELINE-DRAWINGSEQUENCE-NUMBER. Spool Drawing Sequence Number - Drawing continuation message includes SPOOLDRAWING-SEQUENCE-NUMBER.
Defines OS 38 Pos 4
See also
PipeNameInContMessages (on page 188)
PlotFileLength
Controls the physical length of the plot file that is generated by the ISOGEN program. It is only necessary to set this property when the OneFilePerDrawing property is set to False, and the required PlotfileLength is different to the built-in default value of 3275 mm. 0 - Default for plot file length of 3275mm. Value - The required plot file length in whole mm's. The maximum length is limited to 3350mm. Defines OS 1
See also
DrawingsPerFile (on page 186)
PlotFilePath
Directory into which drawings are written. Double-click in the PlotFilePath box and use the Browse for file dialog box to navigate to the required folder.
189
Styles
PostScriptSize
Use the PostScriptSize list to select the appropriate size. A0 - For European A0 paper size (841 x 1189 mm). A1 - For European A1 paper size (594 x 841mm). A2 - For European A2 paper size (420 x 594mm). A3 - For European A3 paper size (297 x 420mm). A4 - For European A4 paper size (210 x 297mm). ANSI "A" - For ANSI 'A' paper size (8.1/2" x 11"). ANSI "B" - For ANSI 'B' paper size(11" x 17"). ANSI "C" - For ANSI 'C' paper size (17" x 22"). ANSI "D" - For ANSI 'D' paper size (22" x 34"). ANSI "E" - For ANSI 'E' paper size (34" x 44").
PrintedOutputPageLen
Controls the number of lines per page on any printed output (reports) generated by the ISOGEN system. 0 - Default for 55 per page. Value - Specifies the required number of lines to be output per page.
Defines OS 63
SetPipeLineDisconnected
True - Sets pipeline to disconnected when increased tolerance used connect pipeline. Outputs a Disconnected Pipeline message at top of drawing. False - Suppresses Disconnected Pipeline message at top of drawing if pipeline has connected using the increased tolerance. Message is always output if pipeline does not connect using increased tolerance.
Defines OS 55 Pos 3
190
Styles
ShowIsogenVer
Controls the optional plotting of the ISOGEN program version banner, together with the run date and generation time of the isometric. The information is plotted on a single line located at the bottom left-hand corner of the isometric, but inside any cut marks that can be present. True - Plots the banner. False - Does not plot the banner.
Defines OS 127
StartDrawingNumber
Allows the first sheet to start at an alternative number instead of starting with drawing number 1 0 - Starts first sheet at drawing number 1. x - Starts first sheet at x+1.
Defines OS 31, Pos 3-5
SupportAdditionsWeight
Controls inclusion of the weight of additional material associated with supports when performing center of gravity calculations. Include - Includes the weight of additional materials (default). Ignore - Ignores the weight of additional materials.
Defines OS 40 Pos 6
TrueScale
Attempts to adjust the length of sections of pipe to be proportional to their actual physical length. True - Uses true scaling of isometrics (proportional pipe lengths). False - Uses normal scaling of isometrics (variable pipe lengths).
Defines OS 95 Pos 3
191
Styles
Units
Defines the style of units used throughout - Metric or Imperial. Metric / MM Bores - Millimeter lengths and millimeter pipe bores.
Metric / Inch Bores - Millimeter lengths and inch pipe bores.
Imperial / Inch Bores - Inch lengths and inch pipe bores.
You can specify the change over point from where lengths are reported in inches only, to feet and inches. Imperial / MM Bores - Inch pipe bores with lengths in feet and inches.
Defines OS 41 Pos 1
See also
FtInTolerance (on page 209)
192
Styles
UseI01TypeExts
Controls the use of I01 type extensions. True - Uses I01 type filename extensions on all plot files generated that do not use a user defined plot file prefix. False - Uses normal filenames / extensions.
Defines OS 71 Pos 7
WeightOutput
Controls how component weights are displayed. None - Outputs no weight information. Applies to all outputs, including such things as material lists, weight output on drawing frame, and material control files. This is the default setting. Kg - Inputs and outputs all weights in kilograms (Kgs). Lb - Inputs and outputs all weights in pounds (Lbs.)
The LinearWeightDenominator property specifies the units used for the linear weight denominator, irrespective of the units used for weights. Defines OS 41 Pos 4
See also
LinearWeightDenominator (on page 193)
193
Styles
LinearWeightDenominator
Allows you to specify the units used for linear weight denominator, irrespective of the units used for weights. None - By default, for the linear denominator, the program uses Lbs/Ft for linear weights where the weight is in Lbs., and Kgs/M for linear weights when the weight is in Kgs. m - The linear denominator is in Meters--Lbs/M when weight is in Lbs,, and Kgs/M when weight is in Kgs. ft - The linear denominator is in Feet--Lbs/Ft when weight is in Lbs,, and Kgs/Ft when weight is in Kgs. The weight unit is specified in the WeightOutput property . Defines OS 41 Pos 4
See also
WeightOutput (on page 193)
ContinuationGraphicsOnSpoolIsos
Controls the display of continuation graphics at the ends of spool isometric drawings. Where a spool continues on another spool, an appropriate continuation message is also output on the isometric drawing. False - Shows continuation graphics on spool isometrics. True - Does not show continuation graphics on spool isometrics.
Defines OS 38 Pos 5
194
Styles
Drawing Definitions Object

The Drawing Definitions object has a collection called Definitions, which is used to define how to represent pipeline components or facilities on the drawing. For example, you can specify that valves be drawn 1.5 times normal size with a line thickness of 1 on layer 5, and display in the color blue. The Count property, defined by the software, displays the number of definitions in the Definitions collection. When you click the Drawing Definitions object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel displays its two properties: LineStyleTable (on page 195) Count (on page 196)
You can modify the LineStyleTable property by double-clicking in the Value box.
See also
Drawing Definitions Definitions Collection (on page 196)
195
Styles
LineStyleTable
A free format text field that allows you to enter a list of names that correspond to numbers used in the Definition Collection's LineStyle property, such as: 1. Dotted 2. Dash-dot The entry must be the name of a line style defined in the output CAD system. Only those entries that appear in this table are available in the Definition Collection's LineStyle property.
See also
LineStyle (on page 199)
Count
Displays the number of definitions stored in the Drawing Definitions collection.
196
Styles
Drawing Definitions Definitions Collection

The Drawing Definitions Definitions collection defines how to represent pipeline components or facilities on the drawing. For example, you can specify that valves are to be drawn 1.5 times normal size with a line thickness of 1 on layer 5, and appear in the color blue. This collection is used to construct the corresponding Drawing definition file. The value that appears in parentheses after the collection name is a count of how many definitions are stored in the collection. You can define the following properties: AppliesTo (on page 198) LowerBore (on page 198) UpperBore (on page 198) Category (on page 198) Color (on page 199) Layer (on page 199) DScale (on page 199) ThicknessActual (on page 199) ThicknessLogical (on page 199) LineStyle (on page 199)
197
See also
Add to Collection (on page 23) Count (on page 196) Remove from Collection (on page 23) AppliesTo Defines the pipeline, pipeline component or facility, the definition will be applied to. This is set using a list, which includes the allowable settings for this property. LowerBore Specify an integer or real number that represents the minimum bore to which the definition applies. When there are two or more definitions with the same AppliesTo, you can use a zero (0) in the first of the lower bore positions to signal there is no lower bore. Consider the following example:
AppliesTo
Pipeline Pipeline Pipeline
LowerBore
0 2.5 8
UpperBore
2 6 0
SmartPlant I-Configure displays the LowerBore/UpperBore parameter together, rather than separated as they are currently.
See also
AppliesTo (on page 198) UpperBore Specify an integer or real number that represents the minimum bore to which the definition applies. When there are two or more definitions with the same AppliesTo, you can use a zero (0) in the last maximum bore position to signal there is no maximum bore limit. Consider the following example:
AppliesTo
Pipeline Pipeline Pipeline
LowerBore
0 2.5 8
UpperBore
2 6 0
SmartPlant I-Configure displays the LowerBore/UpperBore parameter together, rather than separated as they are currently.
See also
AppliesTo (on page 198)
198
Styles Category Specifies the category. Use the Category list to select the appropriate one: Fabrication, Erection, Offshore or All. Color Type the integer number that represent the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD). Layer Specify the integer number that identifies the required layer to which the definition is applied. DScale An integer number (two or three digits) that represents an increase or decrease to the basic 100% standard symbol size for all types of fitting. ThicknessActual Specifies the actual thickness (width) of plotted line in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) ThicknessLogical Integer number representing the required thickness, depending on the drawing output format (see "OutputFormat" on page 186) . LineStyle An integer that contains the user-specified line style number, which is displayed as a list containing any entries in the LineStyleTable plus any of the 12 supported ISOGEN styles.
See also
LineStyleTable (on page 195)
199
Styles
Drawing Dimensions Object

The Drawing Dimensions object controls how the dimensioning on the isometric is displayed. When you click the Drawing Dimension object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. AdditionalAllowanceFormat (on page 202) AddRoundOff (on page 202) BranchBoreLimit (on page 202) BranchCptLimit (on page 203) CoordOutputBends (on page 204) CoordOutputBranches (on page 205) CoordOutputHTCpts (on page 205) CoordSupports (on page 205) Coordtype (on page 205) DoubleUnits (on page 206) FabWeldsInPipe (on page 206)
200
Styles Format (on page 207) FtInTolerance (on page 209) Gaskets (on page 210) GasketDimPrecision (on page 211) ImperialFormat (on page 211) JacketDimensioning (on page 212) Inches (on page 212) IsometricText (on page 213) MetresCoordinates (on page 213) MetresDimensions (on page 213) MinOffset (on page 213) NominalSize (on page 214) NonLinearValves (on page 214) Overall (on page 215) SeparatePulledBend (on page 217) StandOutComposite (on page 217) StandOutOverall (on page 219) StandOutVertical (on page 220) SuppDimAsDim (on page 220) SuppFormat (on page 221) SuppOptions (on page 223) SuppStandOut (on page 224) TapOnCpt (on page 224) TapOnPipe (on page 225) TapBranchDimension (on page 227) USAStyle (on page 228) ValveBW (on page 229) ValveCP (on page 231) ValveFL (on page 232) ValveHY (on page 232) ValveLimit (on page 233) ValvePL (on page 233) ValveSC (on page 234) ValveSW (on page 235) VertOption (on page 236) PipesThroughPenetrationPlates (on page 238) IdfgenConnectionTolerance (on page 238)
201
Styles TapOnPipeFittings (on page 239) CurvedPipeDimensioning (on page 239)
AdditionalAllowanceFormat
Controls how additional allowances are displayed alongside or as part of dimensions. Suppress - Displays no additional allowances. Dim + Allowance -Displays dimension + allowance. Dim includes Allowance - Adds allowance to dimension.
Defines OS 9 Pos 5
AddRoundOff
Controls the Dimension Round Off Carry-Over function, which is used to control how remainders are handled when dimensions are calculated and output on the isometric. At branch locations, or components, this permits the remainder part of a dimension either to be carried over and added to the next dimension, or discarded. Normal - Rounds off dimensions to + or - 1mm, or 1/16th-inch, and carries over any reminder to the next dimension. Branch Intersect - Rounds off dimensions to + or - 1mm or 1/16th-inch with no carry-over of the remainder beyond a branch intersection. Current Component - Rounds off dimensions to + or - 1mm or 1/16th-inch with no carryover of the remainder beyond current component.
Defines OS 117
202
Styles
BranchBoreLimit
Controls the dimensioning of branch legs based on a minimum bore. Works in conjunction with the BranchCptLimit property , if set. 0 - Dimensions all pipe. Value - For branches having a bore equal to or less than value to have dimensions suppressed. Value is in 1/16ths of an inch or mm, depending on the bore units. For example, the branch in the following illustration has a pipe bore of less than the value stated in BranchBoreLimit , and so it is not dimensioned.
Any branch containing pipe (100 record), fixed length pipe (101 record) or pipe block (103 record) does not have branch dimension suppression applied to it. Branch dimension suppression using this property does not apply to tapped branches. The BranchBoreLimit and BranchCptLimit properties work either independently of each other or together, depending upon your requirements.
Defines OS 81 Pos 4,5,6
See also
BranchCptLimit (on page 203)
203
Styles
BranchCptLimit
Controls the dimensioning of branches based on the number of components. Works in conjunction with the BranchBoreLimit property, if set. Branches with a specified number of components are un-dimensioned. Blank - Dimensions all branches. Value - For branches having a number of components equal to or less than value to have dimensions suppressed. Gasket and bolt entries are counted as components. For example, the branch in the following illustration has six components: a weldolet, a weld neck flange, two gaskets, a valve and a blind flange. In this example, BranchCptLimit has been set to 7, so the branch has not been dimensioned.
Any branch containing pipe (100 record), fixed length pipe (101 record) or pipe block (103 record) does not have branch dimension suppression applied to it. Branch dimension suppression using this property does not apply to tapped branches. The BranchBoreLimit and BranchCptLimit properties work either independently of each other or together, depending upon your requirements.
See also
BranchBoreLimit (on page 202)
204
Styles
CoordOutputBends
Controls whether co-ordinates and elevations are printed at bends and elbows. None - Outputs no elevation coordinates. Elev at changes - Outputs elevations when changed. Elev and coords at changes - Outputs elevations and co-ordinates that have changed. Full - Outputs a full set of coordinates.
Defines OS 66 Pos 2
CoordOutputBranches
Controls whether coordinates and elevations are output on branch intersection points. None - Outputs no elevation coordinates. Elev at changes - Outputs elevations when changed. Elev and coords at changes - Outputs elevations and co-ordinates that have changed. Full - Outputs a full set of coordinates.
Defines OS 66 Pos 3
CoordOutputHTCpts
Controls whether coordinates are output on heat traced components. On - Outputs coordinates on heat traced components. Off - Suppresses coordinates on heat traced components.
CoordSupports
Controls whether coordinates are output at supports. None - Does not output coordinates on pipe supports. Fabrication - Outputs coordinates at Fabrication pipe supports only. Erection - Outputs coordinates at Erection pipe supports only. Offshore - Outputs coordinates at Offshore pipe supports only. All - Outputs coordinates at all pipe supports.
Defines OS 66 Pos 6
205
Styles
CoordType
Controls whether coordinates and elevations are output as arrowed-out messages, or on witness lines at bend and tee intersection points on the isometric. Arrowed - Outputs coordinates and elevations as arrowed-out message type. This is the default. Witness Lines - Outputs coordinates and elevations along witness lines.
Defines OS 66 Pos 1
DoubleUnits
Controls whether measurements are output in both Imperial and Metric units, or just one. True - Outputs measurements in both Imperial and Metric units. False - Outputs measurements in one type of unit only.
Defines OS 9 Pos 7
206
Styles
FabWeldsInPipe
Controls dimensioning of fabrication welds in pipe. True - Shows dimension to fabrication weld.
False - Suppresses dimension to fabrication weld.
207
Styles
Format
Controls style of dimensioning used on the isometric. Basic - Plots basic string dimensions, support / message dimensions, and reference dimensions.
String/Composite - Same as Basic except composite dimensions are output instead of string.
Support/Comment - Only support / message and reference location dimensions only.
208
Styles Reference Location - Plots only reference dimensions.
Full String - Same as Basic except full string dimensions are output instead of ordinary string dimensions. That is, all components are individually dimensioned.
Defines OS 9 Pos 1
FtInTolerance
Controls imperial dimension output format (Inches or Feet-Inches). Type a value to set the number of whole inches at which output style changes from inches to feet-inches. This value must be greater than 12. In the following example, the 19.9/16" long pipe is dimensioned as 1' 7.9/16", as FtInTolerance is set at 19.
209
Styles In this example, the same pipe is dimensioned as 19.9/16", as FtInTolerance is set at 20.
Gaskets
Controls how gaskets are dimensioned. None - Does not include gaskets.
Gasket thicknesses are not included. The component dimension is indicated by the presence of two leader lines. Included - For component dimensions to include gaskets.
Gasket thicknesses are included. The component dimension is indicated by the presence of only single leader lines. The length of the valve has now increased by the thickness of the gaskets (2mm in this case) either side.
210
Styles Separate - For separate dimensioning of gaskets.
Defines OS 9 Pos 2
See also
GasketDimPrecision (on page 211)
GasketDimPrecision
Controls precise dimensioning of gaskets. True - Outputs gasket dimensions to the nearest 10th mm.
False - Outputs gasket dimensions to the nearest mm.
See also
Gaskets (on page 210)
211
Styles
ImperialFormat
Controls the style of Imperial dimensioning used on the isometric. Standard - Standard output of Feet. Inch dimensions - of the form 6' 10.3/4". Standard dash - Same as Standard but with an added dash (-) between the Feet and Inches of the form 6' - 10.3/4". Space dash - Same as Standard dash but with a blank space instead of a dot (.) between Inches and fractions of an Inch - of the form 6' - 10 3/4". Stacked fractions with dash - Stacked fractions with a dash (-) of the form 6' - 10". Stacked fractions without dash - Stacked fractions without a dash (-) of the form 6' 10". 1DecimalPlace - Output decimal inches to 1 decimal place. 2DecimalPlace - Output decimal inches to 2 decimal places. 3DecimalPlace - Output decimal inches to 3 decimal places. 4DecimalPlace - Output decimal inches to 4 decimal places.
The Stacked fraction options only apply to MicroStation DGN output when a special font (supplied by Alias) is needed. Defines OS 41 Pos 3
JacketDimensioning
Dimensioning used for jacketed pipe work has two settings. Full - Full jacket dimensioning. Minimal - Minimal detail.
Defines OS 9 Pos 9
Inches
Controls whether pipes are dimensioned in Inches only or in feet and inches. True - Outputs dimensions in inches. False - Outputs dimesnions in feet/inches for any dimensions greater than 24-inches. If the FtInTolerance property is set, it supercedes this property. Defines OS 41 Pos 6
See also
FtInTolerance (on page 209)
212
Styles
IsometricText
Dimension text and messages placed along a section of pipe in isometric projection (oblique angle \ slanted text). Text oblique angle is adjusted to be parallel to the dimension standout direction. ISOGEN attempts to set a vertical dimension standout for horizontal sections of pipeline wherever practical. True - Text is isometric. False - Text is not isometric.
This feature is only available for DXF format output styles generated using the POD interface. Defines OS 8 Pos 3
MetresCoordinates
Controls the output of coordinates in either mm or M.mm format. Defines OS 41 Pos 2
See also
MetresDimensions (on page 213)
MetresDimensions
Controls the output of dimensions in either mm or M.mm format. Defines OS 41 Pos 2
See also
MetresCoordinates (on page 213)
213
Styles
MinOffset
Controls how small dimensional deviations detected in the input Pipeline data file are to be interpreted and acted upon. These deviations can lead to small unwanted skews being generated on the isometric. You can use MinOffset to define a dimensional cut-off value, whereby any offset coordinate numerically below this value is ignored by the software and hence does not generate a Skew at this point. 0 - Default for no dimensional offset tolerance to be set. Value - Where value (real number) is set to the required dimensional tolerance in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 1.0 mm or 0.04 inch.
Defines OS 116 Pos 1-3
See also
IdfgenConnectionTolerance (on page 238)
NominalSize
Controls whether nominal size (N.S.) is output at branch (tee/olet/cross) and reducer locations. True - Outputs nominal size information at branches and reducers as normal.
False - Suppresses nominal size information at branches and reducers.
Defines OS 41 Pos 8
214
Styles
NonLinearValves
Controls dimensioning of angle/3-way/4-way valves and Instruments. True - Angle/3-way/4-way valve and instruments dimensioned normally.
False - Angle/3-way/4-way valve and instruments dimensioned using message.
Defines OS 9 Pos 8
215
Styles
Overall
Controls the use of overall dimensions. You can specify whether overall dimensions are plotted, and if they are, which type. None - For no overall dimensions.
Across Branches - For Overall dimensions on - going across branches, such as tees, olets and crosses).
Stop At Branches - For Overall dimensions on - stopping at branches, such as tees, olets and crosses).
216
Styles Valves / Across Branches - For Overall dimensions on-going to Valve centres and going across branches, such as tees, olets and crosses).
Valves / Stop At Branches - For Overall dimensions on-going to Valve centres but stopping at branches, such as tees, olets and crosses).
Overall dimensions to valve centers are only available to valves that have a spindle. Defines OS 118 Pos 1
SeparatePulledBend
Controls how bends are dimensioned. True - Separate pipe and bend dimensions. False - Combined pipe and bend dimensions.
Defines OS 9 Pos 6
217
Styles
StandOutComposite
Controls dimension line standout distances for the following: 1. String and composite dimensions that are normally plotted as the middle layer of multi-layer dimensions. 2. Dimensioned messages, support dimensions and reference dimensions on the inner layer, but only when the SuppStandOut property is not set. 3. Overall dimensions on the outer layer, but only when the StandOutOverall property is not set. In the StandOutComposite box, type one of the following: 0 - If the value is set to 0 (zero), the default, then the following Standard dimension line standouts are used: When TextSize property is set to Small String / Composite Dimension Standout = 12mm. Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout - 6mm. Overall Dimension Standout = 18mm. String / Composite Dimension Standout = 14mm. Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 7mm. Overall Dimension Standout = 21mm. String / Composite Dimension Standout = 16mm. Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 8mm. Overall Dimension Standout = 24mm. String / Composite Dimension Standout = 18mm. Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 9mm. Overall Dimension Standout = 27mm. String / Composite Dimension Standout = 20mm. Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 10mm. Overall Dimension Standout = 30mm.
Medium
Large
XLarge
XXLarge
218
Styles XXXLarge String / Composite Dimension standout = 22mm. Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 11mm. Overall Dimension Standout = 33mm.
Value - Set a value in the data field, where value (real number) equals the required standout distance for string and composite dimensions on the middle layer in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. In the following illustration, StandOutComposite is set to 18, so all dimension lines are 18mm away from the pipe.
Values set to < = 11 mm are ignored by the software and substituted by the appropriate standard dimension line standout distance. When the value is set > 11 mm, that value is used by the software to set the dimension line standout distance for string and composite dimensions on the middle layer. The inner dimension layer for dimensioned messages, Support dimensions and reference dimensions are then be set to 0.5 X this distance, while the outer layer overall dimensions is set to 1.5 X this distance.
Defines OS 8 Pos 1,2
See also
SuppStandOut (on page 224) StandOutOverall (on page 219)
219
Styles
StandOutOverall
Controls the standout distance for overall dimensions. 0 - No overall dimension standout is set. This is the software default and is used for all overall dimensions. Value - Value (real number) is set to the user-specified overall dimension standout distance in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 40 to set the Value at 40mm.
StandOutVertical
True - Vertical dimension standout wherever possible. False - Normal selection criteria used to determine directional standout.
Defines OS 8 Pos 4
220
Styles
SuppDimAsDim
Controls which side of the pipeline the supports are drawn. True - Draws support dimensions on the same side of pipe as the normal dimensions.
False - Draws support dimensions on the opposite side of the pipe to the normal dimensions. This causes any support dimension line stand-out distance set by the SuppStandOut property to be ignored.
Defines OS 40 Pos 2
See also
SuppStandOut
221
Styles
SuppFormat
Controls how dimensions are shown for supports. Included - Pipe supports drawn on the isometric - support dimensions included as part of pipeline dimensions. None - Pipe supports drawn on the isometric - no support dimensions shown.
String - Pipe supports drawn on the isometric - no support dimensions shown.
222
Styles Overall - Pipe supports drawn on the isometric - dimensioned in overall form
Suppress - Pipe supports not drawn on isometric or output on the material list.
Defines OS 40 Pos 1
See also
SuppDimAsDim (on page 220) SuppOptions (on page 223) SuppStandOut (on page 224)
SuppOptions
Controls which supports are dimensioned. All - Dimension all supports. Fabrication - Dimension Fabrication type supports only.
223
Styles Erection - Dimension Erection type supports only. The following example shows only one of two supports dimensioned. The support that is dimensioned has its category set to Erection.
Offshore - Dimension Offshore type supports only. Erection and Offshore - Dimension Erection and Offshore type supports only.
Defines OS 40 Pos 5
SuppStandOut
Controls the value for the support dimension stand out distance. 0 - No support dimension line stand-out distance set. The software default is used for all support dimensions. Value - Value (real number) equals the required support dimension line stand-out distance in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box
See also
SuppDimAsDim (on page 220) SuppFormat (on page 221) SuppOptions (on page 223)
224
Styles
TapOnCpt
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on actual fitting components, such as valves and flanges A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point. None - For tapped branch dimensions off.
Full - For tapped branch dimensions on - as set for the main pipeline.
Pipe Only - For tapped branch dimensions off expect for those on pipe and pipe type components.
Defines 121 Pos 1
See also
TapOnPipe (on page 225)
225
Styles
TapOnPipe
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on pipe-type components, such as elbows, tees, and pipe. A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point. None - Default for tapped branch dimensions off.
Full - Tapped dimensions on.
Pipe Only - For tapped branch dimensions off except for those on pipe and pipe-type components.
226
Styles
TapBranchDimension
Controls the dimensioning of tee and tap branches where you now have the option of dimensioning to the edge of pipe. Centerline- Dimensions originate from the center lines of the main run.
TapAndSetOnStartPoint - Dimensions to the edge of pipe
227
Styles TapStartPoint - Defines tap dimensions only.
Defines OS 81 Pos 9.
See also
TapOnCpt (on page 224)
TeeBendBranchDimension
Controls the dimensioning of tee bend/elbows. Connection - Dimensioned from connection point. Centre-line Intersection - Dimensioned from center-line intersection point.
228
Styles
USAStyle
Controls whether or not the dimension line is broken to make space for the dimension characters. True - USA dimensioning style-- positioned on top of dimension line.
False - Regular dimensioning style--inserted into dimension line.
Defines OS 9 Pos 3
229
Styles
ValveBW
Butt weld valves and straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions. The ValveBW property can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property, which adds bore selectivity. True - For components with butt weld ends to have centerline dimensions.
False - Default for components with butt weld ends to be dimensioned across their length.
Defines OS 80 Pos 1
See also
ValveLimit (on page 233)
230
Styles
ValveCP
Compression type valves and straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions. ValveCP can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property , which adds bore selectivity. True - For components with compression ends to have centerline dimensions.
False - Default for components with compression ends to be dimensioned across their length.
Defines OS 80 Pos 2
See also
231
Styles
ValveFL
Flanged valves and straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions. ValveFL can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property, which adds bore selectivity. True - For components with flanged ends to have centerline dimensions.
False - For components with flanged ends to be dimensioned across their length.
Defines OS 80 Pos 5
232
Styles
ValveHY
Hygienic type valves and straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions. ValveHY can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property , which adds bore selectivity. True - For components with hygienic ends to have centerline dimensions.
False - Default for components with hygienic ends to be dimensioned across their length.
Defines OS 80 Pos 7
See also
ValveLimit
0 - Default for valves/instruments that have their end type set in ValveBW, ValveCP, and so on, to be dimensioned to their center point. Value - For valves/instruments that have their end type set in ValveBW, ValveCP, and so on, and have a bore equal to or less than the value set to be dimensioned to their center point. Value is in 1/16th of an Inch or mm, depending on the bore units. For example, 32 x 1/16th is equivalent to 2 bore.
Defines OS 81 Pos 1,2,3
233
Styles
ValvePL
Plain-ended valves and straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions. ValvePL can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property, which adds bore selectivity. True - For components with plain ends to have centerline dimensions.
False - For components with plain ends to be dimensioned across their length.
Defines OS 80 Pos 6
See also
234
Styles
ValveSC
Screwed valves and straight through instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions. ValveSC can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property, which adds bore selectivity. True - For components with screwed ends to have centerline dimensions.
False - For components with screwed ends to be dimensioned across their length.
Defines OS 80 Pos 3
See also
235
Styles
ValveSW
Socket weld valves and straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions. ValveSW can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property, which adds bore selectivity. True - For components with socket weld ends to have centerline dimensions.
False - Default for components with socket weld ends to be dimensioned across their length.
Defines OS 80 Pos 4
See also
236
Styles
VertOption
Controls how vertical pipe positions are indicated on the isometric. Normal - For normal vertical pipe dimensions, elevations are also indicated at intersection points when the level changes.
Suppressed - For all vertical pipe dimensions to be suppressed and replaced by elevations in the form of text messages at all positions where dimensions would normally be output.
237
Styles Elevation - For vertical dimensions and elevations output at all normal dimensioning positions.
Defines OS 119
PipesThroughPenetrationPlates
Controls the dimensioning of pipes passing through penetration plates. Dimension From Adjacent Plate Face - Pipes passing through penetration plates dimensioned from adjacent plate face. Dimension From Same Plate Face - Pipes passing through penetration plates dimensioned from same plate face.
Defines 119 Pos 6
IdfgenConnectionTolerance
Controls the tolerance to be used when connecting components in IDFGEN (set in 100th mms).
Backward Compatibility
To avoid problems where this control is set as a single value--no tolerance is set in Option Switch 116, Positions 4-6--IDFGEN continues to use positions 1-3 to determine the connection tolerance. Defines 116 Pos 4-6
238
Styles
See also
MinOffSet (on page 213)
TapOnPipeFittings
Controls the dimensioning of tapping points on pipe type components, such as elbows/teed elbows, bends/teed bends, tees, and crosses. A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point. None - Tapped branches on pipe fittings not dimensioned. Full - Tapped branches on pipe fittings dimensioned.
CurvedPipeDimensioning
Controls the dimensioning of curved pipe. Message - Output curved pipe dimensions as a message. Standard - Output curved pipe dimensions as a standard dimension. Suppress - Suppress curved pipe dimensions.
Defines OS 84 Pos 1
239
Styles
Drawing Format Object

The Drawing Format object controls the format of the information on the isometric. When you click the Drawing Format object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. AngleAccuracy (on page 243) AngleStyle (on page 243) AngleType (on page 243) CptAttributesEnclStyle (on page 245) AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245) AdditionalWeldEnclosure (on page 248) AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248) BendRadius (on page 249) BendRepresentation (on page 249) ComponentLegLength (on page 250) ComputeNozzleAxis (on page 250)
240
Styles CptTagEnclStyle (on page 251) CptTagsStyle (on page 251) CutPieceNoLength (on page 252) CutPieceEnclosureStyle (on page 252) ElbowRadius (on page 253) ElbowRepresentation (on page 253) FallCutOff (on page 254) FallRepresentation (on page 255) FlangeRotationStyle (on page 255) FlowArrowScale (on page 256) GhostGapDimension (on page 256) InstIDEnclosureSize (on page 256) InstIDEnclosureStyle (on page 257) InstIdentification (on page 259) InsulationStyle (on page 260) MessageCircleEnclosure (on page 260) MessageDiamondEnclosure (on page 261) MessagePointedEnclosure (on page 262) MessageRoundEnclosure (on page 262) MessageSquareEnclosure (on page 263) MessageTriangleEnclosure (on page 264) MultiPortConnections (on page 265) NorthArrowBox (on page 265) OletBranchOrientationMessage (on page 265) OrientationFrom (on page 265) PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoEnclSize (on page 268) PartNoSpaces (on page 269) PartNoLength (on page 269) PartNoVisible (on page 269) SeparateSpoolUnion (on page 270) ShowFlowArrows (on page 270) SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 270) SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 272) SiteAssemblyIDs (on page 273) SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing (on page 274) SiteWeldsNotAssignedToSpools (on page 274)
241
Styles SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) skewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewMixed (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkEnclosure (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283) SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290) SupportIdentification (on page 291) SupportTagEnclStyle (on page 291) TapBranchInlineScale (on page 292) TapBranchPipeScale (on page 292) TapBranchSuppression (on page 292) TeeCrossNS (on page 293) TestIso (on page 294) TextFont (on page 294) TextSize (on page 294) UserTextSize (on page 295) TextWeight (on page 295) TextWidth (on page 296)
242
Styles TracingStyle (on page 296) ReferenceNameStyle (on page 296) CurvedPipeAngleStyle (on page 298) CurvedPipeRadiusStyle (on page 298)
AngleAccuracy
Controls the accuracy at which angle information is output on the isometric drawing. Default - Outputs all angles to ISOGEN default accuracy of 0.5-degrees. Nearest Degree - Outputs angles to the nearest degree. Nearest 10th Degree (1 decimal place) - Outputs angles to the nearest 0.1-degrees. Nearest 100th Degree (2 decimal places) - Outputs angles to the nearest 0.01-degrees.
Defines OS 67 Pos 4
AngleStyle
Controls the output of angle information for bends and elbows in the pipeline. All - Outputs all angle information on the isometric (including angles that are exactly 90and 180-degrees.) All except 90/180 deg - Outputs all angle information on the isometric drawing except angles that are within 0.5-degrees of 90- and 180-degrees. All except within 10 th degree of 90/180 - Outputs angle information on the isometric drawing unless when rounded angles are within .1-degree of 90- and 180-degrees. None - Suppresses angle information on the isometric drawing.
Defines OS 67 Pos 2
See also
AngleType (on page 243)
243
Styles
AngleType
Controls whether the angles output for bends and elbows are the included or deflected angle. Deflected
Included
If set, AText -396 is combined with the angle information and displayed on the isometric drawing.
If not set (default), only the angle information is output. Defines OS 67 Pos 3
See also
AngleStyle (on page 243) 244 SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
Styles
CptAttributesEnclStyle
Contains the text output to the data definition file for the component attribute enclosure. Adheres to the following format:
Message-Type Attribute
Message-Types: MESSAGE-POINTED MESSAGE-ROUND MESSAGE-TRIANGLE MESSAGE-DIAMOND MESSAGE-SQUARE MESSAGE-CIRCLE MESSAGE-UNBOXED COMPONENT-NAME COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 Material list (Variable and UserDefined) Printed material list Material control file Cut list report Cut list file
Attributes:
You can output attributes to the following:
245
Styles
AdditionalEnclosureStyle
Allows the normal enclosure styles to have either an additional box output below the part number box, or extend the part number box by a specified number of blank spaces. Type 1: None - No additional enclosure style. Type 1 Square
Type 1 Round
Type 1 Diamond
Type 2: Uses the PartNoEnclosureStyle property to define the style of end used with Type 2 additional enclosure.
246
Styles Type 2 Square
Type 2 Round
Type 2 Diamond
The PartNoSpaces property needs to be set to control the number of blank spaces used. For Type 2, the enclosure style for the box with the part numbers in it is defined using the PartNoEnclosureStyle property. If the PartNoEnclosureStyle property is set to Circle, Double Circle or Ellipse, then Type 2 AdditionalEnclosureStyle is switched off, as this uses the same setting. All pipe part numbers, which are usually output as messages along the pipe, are converted to arrowed out type messages.
247
Styles Defines OS 73 Pos 5 OS 76 Pos1
See also
PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoSpaces (on page 269)
AdditionalWeldEnclosure
Controls special part number box for welds. True - Special part number box for welds are displayed size of box controlled by AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces property.
False - Special part number box for welds are not displayed.
Welds must have part numbers and descriptions, and the MLType property must be set to Special. Defines OS 73 Pos 6,7
See also
AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245) AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248) PartNoEnclSize (on page 268) PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoSpaces (on page 269) PartNovisible (on page 269)
248
Styles
AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces
Sets the number of spaces used when AdditionalWeldEnclosure is set to True. Value - Specifies the number of spaces to be used. A default value of 2 is used if no value is set.
See also
AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245) AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248) PartNoEnclSize (on page 268) PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoSpaces (on page 269) PartNovisible (on page 269)
BendRadius
Controls the radius depiction on the isometric for bends, if BendRepresentation is set to Round. Value - Type a real value in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box. Minimum 3mm radius, maximum 9mm radius. In the following example, the BendRadius is 8mm.
The default radius used for bends is 3mm.
See also
BendRepresentation (on page 249)
249
Styles
BendRepresentation
Controls the representation of bends on the isometric. Square
Round
ComponentLegLength
Controls the plotted component leg lengths of elbows and fitting tees and crosses. This leg length control facility does not apply to fabricated (pulled) bends or set-on (stub-in) type tees or crosses. Value - Set to the required leg length in whole mms. For example, for a 12mm leg length, type 12. If you set the Value to 0, the software uses a default value of 9mm. The maximum value allowed is 18mm; the minimum value allowed is 6mm.
Use the ComponentLegLength control with care. Long leg lengths take up more space on the drawing and can sometimes have an adverse effect on the finished isometric Defines OS 95 Pos 1
250
Styles
ComputeNozzleAxis
Controls the calculation of Nozzle axes directions and insertion of this information into the PCF (Piping Component File) when using the Pcfgen program. True - Nozzle axis direction calculated and inserted into the PCF. False - No calculation of Nozzle axis direction calculated or output to the PCF. Currently not in use - leave set at False. Defines OS 111 Pos 2
CptTagEnclStyle
Controls the enclosure shapes used for components if CptTagsStyle is set to Boxed. Square Ended Box Diamond Ended Box Round Ended Box Triangular Diamond Square Ended Box Circular Elliptical Hexagonal
Defines OS 60 Pos 3
See also
CptTagsStyle (on page 251)
251
Styles
CptTagsStyle
Controls the plotting of tags/names on most pipeline components. None - Does not plot tags/names. Boxed - Plots and boxes in tags/names. Unboxed - Plots tags/names without boxing in. Tagging of pipe and pipeline elements made from pipe is not supported. For instruments, see InstIDEnclosureStyle (on page 257).
Defines OS 60 Pos 1
See also
CptTagEnclStyle (on page 251)
CutPieceNoLength
Sets a fixed (1-9 characters or variable) length for part numbers. Value - Specify from 1-9 to set the number of characters or set as variable. Defines OS 72 Pos 2
See also
CutPieceEnclosureStyle (on page 252)
252
Styles
CutPieceEnclosureStyle
Controls the shape of the enclosure used to surround the cut piece numbers on the isometric. <n> Default Circle Diamond Diamond Ends Double Circle Double Ellipse Hexagon Ends Round Ends Square Ends Triangle
Defines OS 2 Pos 7, 8.
See also
CutPieceNoLength (on page 252)
ElbowRadius
Controls the radius depiction on the isometric for elbows, if ElbowRrepresentation is Round. Value - Type a real value in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. Minimum 3mm radius, maximum 9mm radius. In the following illustration, the ElbowRadius is 45mm.
The default radius used for elbows is 3 mm.
See also
ElbowRepresentation (on page 253)
253
Styles
ElbowRepresentation
Controls the representation of elbows on the isometric. Square
Round
FallCutOff
Controls the cut-off value used when determining what steepness of slope is treated as a fall. Slopes steeper than the cut-off value are shown with a 2D or 3D box or triangle skew indication as appropriate. 0 - Default for 5 angle cut-off or its equivalent depending upon the type of indication selected by the FallRepresentation property . Value - Where value is set to a cut-off number to suit the type of indication selected by the FallRepresentation property. For fall cut off of 5 Degrees, type 5 or 0. For fall cut off of 1:11 Ratio, type 11. For fall cut off of 9 Percent, type 9. For fall cut off of 5 Grads, type 5. For fall cut off of 1" Per foot, type 1. For fall cut off of 88 mm per meter, type 88.
Always set FallCutOff to 0 when sloping pipeline indication has been suppressed by the FallRepresentation property . Defines OS 20
See also
FallRepresentation (on page 255) 254 SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
Styles
FallRepresentation
Controls how sections of falling pipelines (downward slopes) are to be indicated on the isometric. It determines the method of how the fall value is to be indicated numerically on the isometric, as specified by one of the options shown below. None - suppress falling line indication. D deg - Angle output to nearest degree. D.d deg - Angle output to nearest 1/10th degree. D.dd deg - Angle output to nearest 1/100th degree. deg.min - Angle output in degrees and minutes. Ratio~5 (>1:30) - Ratio output to nearest 5 when greater than 1:30. Ratio~5 (>1:100) - Ratio output to nearest 5 when greater than 1:100. Ratio~1 - Ratio always output to nearest 1. G grad - Gradient output to nearest grad. G.g grad - Gradient output to nearest 1/10th grad. G.gg grad 1 - Gradient output to nearest 1/100th grad. P% - Percentage output to nearest whole value. P.p% - Percentage output to nearest 1 decimal place. P.pp% - Percentage output to nearest 2 decimal place. Incline~1/16th"/ft - Incline output to nearest 16th of an inch per foot. Incline~1/100"/ft - Incline output to nearest 100th of an inch per foot. Incline~1mm/m - Incline output to nearest mm per metre. Incline~5mm/m - Incline output to nearest 5 mm per metre. Incline~10mm/m - Incline output to nearest 10 mm per metre.
Defines OS 19
See also
FallCutOff (on page 254)
FlangeRotationStyle
Controls the enclosure box styles that can be used for the output of flange rotation angles on the isometric, when ShowFlangeRotation is set to True. No box - For un-boxed angle output. Diamond ends - For diamond-ended enclosure box.
255
Styles Round ends - For round-ended enclosure box. Square ends - For square- ended enclosure box.
See also
ShowFlangeRotation (on page 171)
FlowArrowScale
Controls the scale of flow arrows that are plotted directly on the pipe. Their purpose is to show the flow direction of fluid or gas in the pipeline. Value - Plots pipeline flow arrows at an alternative scale factor (default 8) in the range value 5 to 15 inclusive (value 5 gives smaller arrows, 15 larger). This type of flow arrow can only be generated if the relevant information is included in the input Pipeline data file. You can also use a separate type of flow arrow--which is plotted alongside in-line fittings--either as well as or instead of, the flow arrow annotation output on pipe. Defines OS 112 Pos 1,2
See also
ShowCptFlowArrows (on page 171)
GhostGapDimension
Controls the plotted length of a ghost gap element. A ghost gap element is a physical gap on the plotted isometric that can be used when generating individual pipeline isometrics, or as a link between related, but unconnected, pipelines on a system type isometric. 0 - Default for the normal minimum gap as controlled by the ISOGEN program. Value - Where value (real number) is the user-defined minimum gap dimension in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. The smallest allowable gap is 18 mm. The largest allowable gap is 60 mm. The software defaults to using the appropriate maximum value if it detects a setting outside these limits.
Defines OS 110
256
Styles
nstIDEnclosureSize
Controls the plotting of Instrument name in a balloon type enclosure. No Balloon- Does not plot a balloon around the instrument name.
1 character - Plots a balloon size at least 1 character on each line. 2 character - Plots a balloon size at least 2 characters on each line. 3 character - Plots a balloon size at least 3 characters on each line.
A two line name output is derived by inputting a $ character in the name at the point a new-line is required, such as CV$101. 4 character - Plots a balloon size at least 4 characters on each line. 5 character - Plots a balloon size at least 5 characters on each line.
A variety of other box type enclosures is available by using the InstIDEnclosureStyle property . Defines OS 123 Pos 1
See also
InstIDEnclosureStyle (on page 257)
257
Styles
InstIDEnclosureStyle
Controls the alternative instrument ID enclosure style. No Box - Reverts to using the setting for InstIDEnclosureSize . Diamond - Displays a diamond-ended box enclosure.
Round - Displays a round-ended box enclosure.
Triangular - Displays a triangle-shaped box enclosure.
258
Styles Diamond - Displays a diamond-shaped box enclosure.
Square - Displays a square-ended box enclosure.
Circle - Displays a circular-shaped box enclosure. Ellipse - Displays an elliptical-shaped box enclosure. Hexagon - Displays a hexagonal-shaped box enclosure.
To reduce the chances of these enclosures becoming quite large, especially the diamond and triangle enclosures, limit the display to only 2 or 3 characters. Defines OS 123 Pos 3
See also
InstIDEnclosureSize (on page 256)
259
Styles
InstIdentification
Controls which particular 3D design system parameter is used by ISOGEN for instrument identification on the material list or any material control file that is generated. Typically, 3D design systems have parameters for both the instrument name (tag) and the specification reference (Item code), but only one of these can be selected for output. Use Tag - Outputs the default for the Instrument name (tag). Use Item Code - Outputs the specification reference (item code) of the instrument.
Defines OS 59
InsulationStyle
Controls the plotting of insulation indication on the isometric in the form of a chain dotted line on one side of the pipe and optionally, alongside components. None - Suppresses insulation indication. Alongside Pipe - Plots dashed insulation lines alongside pipe only, with a gap of 1mm. Alongside Pipe and Components - Plots dashed insulation lines alongside pipe and all components, both with a 1mm gap.
Defines OS 62
MessageCircleEnclosure
Controls the physical size of the circle enclosure used to contain user input messages. This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that will be used by the program to 'pad- out' the normal message record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The size of the text (set by the TextSize property) displayed within any increased size enclosure is not increased in size. The data string associated with each identifier consists of a combination of @, $ and ? characters. The @ character is used to signal a blank (space) requirement. The $ character is used to signal a new line requirement. The ? character is used to indicate where the actual data from the declared record should be located in the 'padded-out' record.
260
Styles Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the message circle as shown in the following illustration:
The circle message enclosure should ideally only contain two or three characters, and should also be used with care, as a large circle message considerably affects the isometric representation.
See also
TextSize (on page 294)
MessageDiamondEnclosure
Controls the physical size of the diamond enclosure used to contain user input messages. This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that will be used by the program to 'pad- out' the normal message record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The size of the text (set by the TextSize property) displayed within any increased size enclosure is not increased in size. The data string associated with each identifier consists of a combination of @, $ and ? characters. The @ character is used to signal a blank (space) requirement. The $ character is used to signal a new line requirement. The ? character is used to indicate where the actual data from the declared record should be located in the 'padded-out' record.
Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the message diamond as shown in the following illustration:
261
Styles The diamond message enclosure should ideally only contain two or three characters, and should also be used with care, as a large circle message considerably affects the isometric representation.
See also
MessagePointedEnclosure
Controls the physical size of the pointed-ended enclosure used to contain user input messages. This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that will be used by the program to 'pad- out' the normal message record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The size of the text (set by the TextSize property) displayed within any increased size enclosure is not increased in size. The data string associated with each identifier consists of a combination of @, $ and ? characters. The @ character is used to signal a blank (space) requirement. The $ character is used to signal a new line requirement. The ? character is used to indicate where the actual data from the declared record should be located in the 'padded-out' record.
Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the pointed-ended message as shown in the following illustration:
Use the pointed-ended message with care, as a large pointed-end message considerably affects the isometric representation.
See also
262
Styles
MessageRoundEnclosure
Controls the physical size of the round-ended enclosure used to contain user input messages. This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that will be used by the program to 'pad- out' the normal message record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The size of the text (set by the TextSize property) displayed within any increased size enclosure is not increased in size. The data string associated with each identifier consists of a combination of @, $ and ? characters. The @ character is used to signal a blank (space) requirement. The $ character is used to signal a new line requirement. The ? character is used to indicate where the actual data from the declared record should be located in the 'padded-out' record.
Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the round-ended message as shown in the following illustration:
Use the round-ended message with care, as a large round-end message considerably affects the isometric representation.
See also
MessageSquareEnclosure
Controls the physical size of the square enclosure used to contain user input messages. This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that will be used by the program to 'pad- out' the normal message record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The size of the text (set by the TextSize property) displayed within any increased size enclosure is not increased in size. The data string associated with each identifier consists of a combination of @, $ and ? characters. The @ character is used to signal a blank (space) requirement. The $ character is used to signal a new line requirement.
263
Styles The ? character is used to indicate where the actual data from the declared record should be located in the 'padded-out' record.
Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the square message as shown in the following illustration:
Use the square message with care, as a large square message considerably affects the isometric representation.
See also
MessageTriangleEnclosure
Controls the physical size of the triangle enclosure used to contain user input messages. This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that will be used by the program to 'pad- out' the normal message record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The size of the text (set by the TextSize property) displayed within any increased size enclosure is not increased in size. The data string associated with each identifier consists of a combination of @, $ and ? characters. The @ character is used to signal a blank (space) requirement. The $ character is used to signal a new line requirement. The ? character is used to indicate where the actual data from the declared record should be located in the 'padded-out' record.
Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the triangle message as shown in the following illustration:
264
Styles The triangle message enclosure should ideally only contain two or three characters, and should also be used with care, as a large triangle message considerably affects the isometric representation.
See also
MultiPortConnections
Controls the connection leg depiction of multi-port components. All Dotted - Dotted connection lines on all multi-port connections. Dotted for Clarity - Dotted connection lines are only generated when necessary for picture clarity, such as here two or more ports are positioned on the same side with attached pipework running parallel to each other. Not shown - No dotted connection lines shown.
Defines OS 95 Pos 5
NorthArrowBox
Controls whether the North arrow, as specified in the NorthDirection property, is displayed in an enclosing box. True - For the North arrow to have an enclosing box. False - For the North arrow not to have an enclosing box.
Defines OS 42
See also
NorthDirection (on page 185)
OletBranchOrientationMessage
Controls the output of an orientation message on undeveloped olet branches that are in primary directions. Create Orientation Message - Outputs an orientation message on undeveloped olet branches in a primary direction. No Message - Suppresses output of an orientation message on the isometric drawing.
Defines OS 70 Pos 4
265
Styles
OrientationFrom
Controls the output of skew orientation. Previous Position - Orientation direction message showing rotation relative to previous position.
Primary Direction - Orientation direction message showing rotation from primary direction.
Defines OS 70 Pos 3
PartNoEnclosureStyle
Controls the shape of the box enclosure used to surround the standard type of material list part numbers on the isometric. None - No enclosure box - only part numbers plotted.
266
Styles Square Ends
Round Ends
Diamond Ends
Circle
Double Circle
267
Styles Ellipse
The size of the circle, double circle and ellipse is drawn at is controlled by the PartNoEnclosureSize property (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure is dynamically adjusted to suit. Defines OS 76 Pos 1 and 2
See also
PartNoEnclSize (on page 268)
PartNoEnclSize
Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and eclipse enclosure style. The default is two, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters, or set to Variable, which dynamically sizes the enclosure. The following example shows the default size of 2 used for the circle enclosure style:
The number of characters defines the minimum size that the circle, double circle and ellipse is drawn at. If there are more characters than the value that is defined, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. If the size is set to Variable, this allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters. Defines OS 76 Pos 3
See also
AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245) PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoSpaces (on page 269)
268
Styles
PartNoSpaces
Sets the number of spaces used in the Type1 and Type2 part number boxes specified by the AdditionalEnclosureStyle property. Value - Specifies the number of spaces to be used. A default value of 2 is used if no value is set.
Defines OS 73 Pos 1 and 2 or OS 73 Pos 3 and 4
See also
AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245) PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoVisible (on page 269) AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248) AdditionalWeldEnclosure (on page 248)
PartNoLength
Sets a fixed (1-9 characters or variable) length for part numbers. Value - Specify from 1-9 to set the number of characters or set as variable. Defines OS 76 Pos 4
See also
AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245) PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoVisible (on page 269) AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248) AdditionalWeldEnclosure (on page 248)
PartNoVisible
True - Part numbers are displayed. False - Part numbers are not displayed.
Defines OS 76 Pos 1
See also
AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245) PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoSpaces (on page 269) AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248) AdditionalWeldEnclosure (on page 248)
269
Styles
SeparateSpoolUnion
Controls spool break points at unions. True - A fabrication union connecting fabrication components does not create separate spools. False - A fabrication union connecting fabrication components creates separate spools.
Defines OS 39 Pos 7
ShowFlowArrows
Controls the use of flow arrows that are plotted directly on the pipe. Their purpose is to show the flow direction of fluid or gas in the pipeline. The size of the flow arrow is controlled by the FlowArrowScale property. True - Shows flow arrows on pipe on isometric. False - Suppresses flow arrows on pipe on isometric. This type of glow arrow can only be generated if the relevant information is included in the input Pipeline data file. You can also use a separate type of flow arrow that is plotted alongside in-line fittings, either as well as, or instead of, the one output on pipe. For more information, see ShowCptFlowArrows (on page 171).
See also
FlowArrowScale (on page 256)
SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure
Controls the enclosure style used for site assemblies displayed on the isometric. None - Displays no box enclosure.
270
Styles Diamond - Displays a diamond-ended box enclosure.
Round - Displays a round-ended box enclosure.
Triangular - Displays a triangular-shaped enclosure.
Diamond - Displays a diamond-shaped enclosure.
Rectangular - Displays a rectangular-shaped enclosure.
271
Styles Circular - Displays a circular-shaped enclosure.
Double Circle - Displays a circular-shaped enclosure inside another circle.
Ellipse - Displays an elliptical-shaped enclosure.
The site assembly uses AText -478, default J--such as J1 or JA-- to prefix the flange assembly identification. The size that the circle, double circle and ellipse is drawn at is controlled by the SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 272) property (default 2 characters) which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit.
Defines OS 79 Pos 3
See also
SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 272) SiteAssemblyIDs (on page 273) SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing (on page 274)
272
Styles
SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize
Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and ellipse enclosure style. The default is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters or set to Variable, which dynamically sizes the enclosure. The following example shows the default size of 2 used for a circle style enclosure:
The number of characters defines the minimum size that the circle, double circle and ellipse is drawn at. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure is dynamically adjusted to suit. Setting the size to Variable, allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjusts to suit the number of characters. Defines OS 79 Pos 9
See also
SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 270) SiteAssemblyIDs (on page 273) SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing (on page 274)
273
Styles
SiteAssemblyIDs
Controls site assembly information displayed on the isometric. Off - Flange assembly identification not output. Numeric - Numeric flange assembly identification.
SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing
Controls whether site assemblies are numbered per drawing or per pipeline. True - Flange assembly identification per drawing. False - Flange assembly identification per pipeline.
Defines OS 79 Pos 2
See also
SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 270) SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 272) SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing (on page 274)
SiteWeldsNotAssignedToSpools
By default, site welds are assigned to spools if they are adjoining. True - Site welds assigned to adjoining spools. False - Site welds not assigned to adjoining spools.
Defines OS 83 Pos 1
274
Styles
SkewDimStandout
Controls the dimension line standout distance used on boxed or triangle skew dimensions. 0 - Uses the dimension line standout setting defined in StandOutComposite, except when SkewDimStyle is set to triangle - alternative, in which case the default dimension position is 4 mm. Value - Where value (real number) is an alternative dimension line standout in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. Used when SkewDimStyle is set to Triangle - Skew standout.
Defines OS 100
See also
SkewDimStyle (on page 275) StandOutComposite (on page 217)
SkewDimStyle
Controls whether skewed pipe sections are drawn with either box or triangle skew depiction on the isometric, together with the form of skew dimensioning to be used. Box - Normal standout - skew box depiction with normal dimensioning. Triangle - Normal standout - Skew triangle depiction with normal dimensioning. Triangle - Skew standout - Skewed triangle depiction with normal dimensioning, uses value set in SkewDimStandout. Triangle - Alternative - Skew triangle depiction with alternative dimensioning. Actual dimensions positioned close to sides of triangle with no witness lines.
Defines OS 99 Pos 1
See also
SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
275
Styles
SkewHatchCptGap
Controls the physical size of the un-hatched gaps (white areas) to be left local to the in-line components that fall within any skew triangle hatching. 0 - For gap local to pipeline of 2.5mm. Value - Where value (real number) is an alternative gap in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
SkewHatchCutOff
Controls the maximum length of the Hatching lines to be plotted. Blank - Default for no hatch line cut-off value. All triangles are fully hatched. Value - Where value (real number) equals hatch line cut-off length in whole mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. For example, type 25 for a 25mm cut-off value. In this case, hatch lines in excess of 25mm long are not be plotted. This gives a partial hatched effect.
See also
SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279)
276
Styles SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
SkewHatchDimText
Controls the physical size of the un-hatched gaps (white areas) to be left local to dimensions or text that fall within any Skew triangle hatching. Blank - Default for gap local to dimensions / text of 1.5mm. Value - Where value (real number) is an alternative gap in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
SkewHatching
Controls whether skew triangles are hatched or not. True - Skew hatching on. False - Skew hatching off.
See also
SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278)
277
Styles SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
SkewHatchPipeGap
Controls the physical size of the un-hatched gaps (white areas) to be left local to the pipeline within any skew triangle hatching. 0 - Default for gap local to pipeline of 2.5mm. Value - Where value (real number) is an alternative gap in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
SkewHatchSpacing
Controls the spacing of the hatching lines used in hatched triangles. Value - Where value (real number) equals an alternative hatch line spacing in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) 278 SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
Styles SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
SkewInVerticalBranch
Controls the drawing depiction method to be used when a vertical branch connection is to be made to a sloping (falling) pipeline using a special zero length bend component. This special bend (which has no length) is used to carry the angle between the vertical branch and the sloping pipeline. Two drawing methods are available. One shows a small 2D skew box section between the branch and the main pipe, while the other does not. Where olets are used in such cases, a text message indicates the orientation direction if the branch is not developed. True - Default to show the short tee branch leg section of pipe skewed. Olets have an orientation message instead of a skewed section. Both are dimensioned separately to the connecting pipe. False - For no separate skew sections, the vertical branch is connected straight into the main pipe. Olets do not have an orientation message. Both are included in a single inclusive dimension.
In both cases the angle between the vertical branch and the sloping (falling) pipeline will be indicated. Defines OS 68
See also
SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
279
Styles
SkewMinCpts
Optionally permits simple skewed branch legs to have the normal skew box/triangle enclosure suppressed and replaced by a single pipe length dimension and a text message giving the branch orientation. When used to suppress the normal box enclosure, the value set represents the maximum number of fittings permitted in the branch. Branches found to contain more fittings than this are drawn with the normal skew box/triangle enclosure. 0 - Default for all branches to be drawn with normal skew box/triangle depiction. Value - Suppress skew box/triangle depiction on branch legs whose number of components is less than or equal to the value set, and output an orientation message.
This facility is only available on straight through branches. Any change in direction along the branch automatically causes the program to default to normal skew box/triangle output. Defines OS 70
SkewMixed
A secondary option to SkewDimStyle allows the selection of a mixture of 2D skew triangles and 3D skew box depiction. True - For mixture of skew indication types - 3D Skews indicated with boxes, 2D skews indicated with triangles. False - All skew indications similar, as defined in property SkewDimStyle .
Defines OS 99 Pos 2
See also
SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
280
Styles
SkewOverall
Controls how skew pipe sections containing branch connections are depicted in terms of the skew indication on the isometric. Overall - Skews are shown with a series of separate box/triangle enclosures, one per branch. Individual - A single overall skew is shown.
Defines OS 97
See also
SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
SkewRepresentation
Controls the method to be used for the depiction of sloping (falling) sections of a pipeline that are skewed in the Horizontal plane. 3D box - Full 3D skew depiction (box or triangle style). 2D Skew + Fall - 2D skew (box or triangle) + fall indicator.
Defines OS 67
See also
SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282)
281
Styles SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
SkewAngleStyle
Controls the output of Skew angles on skewed section of pipeline. Not Shown - Skew angles are not output. With Arrowheads - Skew angle shown with arrow heads on the arc radius. Without Arrowheads - Skew angles shown without arrow heads on the arc radius.
Defines OS 99 Pos 3
See also
SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
SpecBrkEnclosure
Controls the shape of the enclosure that surrounds the indication of a specification break (specification change) on the isometric drawing. Diamond Ended - Displays a diamond-shaped enclosure around the specification break reference on the isometric drawing. Hexagonal Ended - Displays a hexagonally-shaped enclosure around the specification break reference on the isometric drawing. None - Suppresses the display of an enclosure around the specification break reference on the isometric drawing.. Round Ended - Displays a round-ended box enclosure around the specification break reference on the isometric drawing. Square Ended - Displays a square-shaped box enclosure around the specification break reference on the isometric drawing.
See also
SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)
282
Styles
SpecBrkRepresentation
Controls how specification breaks (specification changes) are indicated on the isometric. Single - Indicates a single specification. Boxed message consisting of the new specification reference pointing to the position on the pipeline where the change occurs. Dual - Indicates two specifications. Two boxed messages containing the current and new specification references are positioned at the point on the pipeline where the change occurs.
See also
SpecBrkEnclosure (on page 282)
SpoolIDAllocation
Controls allocation of spool numbers for lone fabrication components. Allocate Lone IDs - Allocate spool numbers for lone fabrication components. No Lone IDs - Do not allocate spool numbers for lone fabrication components. User Spools Only - User controlled pipe spools only--no automatically generated spools.
Defines OS 39 Pos 6
See also
SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290)
SpoolIDContinuation
Controls the spool identifier sequence. True - For the current spool identifier sequence to continue on to each new drawing. False - Causes spool identifiers to re-commence at 1 on each new drawing.
Defines OS 39 Pos 2
See also
SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283)
283
Styles SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290)
SpoolIDEnclosure
Controls the enclosure style for spool identifiers. None - No enclosure.
Square Brackets - For spool identifiers to be enclosed in the standard square brackets or a double box enclosure.
Diamond Ends - Enclosure to be a diamond-ended box.
284
Styles Round - Enclosure to be a round-ended box.
Triangular - Enclosure to be a triangle-shaped box.
Diamond Box - Enclosure to be a diamond-shaped box.
Square Box - Enclosure to be a square-ended box.
285
Styles Circle
Double Circle
Ellipse
The size that the circle, double circle and ellipse will be drawn at, is controlled by the SpoolIDSize property (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Defines OS 39 Pos 3, 8
See also
SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290)
286
Styles
SpoolIDSize
Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and ellipse enclosure styles. The default is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters, or set to Variable, which dynamically sizes the enclosure. The following example shows the default size of 2 used for an circle enclosure.
The number of characters defines the minimum size that the circle, double circle and ellipse are drawn at. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable, allows the circle, double circle and ellipse, to be smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters. Defines OS 39 Pos 9
See also
SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290)
SpoolIDEnclosureStyle
Allows the physical size of the SpoolIDEnclosure to be increased. This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that are used by the software to 'pad- out' the SpoolIDEnclosure record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The size of the text (set by TextSize property) displayed within any increased size enclosure is not be increased in size. The data string associated with each identifier consists of a combination of @, $ and ? characters. The @ character is used to signal a blank (space) requirement. The $ character is used to signal a new line requirement. The ? character is used to indicate where the actual data from the declared record should be located in the 'padded-out' record.
287
Styles Setting the value to the text string @$@@?@@$@ increases the SpoolIDEnclosure with the diamond-end enclosure as shown in the following illustration:
Use the increase in size with care as it affects the isometric representation considerably.
See also
SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290) TextSize (on page 294)
SpoolIDLength
Sets a fixed (1-9 characters) or variable length for spool ID length. Value - Specify from 1-9 to set the number of characters or set as variable. Defines OS 72 Pos 1
See also
SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290)
288
Styles
SpoolDrawingID
Controls the spool drawing identifier used on Spool isometrics. Default - The default, which is the pipeline name followed by the spool identifier (set by AText -257 to default of SPL) followed by the spool number, unless the spool has been named, in which case the spool name is used. No spool name:
Spool named:
7USER - Pipeline name followed by the user Spool name.
If the spool is not named, then the spool drawing identifier will be the same as the default. Auto Pipeline Ref - Pipeline name followed by spool number, unless the spool has been named, in which case the spool name is used No spool name:
Spool named:
289
Styles Auto Pipeline Filename - Pipeline filename followed by Spool number, unless the Spool has been named, in which case the Spool name is used. No Spool name:
Spool named:
See also
SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290)
SpoolIDType
None - Causes the output of spool identifiers to be suppressed. Numeric - For spool identifiers to be switched on using a numeric system starting at number 1 on the first drawing and incrementing consecutively throughout the pipeline. Alphabetic - As for value 0 but using an alphabetic system of A, B, C, and so on.
Defines OS 39 Pos 1
See also
SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290)
290
Styles
SpoolPrefix
Sets a spool prefix (output to DDF).
See also
SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290)
SupportIdentification
Controls the identification information that is output for pipe supports on the isometric and parts list. For identification purposes, either the support name (tag) or specification reference (item code) can be used in the combinations listed below. No Tags / Spec Ref - For no support names (tags) to be output on the isometric and with the specification reference (Item code) output in the Item code field of the material list. Unboxed Tags / Tags - For support names (tags) output on the isometric un-boxed and Support names in the Item code field of the material list. Boxed Tags / Spec Ref - For boxed support names (tags) output on the isometric and Specification reference in the Item code field of the material list. Unboxed Tags - For support names (tags) output on the isometric un-boxed and supports excluded from the material list. Boxed Tags - For boxed support names (tags) output on the isometric and supports to be excluded from the material list.
Defines OS 64 Pos 1
SupportTagEnclStyle
If SupportIdentification is set to Boxed Tags / Spec Ref or Boxed Tags, controls the enclosure shapes used for supports. Default Rectangle Round Ends Diamond Ends Triangle Diamond Rectangle Circle 291
Styles Ellipse Hexagon
Defines OS 64 Pos 3
See also
SupportIdentification (on page 291)
TapBranchInlineScale
Controls the plotted size of tapped branches on actual fitting components, such as valves, flanges, and so on. A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point. The components in a tapped branch can be scaled up or down from the size used for the main pipeline. 0 - Default for no tapped branch scaling. Tapped branches shown the same size as the main pipeline (100%). Value - Where value is a number that represents an alternative tapped branch scaling factor. For example, type 110 to increase scaling, 90 to decrease scaling.
Note: 50% is the minimum recommended value. Defines OS 120 Pos 1,2,3
TapBranchPipeScale
Controls the plotted size of tapped branches on pipe type components, such as elbows, tees, pipe, and so on. A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point. 0 - Default for tapped branch scaling at 65% of main pipeline size. Value - Where value is a number that represents an alternative tapped branch scaling factor. For example, type 80 to increase scaling, 45 to decrease scaling.
292
Styles
TapBranchSuppression
Tapped branch connections can sometimes be difficult to draw clearly on an isometric, particularly where a number of fittings are in close proximity. ISOGEN suppresses the drawing of tapped branches for particular components. This allows the alternative of using a detailed sketch to show branch connections instead. Where tapped branches have been suppressed, part numbers and weld numbers can still be output on the isometric. The suppressed components are defined by either by component type SKEY--such as VALVEVB**-- or component type as follows: ALL - Suppress the output of all tapped branches. PIPE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on pipe. FITTING - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on fittings. FLANGE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on flanges. VALVE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on valves. INSTRUMENT - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on instruments. MISC-ITEM - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on misc. components.
Double-clicking this property opens the TapBranchSuppression dialog box, into which you can type the component types you want to suppress.
TeeCrossNS
Controls the nominal size (N.S.) output at set-on type tees and crosses. Combined - Nominal size output at set-on tees and crosses shown as combined.
293
Styles Separate - Nominal size output at set-on tees and crosses shown separately.
Defines OS 41 Pos 9
TestIso
Allows test isometrics to be produced for proving isometric output, or to resolve drawing production issues. True - Generates a normal isometric. False - Generate a test isometric with all dimensions and Material list quantities output as X's.
Defines OS 21 Pos 3
TextFont
Defines the font used when outputting text on the isometric. Use the TextFont list to specify the font type. Defines OS 4 Pos 7,8,9
See also
TextWeight (on page 295) TextSize (on page 294) TextWidth (on page 296) UserTextSize (on page 295)
294
Styles
TextSize
Controls the physical size of the characters that are used for dimensions, coordinates and message text on the 'picture section' of the isometric. Small (2.1 mm) - For small characters - 2.1mm high. Medium (2.5 mm) - Default - for medium size characters - 2.4mm high. Large (2.8 mm) - For large size characters - 2.8mm high. XLarge (3.5 mm) - For extra large characters - 3.5mm high. XXLarge (4.2 mm) - For extra large characters - 4.2mm high. XXXLarge (4.9 mm) - For extra large characters - 4.9mm high. Or User - For characters with a height defined in the UserTextSize property .
Title block text, which is always output using large characters (2.8mm) and material list text, which is controlled by properties of the material list object, are not affected by this setting. Defines OS 4 Pos 1
See also
TextFont (on page 294) TextWeight (on page 295) TextWidth (on page 296) UserTextSize (on page 295)
UserTextSize
Controls the text size in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. Set the value (real number) required. Only applicable if TextSize is set to User. Defines OS 4 Pos 1,2
See also
Options (on page 77) TextFont (on page 294) TextSize (on page 294) TextWeight (on page 295) TextWidth (on page 296)
295
Styles
TextWeight
Controls the character thickness. Specify a value between 1 and 9. Used only for MicroStation. Defines OS 4 Pos 5
See also
TextSize (on page 294) TextWidth (on page 296) UserTextSize (on page 295)
TextWidth
Controls the text width (Fixed fonts only) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box. Type the value required as a real number. Defines OS 4 Pos 3,4
See also
Options (on page 77)
TracingStyle
Controls the plotting of tracing indication on the isometric in the form of a chain dotted line on one side of the pipe and optionally, alongside components. Alongside Pipe - Default to have chain dotted tracing lines plotted alongside pipe only, with a gap of 1mm. None - To suppress tracing indication. Alongside Pipe and Components - To have chain dotted tracing lines plotted alongside pipe and all components, both with a 1mm gap.
Defines OS 62
296
Styles
ReferenceNameStyle
Controls the physical size of the characters that are used for dimensions, co-ordinates and message text on the 'picture section' of the isometric. Default (Along Reference Lines)
1 Character Circular Enclosure 2 Characters 3 Characters 4 Characters 5 Characters 6 Characters 7 Characters 8 Characters 9 Characters
297
Styles
CurvedPipeAngleStyle
Controls the dimensioning of curved pipe. Suppress - Suppress curved pipe angles. With dimension - Output curved pipe angles as part of dimensions.
Defines OS 84 Pos 2
CurvedPipeRadiusStyle
Controls the dimensioning of curved pipe. Message - Output curved pipe radii as a message. Suppress - Suppress curved pipe radii.
Defines OS 84 Pos 3
298
Styles
Drawing Layers Object

The Drawing Layers object contains a collection called Layers, which is used to store the definitions of the layer names and colors assigned to layer numbers. The Count property, defined by the software, displays the number of definitions in the Layers collection. When you click the Drawing Layers object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel displays its two properties: DefaultColour (on page 299) Count (on page 299)
DefaultColour
Defines the color used for any layer which is not defined with its own color. The property requires an integer number representing the color number as defined in the output drawing system, such as MicroStation or AutoCAD.
Count
Displays the number of layers defined in the current style (and stored in the Drawing Layer Layers collection (see "Drawing Layers Layers Collection" on page 300)).
299
Styles
Drawing Layers Layers Collection

The Drawing Layers Layers collection stores the definitions of the layer names and colors assigned to layer numbers. The value that appears in parentheses after the collection name is a count of how many definitions are stored in the collection. You can define the following properties: LayerColour (on page 300) LayerNumber (on page 300) Name (on page 300)
You can modify collection properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. LayerColour Specifies the integer number representing the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD). LayerNumber Specifies the integer number that corresponds to the layer used in the Drawing Definitions collection (see "Drawing Definitions Definitions Collection" on page 196) . Name Specifies the name for the layer with this LayerNumber (on page 300).
300
Styles
Drawing Welds Object

The Drawing Welds object control which welds are shown on the isometric, how they are numbered, and what enclosures are used. When you click the Drawing Welds object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. ShowWelds (on page 303) ShowWeldNumbers (on page 303) ImpliedWelds (on page 303) GeneralPrefix (on page 303) GeneralWeldStartNo (on page 303) WeldNumbers (on page 303) showFabWeldNos (on page 304) ShowFabWeldPrefix (on page 304) FabPrefix (on page 305) FabWeldStartNo (on page 305) MessageArrowHeads (on page 305) FabWeldEnclosure (on page 305)
301
Styles FabWeldEnclSize (on page 308) ShowErectWeldNos (on page 308) ShowErectWeldPrefix (on page 308) OffshorePrefix (on page 312) OffshoreWeldStartNo (on page 312) OffshoreWeldEnclosure (on page 312) OffshoreWeldEnclSize (on page 314) ShowFabSupportWeldNos (on page 314) ShowFabSupportWeldPrefix (on page 314) FabSupportPrefix (on page 315) FabSupportWeldStartNo (on page 315) FabSupportWeldEnclosure (on page 315) FabSuppWeldEnclSize (on page 317) ShowErectSupportWeldNos (on page 317) ShowErectSupportWeldPrefix (on page 318) ErectSupportPrefix (on page 318) ErectSupportWeldStartNo (on page 318) ErectSupportWeldEnclosure (on page 318) ErecSuppWeldEnclSize (on page 320) ShowOffshoreSupportWeldNos (on page 321) ShowOffshoreSupportWeldPrefix (on page 321) OffshoreSupportPrefix (on page 321) OffshoreSupportWeldStartNo (on page 322) OffshoreSuppWeldEnclSize (on page 324) SpoolMatchesPipe (on page 324) SupportWeldNumbers (on page 325) SupportWeldSeq (on page 325) SupportWeldTypeNos (on page 325) TypeSequenceNumbers (on page 326) WeldNumberSequence (on page 326) WeldNumberSize (on page 326) WeldNumberLength (on page 327) WeldNumberType (on page 327) WeldTypeIdentifiers (on page 328)
302
Styles
ShowWelds
Controls whether welds are shown on the plotted isometric. True - Welds are shown. False - Welds are not shown.
The WeldTypes property allows a separate control on the different categories of weld that can be output. For more information, see Weld Logic (on page 572). Defines OS 53, Pos 1 OS 54, Pos 1
ShowWeldNumbers
Controls whether welds are numbered and shown on the isometric. True - Show weld numbers on the plotted isometric. False - Suppress weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
This is a general control. There is also a separate control for all other supported weld types. For more information, see Weld Logic (on page 572). Defines OS 53 Pos 1
ImpliedWelds
Controls the creation of implied welds, such as those welds that are not explicitly defined in the PCF or IDF. True - Generates implied welds. False - Suppresses implied welds.
GeneralPrefix
General weld prefix used when none of the separate weld prefixes are set.
GeneralWeldStartNo
Sets a general start weld number in the WDF.
303
Styles
WeldNumbers
Controls the generation of weld numbers for any welds that do not have weld numbers defined in the PCF or IDF. This property interacts with WeldNumberSequence and SpoolMatchesPipe. If WeldNumbers is set to Suppress, then this property takes precedence over the other two when setting the value. True - Generates weld numbers. False - Suppresses weld numbers.
See also
WeldNumberSequence (on page 326) SpoolMatchesPipe (on page 324)
ShowFabWeldNos
True - Show fabrication weld numbers on the plotted isometric. False - Suppress fabrication weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines OS 75 Pos 1
ShowFabWeldPrefix
True - Show fabrication weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppress fabrication weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
Defines OS 75 Pos 2
304
Styles
FabPrefix
Sets the prefix used for fabrication type welds. In the following illustration, the prefix is set to F.
FabWeldStartNo
Sets a start weld number for fabrication welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
MessageArrowHeads
Controls whether messages to welds (including weld numbers and attributes) should have arrowheads attached to message leader lines. On - Show arrowheads on message leader lines.
Off - Suppress arrowheads on message leader lines.
305
Styles
FabWeldEnclosure
Controls the enclosure style for fabrication welds. Default Circle - Fixed-sized circle.
Diamond End - Diamond-ended box.
Round End - Round-ended box.
Small Triangle - Small triangular-shaped enclosure.
Small Diamond - Small diamond-shaped enclosure.
Square - Square-ended box.
306
Styles Dynamic Circle - Dynamically-sized double circle.
Double Circle - Dynamically-sized double circle.
Ellipse - Elliptical enclosure.
None - No weld number enclosure.
All the previous illustrations use weld prefixes except for Default Circle, where weld prefixes cannot be used, as this is limited to numeric values (3 characters maximum). The size that the Circle, Double Circle and Ellipse are drawn at is controlled by the FabWeldEnclSize property (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. When the weld number enclosure style is not the original circular type, then the weld number character size is controlled by the TextSize property and not the WeldNumberSize property.
See also
FabWeldEnclSize (on page 308) WeldNumberSize (on page 326) TextSize (on page 294)
307
Styles
FabWeldEnclSize
Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and ellipse enclosure style. The default is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters, or set to Variable, which dynamically sizes the enclosure.
The number of characters defines the minimum size at which the circle, double circle and ellipse enclosures are drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again all will dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters. Defines OS 54 Pos 2
ShowErectWeldNos
True -Show erection weld numbers on the plotted isometric. False - Suppress erection weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines OS 75 Pos 3
ShowErectWeldPrefix
True - Adds weld prefix to weld number.
False - No weld prefix added to weld number.
Defines OS 75 Pos 4
308
Styles
ErectPrefix
Sets the prefix used for erection type welds. In the following illustration, the prefix is set to E.
ErectWeldStartNo
Sets a start weld number for erection welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
ErectWeldEnclosure
Controls the enclosure style for erection welds. All of the following illustration use weld prefixes, except for the default circle where weld prefixes cannot be used, as this is limited to numeric values, 3 characters maximum. Default Circle - Fixed-sized circle.
309
Styles Small Diamond - Small diamond-shaped enclosure.
Dynamic Circle - Dynamically-sized circle.
The size that the circle, double circle and ellipse are drawn at is controlled by the ErecWeldEnclSize property (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit.
310
Styles When the weld number enclosure style is not the original circular type then the weld number character size is controlled by the TextSize property and not WeldNumberSize property. Defines OS 75 Pos 3, 8
See also
ErecWeldEnclSize (on page 311) TextSize (on page 294) WeldNumberSize (on page 326)
ErecWeldEnclSize
The number of characters defines the minimum size at which the circle, double, circle, and ellipse are drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also allowing the enclosure to dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters. Defines OS 54 Pos 3
ShowOffshoreWeldNos
True - Shows offshore weld numbers on the plotted isometric. False - Suppresses offshore weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines OS 75 Pos 5
311
Styles
ShowOffshoreWeldPrefix
True - Shows offshore weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppresses offshore support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
OffshorePrefix
Sets the prefix used for offshore type welds. In the following illustration, the prefix is set to O.
OffshoreWeldStartNo
Sets a start weld number for offshore welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
OffshoreWeldEnclosure
Controls the enclosure style for offshore welds. Default Circle - Fixed-sized circle.
312
Styles Small Triangle - Small triangular-shaped enclosure.
Dynamic Circle - Dynamically-sized double circle.
313
Styles
OffshoreWeldEnclSize
ShowFabSupportWeldNos
True - Shows fabrication support weld numbers on the plotted isometric. False - Suppresses fabrication support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines OS 78 Pos 1
ShowFabSupportWeldPrefix
True - Supports weld prefix to be added to weld number.
False - No weld prefix to be added.
Defines OS 78 Pos 2
314
Styles
FabSupportPrefix
Sets the prefix used for fabrication support welds. In the following illustration, the prefix is set to FS.
FabSupportWeldStartNo
Sets a start weld number for fabrication support welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
FabSupportWeldEnclosure
Controls the enclosure style for fabrication support welds. Default Circle - Fixed-sized circle.
315
Styles Small Diamond - Small diamond-shaped enclosure.
Double Circle - Dynamically-sized double circle. Ellipse - Elliptical enclosure.
All the previous illustrations use weld prefixes except for Default Circle, where weld prefixes cannot be used, as this is limited to numeric values (3 characters maximum). The size that the Circle, Double Circle and Ellipse are drawn at is controlled by the FabSuppWeldEnclSize property (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit.
316
Styles When the weld number enclosure style is not the original circular type, then the weld number character size is controlled by the TextSize property and not the WeldNumberSize property.
See also
WeldNumberSize (on page 326) TextSize (on page 294)
FabSuppWeldEnclSize
The number of characters defines the minimum size that at which the circle, double, circle, and ellipse are drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also allowing the enclosure to dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters. Defines OS 54 Pos 5
ShowErectSupportWeldNos
True - Shows erection support weld numbers on the plotted isometric. False - Suppresses erection support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines OS 78 Pos 3
317
Styles
ShowErectSupportWeldPrefix
True - Support weld prefix to be added to Weld number.
False - No Weld prefix to be added.
Defines OS 78 Pos 4
ErectSupportPrefix
Sets the prefix used for erection support welds. In the following illustration, the prefix is set to ES.
ErectSupportWeldStartNo
Sets a start weld number for erection support welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
ErectSupportWeldEnclosure
Controls the enclosure style for erection support welds. Default Circle - Fixed-sized circle.
318
Styles Round End - Round-ended box.
319
Styles Ellipse - Elliptical enclosure.
All the previous illustrations use weld prefixes except for Default Circle, where weld prefixes cannot be used, as this is limited to numeric values (3 characters maximum). The size that the Circle, Double Circle and Ellipse are drawn at is controlled by the ErectSuppWeldEnclSize property (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. When the weld number enclosure style is not the original circular type, then the weld number character size is controlled by the TextSize property and not the WeldNumberSize property.
See also
WeldNumberSize (on page 326) TextSize (on page 294)
320
Styles
ErecSuppWeldEnclSize
The number of characters defines the minimum size that the circle, double circle, and ellipse are drawn at. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also allowing the enclosure to dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters. Defines OS 54 Pos 6
ShowOffshoreSupportWeldNos
True - Shows offshore support weld numbers on the plotted isometric. False - Suppresses offshore support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines OS 78 Pos 5
ShowOffshoreSupportWeldPrefix
True - Shows offshore support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppresses offshore support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
Defines OS 78 Pos 6
321
Styles
OffshoreSupportPrefix
Sets the prefix used for offshore support welds. In the following illustration, the prefix is set to OS.
OffshoreSupportWeldStartNo
Sets a start weld number for offshore support welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
OffshoreSupportWeldEnclosure
Controls the enclosure style for offshore support welds. Default Circle - Fixed-sized circle.
322
Styles Diamond End - Diamond-ended box.
323
Styles Double Circle - Dynamically-sized double circle. Ellipse - Elliptical enclosure.
OffshoreSuppWeldEnclSize
324
Styles
SpoolMatchesPipe
Controls whether the weld numbers on the spool isometric match those on the full isometric. True - Spool isometric weld numbers to match full isometric weld numbers. False - Spool isometric Weld numbers done separately.
For spool weld numbers to match the full isometric numbers, the properties that affect the number of welds and the sequence used must be the same for both spool and full styles. Defines OS 53 Pos 3
See also
WeldNumbers (on page 303)
SupportWeldNumbers
Controls whether support welds are numbered separately from standard welds. True - Support welds are numbered separately. False - Support welds use the same sequence as Standard welds.
If set to True, then the SupportWeldTypeNos property is used to decide whether each category of weld has its own sequence or not. Defines OS 53 Pos 6
See also
SupportWeldTypeNos (on page 325)
SupportWeldSeq
Controls whether the support weld numbers continue across drawings, or start again on each new drawing. Per Drawing - Support weld numbering sequence starts again on each drawing. Continuous - Support weld numbering sequence starts again on each drawing. The numbers used depend on the settings of the SupportWeldTypeNos property . Defines OS 53 Pos 7
See also
SupportWeldTypeNos (on page 325)
325
Styles
SupportWeldTypeNos
Controls whether support weld numbers are separate for each support weld category or not. True - For each support weld category to have its own sequence of numbers. False - For all support welds to use the same sequence for numbers.
Defines OS 53 Pos 6
TypeSequenceNumbers
Controls whether there is an individual sequence for weld numbers based on their category (Fabrication, Erection or Offshore) or just one sequence for all welds. True - Each type of Weld has its own sequence numbers. False - Single sequence for all Welds.
If set to True, then the SupportWeldNumbers and SupportWeldTypeNos properties allow additional control for support weld numbering. Defines OS 53 Pos 5
See also
SupportWeldNumbers (on page 325) SupportWeldTypeNos (on page 325)
WeldNumberSequence
Continuous - For weld number current sequence to continue on each new drawing. Per drawing - For weld number sequence to restart on each new drawing.
Defines OS 53 Pos 3
See also
WeldNumbers (on page 303)
326
Styles
WeldNumberSize
Controls the size of characters used for weld numbers. Small - For small Weld numbers. Medium - For medium-sized Weld numbers. Large - For large Weld numbers.
These size values are only valid for the original circular style enclosure. If one of the alternative enclosure styles is being used, then the TextSize property is used. Defines OS 53 Pos 1
See also
WeldNumberLength
Controls the number of characters output for a weld number. For numeric weld numbers, leading zeros are output; for alphabetic weld numbers, spaces are output Variable - Outputs the weld number without leading zeros or spaces. 1 to 9 - Sets the number of characters to be output. For example, 3 outputs 001 through to 999 for numeric weld numbers.
Defines OS 53 Pos 9
WeldNumberType
Controls whether weld numbers are numeric or alphabetic. Numeric - Numeric weld identifiers. Alphabetic - Alphabetic weld identifiers. Generates A to Z, and then starts AA, AB, AC, and so on.
Defines OS 53 Pos 8
327
Styles
WeldTypes
Controls whether all welds are numbered/plotted or allows single weld category (Fabrication, Erection or Offshore) to be numbered/plotted. All - All welds are numbered. Fabrication Only - Only fabrication welds are numbered/plotted. Erection Only - Only erection welds are numbered/plotted. Offshore Only - Only offshore welds are numbered/plotted.
Currently, if Offshore Only is set, then erection welds are plotted but not numbered. This is a general control, but there is also a separate control for all six weld types. If the separate weld types are set not to be plotted, then this control still causes a weld number to be generated for those welds so that they can be used on weld reports. Defines OS 53 Pos 1, 4 OS 54 Pos 1
WeldTypeIdentifiers
This property holds the text to be output to the weld definition file (WDF) for weld type identifiers. When you double-click the WeldTypeIdentifiers box, the software opens the WeldTypeIdentifiers text editor, which you can use to input the required data as follows: 1. Piping Specification 2. Minimum Nominal size 3. Maximum Nominal size 4. Weld Type (replacement for BW welds) 5. Wall Thickness / Schedule (optional) The WELD-TYPE-IDENTIFIER heading is output by SmartPlant I-Configure, and only the data records are required in the text file.
CS-150 CS-150 CS-150 0.5 2 8 1.5 6 12 B2 B3 B8 80 40 30
The nominal size units are assumed to be those specified by the Drawing Controls Units property (OS41). This is only used when the weld type is output on the weld operation list or welds report, and replaces the BW weld type identifier. If using the Wall Thickness / Schedule column, and the BW type is not being changed, then BW must be entered on the line.
See also
Units (on page 191)
328
Styles
Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures Object

The Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures object has a collection called WeldEnclosures, which is used to store the definitions of special enclosures. There are several different formats for the enclosure, which are controlled by the settings of the EnclosureType property. The Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures object also has a Count property. The property is defined by the software and indicates the number of definitions in the WeldEnclosures collection .
The special weld enclosure supersedes weld enclosure styles set as a property of the Drawing Welds object for each category of weld or all welds, depending on the category setting on the WeldEnclosure collection.
See also
Drawing Welds Object (on page 301) EnclosureType (on page 331) Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures Collection (on page 329) Count Displays the number of WeldEnclosures currently defined in the style.
329
Styles Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures Collection The Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures collection is used to define special types of enclosure used for welds, to display attributes set on the weld in the PCF/IDF. You can define the following properties: AttributeName (on page 330) Category (on page 331) EnclosureType (on page 331) ForceAllWeldsAsSpecial (on page 332) NonSpecialPosition (on page 332) SpecialPosition (on page 333) Width (on page 333)
See also
330
Styles
AttributeName
Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute.
Category
Specifies the category. Use the Category list to select the appropriate one: Fabrication, Erection, Offshore or All.
EnclosureType
Controls the type of enclosure to be used. Pointed
Round
Triangle
Diamond
Square
Circle
Unboxed
SpecialPointed
331
Styles SpecialRound
SpecialSquare
ForceAllWeldsAsSpecial
Only applies to objects with the EnclosureType property set to SpecialPointed, SpecialRound, or SpecialSquare and the AttributeName property that maps to WELD-NO. True - Forces all welds to adopt the special layout for their enclosure.
False - Allows the generation of a enclosure containing only the weld number, when the data for all the other fields in an enclosure are missing.
See also
AttributeName (on page 341) EnclosureType (on page 331)
332
Styles
NonSpecialPosition
Defines the position for the specified weld attribute to be output along the horizontal display. Type the position number. Applies only to the following enclosure types, all of which allow multiple attributes displayed horizontally:
Pointed Round Square
SpecialPosition
Controls selection of the compartment or quadrant (position) for the weld number when weld attributes are to be output in a special enclosure. Double-click SpecialPosition and then select the position from the list:
In the following example, the weld number is output TopRight, where 1 denotes the weld number and there are three weld attributes (T2, R2 and F8).
You can divide special enclosures into two compartments (top and bottom) or four compartments (quadrants). The maximum number of compartments is four. Only applies to SpecialPointed, SpecialRound, or SpecialSquare enclosure types. The previous example is SpecialRound.
Width
Specifies the number of characters.
333
Styles
DrawingFrame
DrawingFrame Object
The properties of the DrawingFrame object and its sub-ordinates control the drawing frame and the data which is output on to the drawing frame. The existing Supplementary TableAttributes object contains the same information as the DrawingFrame TableAttributes object. You can use either object to modify the properties, although the DrawingFrame.TableAttributes object supports real numbers in the XPos and YPos properties.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. BottomMargin (on page 335) TopMargin (on page 335) LeftMargin (on page 335) RightMargin (on page 336) CustomHeight (on page 336) CustomWidth (on page 336) DXFUnits (on page 336)
334
Styles ReservedAreaDrawing (on page 337) ReservedAreaDrawingTop (on page 337) ReservedAreaMatList (on page 337) TemplateFile (on page 338) TemplateFormat (on page 338) Visible (on page 338)
BottomMargin
Defines the bottom margin. 0 - Default for no reserved area. Value - Specifies the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of the drawing frame that is being used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box.
Defines OS 13
See also
TopMargin
Defines the top margin. 0 - Default for no reserved area. Value - Specifies the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of the drawing frame that is being used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box.
Defines OS 12
See also
LeftMargin
Defines the left margin. 0 - Default for no reserved area. Value - Specifies the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of the drawing frame that is being used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box.
Defines OS 10
335
Styles
See also
RightMargin
Defines the right margin. 0 - Default for no reserved area. Value - Specifies the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of the drawing frame that is being used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box.
Defines OS 11
See also
CustomHeight
Defines isometric drawing height for non-standard paper sizes. That is, sizes that do not conform to either the metric-based European A series or the imperial-based American ANSI sizes. 0 - For non-standard drawing height. Value - Where value is the overall drawing height in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box
Defines OS 15
See also
CustomWidth
Defines isometric drawing width for non-standard paper sizes. That is, sizes that do not conform to either the metric-based European A series or the imperial-based American ANSI sizes. 0 - For non-standard drawing width. Value - Where value is the overall drawing width in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box
Defines OS 16
See also
336
Styles
DXFUnits
mm - Specifies metric units. Inch - Specifies imperial units.
Defines OS 92
ReservedAreaDrawing
Defines the reserved area along the bottom of the isometric. 0 - For no reserved area. Value - Where the value (real number) is equal to the depth of the required reserved area along the bottom of the isometric, measured from the outer line of the drawing frame. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box.
Defines OS 35 Pos 1, 2, 3
See also
ReservedAreaDrawingTop
Defines the reserved area along the top of the isometric. 0 - For no reserved area. Value - Where the value (real number) is equal to the depth of the required reserved area along the bottom of the isometric, measured from the outer line of the drawing frame. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box.
Defines OS 35 Pos 7, 8 and 9
See also
337
Styles
ReservedAreaMatList
Defines the reserved area along the bottom of the material list. Blank - For no reserved area. Value - Where value (real number) is equal to the depth of the required Reserved area along the bottom of the material list measured from the outer line of the Drawing frame. Type a value in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box.
See also
TemplateFile
Specifies the file used for the backing sheet. 1. Double-click in the TemplateFile box. 2. In the Browse for file dialog box, navigate to the required file and then click OK.
TemplateFormat
Select the drawing format for the backing sheet.
Visible
Controls plotting of the standard ISOGEN drawing frame. It is likely that if you either plot your own design of backing frame or plot to frames on pre-printed forms, you will want to suppress the plotting of the standard ISOGEN drawing frame. True - Plots the standard ISOGEN drawing frame. False - Does not plot the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.
Defines OS 18
338
Styles
DrawingFrame Attributes Object

The DrawingFrame Attributes object contains a collection called DFAttributes, which is used to store the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. The DrawingFrame Attributes object also has a Count property. The property is defined by the software and indicates the number of definitions in the DFAttributes collection.
See also
Count (on page 339) DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection (on page 339)
Count
Displays the number of attributes to be plotted in the drawing frame.
339
Styles
DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection

The DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes collection stores the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. The value that displays in parentheses after the collection name is a count of how many definitions are stored in the collection. You can define the following properties: AttributeName (on page 341) CharHeight (on page 341) Xpos (on page 341) Ypos (on page 342) Font (on page 342) BarCode (on page 342) CharWidth (on page 342) Justification (on page 342) Layer (on page 342) Color (on page 342) RotationAngle (on page 342) TextWeight (on page 342) TruncationLength (on page 342) ColumnsNumber (on page 342) Direction (on page 343) LinesNumber (on page 343) Xspacing (on page 343)
340
Styles Yspacing (on page 343)
See also
Add to Collection (on page 23) Count (on page 339) Remove from Collection (on page 23) AttributeName Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute. CharHeight Sets the character height for the text. Type the required size in mm or Inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) Xpos Defines the X position for the text in mm or inches (set as real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
341
Styles
See also
Options (on page 77) Ypos Defines the Y position for the text in mm or inches (set as real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) Font Defines the font to be used. Use the Font list to select an appropriate font. BarCode Several barcode standards exist worldwide to suit different industries, but Alias has standardized on just three. Type 1, 2 or 3 for the appropriate barcode: 1 - Barcode 39 2 - Barcode 25 3 - Barcode 25 Interleaved
CharWidth Sets the character height for the text. Type the required size in mm or Inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) Justification Defines the justification for the text. Specify either Left or Right. Layer Specify the integer number that identifies the required layer to which the definition is applied. Colour Type the integer number that represent the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD). RotationAngle Defines the angle of rotation in degrees clockwise. TextWeight Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used for MicroStation only TruncationLength Defines the number of output characters. ColumnsNumber Specifies the number of columns in the table. 342 SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
Styles Direction Specifies the table direction. LinesNumber Specifies the number of lines in the table. XSpacing Specifies the table offset dimension in X (horizontal) direction. Type a value in mm or inches (set as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch. The value can be a negative number.
See also
Options (on page 77) YSpacing Specifies the table offset dimension in Y (vertical) direction. Type a value in mm or inches (set as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch. The value can be a negative number.
See also
343
Styles
DrawingFrame TableAttributes Object

The DrawingFrame TableAttributes object contains a collection called DFTableAtributes, which is used to store the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. The DrawingFrame TableAttributes object also contains a Count property, defined by the software, which indicates the number of definitions in the DFTableAttributes collection. The existing Supplementary TableAttributes object contains the same information as the DrawingFrame TableAttributes object. You can use either object the properties, although the DrawingFrame TableAttributes object supports real numbers in the XPos and YPos properties.
See also
DrawingFrame TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection (on page 345) Supplementary TableAttributes Object (on page 546)
Count
Displays the number of TableAttributes to be plotted in the drawing frame.
344
Styles
DrawingFrame TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection

The DrawingFrame TableAttributes DFTableAttributes collection stores the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. You can define the following properties: AttributeName (on page 346) CharHeight (on page 346) Xpos (on page 347) Font (on page 347) Ypos (on page 347) BarCode (on page 347) CharWidth (on page 347) Justification (on page 347) Layer (on page 347) Color (on page 347) RotationAngle (on page 348) TextWeight (on page 348) TruncationLength (on page 348) ColumnsNumber (on page 348) Direction (on page 348) LinesNumber (on page 348) XSpacing (on page 348)
345
Styles YSpacing (on page 348)
See also
Add to Collection (on page 23) Remove from Collection (on page 23) AttributeName Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute.
346
Styles CharHeight Sets the character height for the text. Type the required size in mm or Inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
See also
Options (on page 77) Font Defines the font to be used. Use the Font list to select an appropriate font. Ypos Defines the Y position for the text in mm or inches (set as real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) BarCode Several barcode standards exist worldwide to suit different industries, but Alias has standardized on just three. Type 1, 2 or 3 for the appropriate barcode: 1 - Barcode 39 2 - Barcode 25 3 - Barcode 25 Interleaved
See also
Options (on page 77) Justification Defines the justification for the text. Specify either Left or Right. Layer Specify the integer number that identifies the required layer to which the definition is applied. Color Type the integer number that represent the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).
347
Styles
RotationAngle Defines the angle of rotation in degrees clockwise. TextWeight Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used for MicroStation only TruncationLength Defines the number of output characters. ColumnsNumber Specifies the number of columns in the table. Direction Specifies the table direction. LinesNumber Specifies the number of lines in the table. XSpacing Specifies the table offset dimension in X (horizontal) direction. Type a value in mm or inches (set as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch. The value can be a negative number.
See also
See also
348
Styles
DrawingFrame SymbolTable Object

The SymbolTable object stores the properties for symbol shape frame positioning. This facility allows symbol shapes, which could only be displayed on the standard drawing frame, to be positioned on to a user-defined backing sheet. You set the properties to control the symbol shape/text that appears on the isometric. The following four options are available: Single Vertical
Multiple Vertical
Single Horizontal
Multiple Horizontal
349
Styles Set options appropriately to output symbol table as required.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Visible (on page 351) DrawingLayer (on page 351) HorizontalSpacing (on page 351) Layout (on page 351) MaxColumns (on page 351) MaxRows (on page 351) StartX (on page 351) StartY (on page 352) PipeLength (on page 352) SymbolScale (on page 352) SymbolSelect (on page 352) SymbolList (on page 352) TextOffsetX (on page 353) TextOffsetY (on page 353)
350
Styles TextFont (on page 353) TextHeight (on page 353) TextWeight (on page 353) TextWidthFactor (on page 353) VerticalSpacing (on page 354)
Visible
Controls whether symbol shape frame positioning is being used or not. If set to True, then the definitions in the Symbol table are written to the Data definition file, which switches on the facility.
DrawingLayer
Sets the drawing layer for symbol shape frame positioning. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.
HorizontalSpacing
Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the symbol shape output when the table is horizontally formatted or two dimensional. Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number) depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
Layout
Controls whether the table is horizontal, vertical, or multiple style. SingleVertical - Defines a single vertical table. SingleHorizonta - Defines a single horizontal table. MultipleVertical - Defines a multiple vertical table. MultipleHorizontal - Defines a multiple horizontal table.
MaxColumns
Defines the maximum number of columns before a new row is started when using multiple tables or the maximum number of entries for a single horizontal table.
MaxRows
Defines the maximum number of rows before a new column is started when using multiple tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is vertical.
351
Styles
StartX
Defines the bottom left-hand X position of the first symbol shape in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
StartY
Defines the bottom left-hand Y position of the first symbol shape in mm, or inches (as a real number) , depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
PipeLength
Single value for the length of pipe (including symbols), with a maximum value of 15mm or 0.5 inches. A negative value (-1) suppresses the output of pipe. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
SymbolScale
Single value for the percentage symbol scale factor. Used to control the scaling of symbol shapes.
SymbolSelect
Controls whether all the symbols defined are output, or only those which are used on the drawing. Fixed - All the symbols defined are output. Dynamic - Only those symbols which are used on the drawing are output.
352
Styles
SymbolList
Double-clicking the SymbolList field opens a text editor, which you can use to type the symbols and associated text to be output. Each line must contain the symbol name and associated text separated by a space, as shown in the following examples: O1HG Pipe Support WS Site Weld WW Workshop Weld TRACING Tracing LAGGING Lagging
TextOffsetX
Single value for the horizontal movement from the symbol origin to the text origin. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
TextOffsetY
Single value for the vertical movement from the symbol origin to the text origin. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
TextFont
Defines the font to be used. Use the TextFont list to specify the font type.
TextHeight
Specifies the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
TextWeight
Controls the character thickness. Specify a value between 1 and 9. Used only for MicroStation.
TextWidthFactor
Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height to be used for output of the cut list. SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide 353
Styles
VerticalSpacing
Sets the vertical spacing required between each row of the symbol shape output when the table is vertically formatted or two dimensional. Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
354
Styles
MaterialList
Material List Object
The MaterialList object contains information defining all three styles of plotted material list and also the text output to the material control file (each one defined in a specific sub-object). The MaterialList object itself defines which of the available styles is to be used and properties that apply to all material list styles. When you click the MaterialList object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify any of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. ActiveList (on page 356) BoltAccumulation (on page 356) ErectAccumulation (on page 357) FabAccumulation (on page 357) GasketAccumulation (on page 357) OffshoreAccumulation (on page 357) 355
Styles WeldAccumulation (on page 358) BoltDiameterUnits (on page 358) BoltLengthUnits (on page 358) Drg1of1OnSingleIsos (on page 359) ItemCodeLength (on page 359) LinearQuantityStyle (on page 359) MaterialListOverflow (on page 360) MaterialListSplitting (on page 360) OverflowDrawingID (on page 360) SmallXLargeNS (on page 361) SpoolsMatchFull (on page 361) TextFont (on page 361) Visible (on page 361) WastageArea1 (on page 362) WastageArea2 (on page 362) WastageArea3 (on page 363) WastageArea4 (on page 363) WastageArea5 (on page 364) WastageArea6 (on page 364) WastageArea7 (on page 364) WastageArea8 (on page 365) WastageArea9 (on page 365) WeightsStyle (on page 366) SupportsWithMatchingNamesAccumulation (on page 366) MaterialsBySpool (on page 366) SheetNumberFormat (on page 367)
ActiveList
Defines which of the three available material list styles is being used. The default is Fixed. Fixed (see "MaterialList FixedLayout Object" on page 367) UserDefined (see "MaterialList UserDefined Object" on page 372) Variable (see "MaterialList Variable Layout Object" on page 395)
Defines OS 23 Pos 3
356
Styles
BoltAccumulation
Controls the type of bolt accumulation. None - For non-accumulation of bolts. Normal - Accumulates bolts normally. Suppress - Suppresses all bolts.
Defines OS 74 Pos 5
ErectAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of erection material. All Except Pipe - For non-accumulation of all erection materials (excluding pipe). None - For non-accumulation of erection materials (including pipe). Normal - Erection materials accumulate normally. This is the default. Pipe Only - For non-accumulation of all erection materials (pipe only) Suppress - Suppresses all erection materials.
Defines OS 74 Pos 2
FabAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of fabrication materials. All Except Pipe - For non-accumulation of all fabrication materials (excluding pipe). None - For non-accumulation of fabrication materials (including pipe). Normal - Fabrication materials accumulate normally. This is the default. Pipe Only - For non-accumulation of all fabrication materials (pipe only) Suppress - Suppresses all fabrication materials.
Defines OS 74 Pos 1
GasketAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of gaskets. Normal - Gaskets accumulated normally. None - For non-accumulation of gaskets. Suppress - Suppresses all gaskets.
Defines OS 74 Pos 4
357
Styles
OffshoreAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of offshore material. All Except Pipe - For non-accumulation of all offshore materials (excluding pipe). None - For non-accumulation of offshore materials (including pipe). Normal - Offshore materials accumulate normally. This is the default. Pipe Only - For non-accumulation of all offshore materials (pipe only) Suppress - Suppresses all offshore materials.
Defines OS 74 Pos 3
WeldAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of welds. Normal - Welds accumulated normally. None - For non-accumulation of welds. Suppress - Suppresses all welds.
Defines OS 74 Pos 6
BoltDiameterUnits
Controls the units used for bolt diameters. As Drawing - As the Units property on the Drawing Controls object Inch - For Inch diameters. mm - For mm diameters.
Defines OS 65 Pos 2
See also
Drawing Controls Object (on page 178) Units (on page 191)
358
Styles
BoltLengthUnits
Controls the units used for bolt lengths. As Drawing - As the Units property on the Drawing Controls object Inch - For Inch diameters. mm - For mm diameters.
Defines OS 65 Pos 1
See also
Drawing Controls Object (on page 178) Units (on page 191)
Drg1of1OnSingleIsos
Allows a single drawing to be identified as Drg 1 of 1. True - The words Drg 1 of 1 are written on isometrics consisting of one drawing. False - The words Drg 1 of 1 are not written on isometrics consisting of one drawing
Defines OS 30
ItemCodeLength
Controls the number of characters used for the item code output on the material list. Changes in this property cause the material list to be correspondingly wider or narrower. 0 - Default for 8 characters in the item code. Value - Where value is an alternative number of characters, such as 12.
The maximum number of permissible Item code characters is 29 for a FixedLayout (see "MaterialList FixedLayout Object" on page 367) material list. Defines OS 28
359
Styles
LinearQuantityStyle
Controls the output style for linear quantities. n. n M n. n ft - For pipe length to be output in the form n.n M or n.n Feet, as in 10.4 M or 10.4'. n mm n ft n in - For pipe length to be output in the form n MM or n Feet n Inches, as in 1040 MM or 10'5". n. nnn M n. nnn ft - For pipe length to be output in the form n.nnn M or n.nnn Feet, as 1.045 M or 10.375'.
Defines OS 24 Pos 2
MaterialListOverflow
Controls material list overflow. Same sheet - To give automatic overflow onto secondary material list plotted alongside the first. This creates a wider non-standard drawing size. Continuation sheet - Gives a second "dummy" isometric containing the overflow material list but no pipeline graphics. This isometric is allocated the next drawing (sheet) identifier in the sequence.
Defines OS 30
MaterialListSplitting
Controls whether the material list is produced on a per drawing or a per pipeline basis. This difference only comes into effect when a pipeline is split on to two or more drawings. Per drawing - For material list per isometric drawing. Per pipeline - For material list per isometric drawing.
Defines OS 24 Pos 1
360
Styles
OverflowDrawingID
Controls how an overflow drawing is numbered, if the MaterialListOverflow property is set to continuation sheet. Next ID - The isometric is allocated the next drawing (sheet) identifier in the sequence. Alpha Suffix - The isometric is allocated the same drawing (sheet) identifier as the previous "master isometric", but supplemented with an A suffix letter. Any further overflow drawings for the same "master isometric" are suffixed B, C, and so on.
Defines OS 30 Pos 1
See also
MaterialListOverflow (on page 360)
SmallxLargeNS
Free format text field that allows you to enter a table of record ids and SKEYs, which are output with the nominal size in small x large order. The following example illustrates the required format (Record identifier SKEY (optional)):
50 AR 80 100 RAFL
SpoolsMatchFull
Controls whether part numbers on a spool isometric match those on the full isometric. True - Spool isometric material part numbers to match full isometric part numbers. False - Spool isometric material part numbers to be independent from full isometric part numbers.
Defines OS 24 Pos 1
TextFont
Defines what font is used in the material list on the isometric. Use the TextFont list to specify the font type. Defines OS 27 Pos 7, 8, 9
361
Styles
Visible
Controls whether the material list is plotted or not. True - Plots the material list. False - Does not plot the material list.
Defines OS 23 Pos 1
WastageArea1
Controls any additional pipe quantity that needs to be added to the material list to allow for wastage during fabrication. The property is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe wastage allowances. Each of the nine properties is applicable to a particular Plant area, which can be identified in the input Pipeline data file. 0 - For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. This setting allows you to obtain no increase in pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the input Pipeline data file. 1 - Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. This value does not increase the basic wastage percentage that can be set in application records in the input Pipeline data file. Value - Where value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the basic wastage factor (input on appropriate records in the pipeline data input file) to arrive at a final wastage factor percentage. For example, a value of 2 in this property gives a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the input Pipeline data file.
Defines OS 43
WastageArea2
Controls any additional pipe quantity that needs to be added to the material list to allow for wastage during fabrication. The property is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe wastage allowances. Each of the nine properties is applicable to a particular Plant area, which can be identified in the input Pipeline data file. 0 - For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. This setting allows you to obtain no increase in pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the input Pipeline data file. 1 - Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. This value does not increase the basic wastage percentage that can be set in application records in the input Pipeline data file. Value - Where value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the basic wastage factor (input on appropriate records in the pipeline data input file) to arrive at a final wastage factor percentage. For example, a value of 2 in this property gives a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the input Pipeline data file. SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
362
Styles Defines OS 44
WastageArea3
Defines OS 45
WastageArea4
Defines OS 46
363
Styles
WastageArea5
Defines OS 47
WastageArea6
Defines OS 48
364
Styles
WastageArea7
Defines OS 49
WastageArea8
Defines OS 50
365
Styles
WastageArea9
Defines OS 51
WeightsStyle
Controls the output of component weights. Total - Any component weight output is a total weight (Quantity x Unit Weight). Individual - Any component weight output is the Individual weight of each component type (no multiplication x Quantity). None - No component weight output on material lists.
Defines OS 41 Pos 5
SupportsWithMatchingNamesAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of supports with matching tags. Off - Supports with matching names (tags) not accumulated. On - Supports with matching names (tags) accumulated. Defines OS 64 Pos 4
366
Styles
MaterialsBySpool
Controls the splitting of fabrication materials by spool on the material list. False - Fabrication materials listed as normal under the Fabrication section of material list. True - Spool materials grouped separately, with part numbering on a per spool basis. Defines OS 24 Pos 3
SheetNumberFormat
Controls the number of characters output for the sheet number. If the sheet number output has less than the requested number of characters, leading zero(s) are inserted where appropriate. 0 - No leading zeros 1 Character - Fixed number of characters 2 Characters 3 Characters 4 Characters 5 Characters 6 Characters 7 Characters 8 Characters 9 Characters
Defines OS 30 Pos 3
367
Styles
MaterialList FixedLayout Object

The properties of the MaterialList FixedLayout object define the original ISOGEN material list options, where ISOGEN plots the column headings. They are not user-definable. The FixedLayout object does not create any material list definition (MLD) data - everything is contained in the properties of this object. The ActiveList property on the MaterialList object must be set to Fixed. When you click the MaterialList FixedLayout object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify any of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. InsertBlankLines (on page 369) Layout (on page 369) LineSpacing (on page 369) MLType (on page 369) RightSide (on page 370) ShowDividingLines (on page 370)
368
Styles ShowItemDescriptions (on page 370) TextSize (on page 371) UserTextSize (on page 371) TextWeight (on page 371) TextWidth (on page 372) TitleblockPos (on page 372) TitleBlockVisible (on page 372)
InsertBlankLines
Controls the insertion of blank lines following single line material list entries. True - Blank lines inserted. False - Blank lines not inserted following single line entries. This provides the possibility of the material list being shorter.
Defines OS 26 Pos 2
Layout
Controls the material list headings layout. Standard - For the Standard sectionalized type with group headings and component subgroup headings. Continuous - For Continuous style listing without headings and sub-headings.
This type of list is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups, such as pipe, flanges, and fittings. If required, you can switch off the dividing lines using the ShowDividingLines property . Defines OS 23 Pos 5
See also
ShowDividingLines (on page 370)
LineSpacing
Controls the line spacing distance on a plotted material list. The default value is 100. Type a value to increase/decrease the line spacing distance in the ratio Value/100. For example, a value of 90 reduces the line spacing, while a value of 110 increases it. Defines OS 29
369
Styles
MLType
Controls the type of material list. Normal - Default for non-special type material list. Special - Special type material list where every item is given a separate entry except gaskets and bolts, which are accumulated. Pulled bends get U prefixes and welds have W or B prefixes. Normal with alpha pointers - Uses an alpha system of material list pointers, such as A, B, C, and so on instead of the default numeric system.
Defines OS 23 Pos 2
RightSide
Controls whether the material list is printed on the left-hand or right-hand side of the isometric. True - Material list printed on the right-hand side. False - Material list printed on the left-hand side.
Defines OS 25 Pos 1
ShowDividingLines
If the Layout property is set to Continuous, then this property controls whether the dividing lines are shown or not. True - List is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups, such as PIPE, FLANGES, FITTINGS, and so on. False - No horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups.
Defines OS 23 Pos 5
See also
Layout (on page 369)
370
Styles
ShowItemDescriptions
Controls whether or not item descriptions are printed on the material list. When item descriptions are suppressed, the material list becomes correspondingly narrower. True - Item descriptions are printed on the material list. False - Item descriptions are not printed on the material list.
Defines OS 26 Pos 1
TextSize
Controls the physical size of the characters that are used for the plotted material list. Small (2.1 mm) - For small characters - 2.1mm high. Medium (2.5 mm) - Default - for medium size characters - 2.4mm high. Large (2.8 mm) - For large size characters - 2.8mm high. XLarge (3.5 mm) - For extra large characters - 3.5mm high. XXLarge (4.2 mm) - For extra large characters - 4.2mm high. XXXLarge (4.9 mm) - For extra large characters - 4.9mm high. Or User - For characters with a height defined in UserTextSize property .
Defines OS 27 Pos 1
See also
UserTextSize (on page 371)
UserTextSize
Specifies a text height in mm or inches for text output in the fixed material list. This is an alternative way of setting the text size to setting the TextSize property, which allows you to select one of a number of available fixed sizes (such as Small/Medium/Large). If UserTextSize is set to a value, it overrides the TextSize property. Defines OS 27 Pos 1, 2
See also
371
Styles
TextWeight
TextWidth
Controls the text width (Fixed fonts only) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box. Type the value required as a real number. Defines OS 27 Pos 3, 4
See also
TitleblockPos
Controls the position of the title block. Pipeline - For title block in default position (bottom right-hand corner of pipeline drawing area). MatList - For title block at bottom of material list.
Defines OS 25 Pos 2
TitleBlockVisible
Control whether the title block is shown or not. True - Displays the title block as defined by the TitleblockPos property . False - Suppresses the title block.
Defines OS 25 Pos 2
See also
TitleblockPos
372
Styles
MaterialList UserDefined Object

The MaterialList UserDefined object contains the properties defining the alternative Style3 material list. This type of list is created and plotted into a drawing frame that contains a preexisting table (with header texts) into which the material list is plotted. A Style3 material list is only allowed with a backing sheet. That is, if an ISOGEN generated drawing frame is in use, only Style 1 and Style2 are available. The MaterialList UserDefined object has several sub-objects and one collection: OneSection (see "MaterialList UserDefined OneSection Object" on page 380) TwoSection (see "MaterialList UserDefined TwoSection Object" on page 382) ThreeSection (see "MaterialList UserDefined ThreeSection Object" on page 385) RemarksBox (see "MaterialList UserDefined RemarksBox Object" on page 389) SpoolTable (see "MaterialList UserDefined SpoolTable Object" on page 391) XYColumns (see "CutList UserDefined XYColumns Collection" on page 448)
These objects are used to hold the data defining the various different types of Style3 list. These basically break down to how many sections there are plotted (certain options are not available in certain list types). Sensible defaults exist for each type of list, so each sub (section) object can be set up automatically, allowing you to select between them.
373
Styles You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. ActiveSection (on page 374) DefaultDescriptionWidth (on page 375) DrawingLayer (on page 375) DrawingColour (on page 375) MLType (on page 375) ShowRemarks (on page 375) StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375) ShowGroupHeadings (on page 376) GroupHeadingX (on page 376) GroupUnderline CategoryUnderline (on page 376) ShowAccumulatedPipeData (on page 376) ShowCategoryHeadings (on page 377) AccumulatedPipePosition (on page 377) AccumulatedPipeQuantity (on page 377) AccumulatedPipeDesc (on page 377) TextFont (on page 377) TextHeight (on page 377) TextWeight (on page 377) TextWidthFactor (on page 378) VerticalSpacing (on page 378) Count (on page 378)
ActiveSection
Defines how many sections the material list has. The ActiveSection property is used to select the active section information. You can type 1, 2, or 3. 1- Uses the OneSection object properties for material list layout. 2 - Uses the TwoSection object properties for material list layout. 3 - Uses the ThreeSection object properties for material list layout.
See also
MaterialList UserDefined OneSection Object (on page 380) MaterialList UserDefined TwoSection Object (on page 382) MaterialList UserDefined ThreeSection Object (on page 385)
374
Styles
DefaultDescriptionWidth
Controls the number of characters to use for the Description. Type an appropriate value. The maximum you can enter is 130.
DrawingLayer
Sets the drawing layer for material list text. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.
DrawingColour
Type an integer number that represents the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).
MLType
Controls the type of material list. Normal - Default for Non-special type material list. Special - Special type of material list. Every item is given a separate entry except gaskets and bolts, which are accumulated. Pulled bends get U prefixes and welds have W or B prefixes. Normal with Alpha Pointers -
Defines OS 23 Pos 2
ShowRemarks
Controls the display of a Remarks list, as defined by the separate RemarksBox object. True - Remarks list is shown. False - Remarks list not shown.
See also
RemarksBox Object
StartX
Defines the starting X position of the list in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
375
Styles
StartY
Defines the starting Y position of the list in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
ShowGroupHeadings
Controls whether group headings are displayed. True - Group headings are displayed. False - Group headings are not displayed.
GroupHeadingX
Displacement in X from StartX property for group heading in mm.
See also
StartX (on page 375)
GroupUnderline
If set to True, the group heading is underlined.
CategoryHeadingX
Displacement in X from StartX property for category heading in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) StartX (on page 375)
CategoryUnderline
If set to True, the category heading is underlined.
ShowAccumulatedPipeData
True - The properties AccumulatedPipePosition, AccumulatedPipeQuantity and AccumulatedPipeDesc are exported to the material list definition (MLD) file. These properties control the plotting of accumulated pipe information in a material list containing non-accumulated quantities. That is, for pipe only, it is possible to have both accumulated and non-accumulated information in the same material list. False - The properties defined previously (as set when True is selected) are not exported to the material list definition file (normal behavior).
376
Styles
ShowCategoryHeadings
Controls whether group category headings are displayed. True - Group category headings are displayed. False - Group category headings are not displayed.
AccumulatedPipePosition
Horizontal offset in mm or inches to contents of Alternate Text 394. The offset is from the material list StartX property.
See also
AccumulatedPipeQuantity
Horizontal offset in mm or inches to horizontal offset to accumulated pipe quantity. The offset is from the material list StartX property.
See also
AccumulatedPipeDesc
Horizontal offset in mm or inches to horizontal offset to accumulated pipe description. The offset is from the material list StartX property.
See also
TextFont
Defines the font that is used in the material list on the isometric. Use the TextFont list to specify the font type.
TextHeight
Specifies the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
377
Styles
TextWeight
TextWidthFactor
Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height.
VerticalSpacing
Sets the vertical spacing between each horizontal line in mm or inches (set as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
Count
Displays the number of columns in the UserDefined Material list plotted on the isometric, as defined in the XYColumns collection (see "CutList UserDefined XYColumns Collection" on page 448).
378
Styles
MaterialList UserDefined XYColumns Collection

The MaterialList UserDefined XYColumns collection defines the data output for three userdefinable lists - material, weld and cut lists. This must be used with a backing sheet, as the positions given are for the X coordinate only. You can define the following properties: AttributeName (on page 379) Offset (on page 380) MaxChars (on page 380)
To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Offset t and MaxChars properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then press Enter.
See also
379
Styles AttributeName Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute. Offset Specifies the offset in mm from the StartX and StartY . Type a value (real number) in mm, or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375) MaxChars Defines the maximum number of characters.
380
Styles
MaterialList UserDefined OneSection Object

The properties of MaterialList UserDefined OneSection object are used when the ActiveSection property on the Material list UserDefined object is set to 1. Content (on page 381) ListDown (on page 382) MaxEntries (on page 382)
You can define properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.
See also
ActiveSection (on page 374) MaterialList UserDefined Object (on page 372)
381
Styles Content Controls which category of components are listed on the material list. Continuous - A continuous listing of all components. Fabrication - Lists Fabrication components only. Erection - Lists Erection components only. Offshore - Lists Offshore components only. Erection/Offshore - Lists Erection/Offshore components only.
ListDown Controls the direction in which the Material list is printed with reference to the StartX and StartY properties of the MaterialList UserDefined object. True - The material list is down. False - The material list is up. For a three section material list, all section must be in the same direction.
See also
StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375) MaterialList UserDefined Object (on page 372) MaxEntries Controls the maximum number of entries for the material list before an overflow sheet is generated.
382
Styles
MaterialList UserDefined TwoSection Object

The properties of this MaterialList UserDefine TwoSection object are used when the ActiveSection property on the Material list UserDefined object is set to 2. Section1Content (on page 384) Section1Down (on page 384) Section1MaxEntries (on page 384) Section2Content (on page 384) Section2Down (on page 384) Section2MaxEntries (on page 384) Section2YOffset (on page 384)
See also
ActiveSection (on page 374) MaterialList UserDefined Object (on page 372)
383
Styles Section1Content Controls which category of components is listed in Section 1 of the material list. Fabrication - Lists only Fabrication components. Erection - Lists only Erection components. Offshore - Lists only Offshore components. Erection/Offshore - Lists only Erection/Offshore components.
Section1Down Controls the direction in which the material list is printed with reference to the StartX and StartY properties of the MaterialList UserDefined object. True - The material list is down. False - The material list is up.
See also
MaterialList UserDefined Object (on page 372) StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375) Section1MaxEntries Controls the maximum number of entries for section 1 of the material list before an overflow sheet is generated. Section2Content Controls which category of components is listed in Section 2 of the material list. Fabrication - Lists only Fabrication components. Erection - Lists only Erection components. Offshore - Lists only Offshore components. Erection/Offshore - Lists only Erection/Offshore components.
Section2Down Controls the direction in which section 2 of the material list is printed with reference to the Section2YOffset property. True - The material list is down. False - The material list is up.
See also
Section2YOffset (on page 384) Section2MaxEntries Controls the maximum number of entries for section 2 of the material list, before an overflow sheet is generated.
384
Styles Section2YOffset Controls the Y offset for section 2 of the material list, with reference to the StartX and StartY properties of the MaterialList UserDefined object. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
MaterialList UserDefined Object Options (on page 77) StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375)
385
Styles
MaterialList UserDefined ThreeSection Object

The properties of the MaterialList UserDefined ThreeSection object are used when the ActiveSection property on the MateriaList UserDefined object is set to 3. ListDown (on page 387) Section1Content (on page 387) Section1MaxEntries (on page 387) Section2Content (on page 387) Section2MaxEntries (on page 387) Section2YOffset (on page 387) Section3Content (on page 388) Section3MaxEntries (on page 388) Section3YOffset (on page 388)
386
Styles
See also
ActiveSection (on page 374) MaterialList UserDefined Object (on page 372) ListDown Controls the direction in which the Material list is printed with reference to the StartX and StartY properties of the MaterialList UserDefined object. True - The material list is down. False - The material list is up. For a three section material list, all section must be in the same direction.
See also
StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375) MaterialList UserDefined Object (on page 372) Section1Content Controls which category of components is listed in Section 1 of the material list. Fabrication - Lists only Fabrication components. Erection - Lists only Erection components. Offshore - Lists only Offshore components. Erection/Offshore - Lists only Erection/Offshore components.
Section1MaxEntries Controls the maximum number of entries for Sction 1 of the material list, before an overflow sheet is generated. Section2Content Controls which category of components is listed in Section 2 of the material list. Fabrication - Lists only Fabrication components. Erection - Lists only Erection components. Offshore - Lists only Offshore components. Erection/Offshore - Lists only Erection/Offshore components.
Section2MaxEntries Controls the maximum number of entries for section 2 of the material list, before an overflow sheet is generated.
387
Styles Section2YOffset Controls the Y offset for Section 2 of the material list, with reference to the StartX and StartY properties of the MaterialList UserDefined object. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
MaterialList UserDefined Object Options (on page 77) StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375) Section3Content Controls which category of components is listed in Section 3 of the material list. Fabrication - Lists only Fabrication components. Erection - Lists only Erection components. Offshore - Lists only Offshore components. Erection/Offshore - Lists only Erection/Offshore components.
Section3MaxEntries Controls the maximum number of entries for section 3 of the material list, before an overflow sheet is generated. Section3YOffset Controls the Y offset for section 3 of the material list, with reference to the StartX and StartY properties of the MaterialList UserDefined object. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
MaterialList UserDefined Object Options (on page 77) StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375)
388
Styles
MaterialList UserDefined RemarksBox Object

The MaterialList UserDefined RemarksBox object contains the necessary data to define the position and properties of a Style3 Remarks box, which is used to plot user-specified remarks attached to components.
You can modify the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. DrawingLayer (on page 390) MaxCharacters (on page 390) MaxEntries (on page 390) StartX (on page 390) StartY (on page 390) TextHeight (on page 390) TextWeight (on page 390) VerticalSpacing (on page 390)
389
Styles DrawingLayer Sets the drawing layer for the spool table text. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50. MaxCharacters Defines the maximum number of characters that can fit on each output line in the Remarks box. The maximum number should include the Remark ID. MaxEntries Controls the maximum number of lines of text that can be fitted into the available space used for the Remarks box. When the maximum is reached, ISOGEN does not output any further lines, and a warning message is output to the Message file. StartX The starting X position of the Remarks box in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) StartY The starting Y position of the Remarks box in mm or inches (as a real number) dependent upon the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) TextHeight Sets the text height to be used for the Remarks box in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) TextWeight Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used for MicroStation only Defines OS 27 Pos 5 VerticalSpacing The vertical spacing between each horizontal line of text in the Remarks box. Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting g of the drawing units in n the Options (on page 77) dialog box.
See also
390
Styles
MaterialList UserDefined SpoolTable Object

The MaterialList UserDefined SpoolTable object stores the settings for the Spool table quantities, which can be output as part of a user-defined material list.
You can modify the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Enabled (on page 392) HeaderOffsetX (on page 392) HeaderOffsetY (on page 392) ColumnOffset (on page 393) NoColumns (on page 393) TableOverflow (on page 393) TextHeight (on page 393) TextWeight (on page 393) DrawingLayer (on page 393) DataOffsetX (on page 394)
391
Styles DataOffsetY (on page 394) OutputLinesTube (on page 395) TextHeightMultiple (on page 395)
Enabled Controls whether the spool table settings are written to the material list definition (MLD) file. HeaderOffsetX Sets the X offset to the spool identifier position in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) HeaderOffsetY Sets the Y offset to the spool identifier position in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box
392
Styles
See also
Options (on page 77) ColumnOffset Controls the horizontal offset between each column of spool quantities on the material list. Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) NoColumns The maximum number of spool quantity columns that can fit on the backing sheet. TableOverflow Indicates if automatic spool table overflow on to a second sheet is allowed. True - Overflow is allowed. False - Overflow is not allowed.
TextHeight Sets the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) TextWeight Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used for MicroStation only DrawingLayer Sets the drawing layer for the spool table text. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.
393
Styles DataOffsetX Sets the X offset to the first spool quantities position in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting in of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) DataOffsetY Sets the Y offset to the first spool quantities position in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set in the Options dialog box.
See also
394
Styles OutputLinesTube Used in conjunction with AText -537 to control the number of lines used for output of pipe lengths. The form of length output on the material list is controlled by the LinearQuantityStyle property; however, in order to save space, it is possible to have a two line format. By default, the OutputLinesTube property is set to 1, which uses the existing LinearQuantityStyle property. If AText -537 is being used, then the OutputLinesTube property must be set to 2. AText -537 is used to indicate the new line by using the $ and the setting for the units indication to be output, as shown in the following example: -537$m -537$mm -537$FT -537$FT 13.5m 13500mm 19.5 Ft 13.5Ft (instead of 13.5') m mm Ft Ft (instead of 13.5')
Do not use AText -537 if pipe quantities are requested in Ft-Ins (13'-5") units. If set, this AText takes over control of the Units indication output on all styles of material list, as well as allowing a new line indicator to force two line output. If it is not set, then normal defaults apply.
See also
LinearQuantityStyle (on page 359) TextHeightMultiple Sets the height of the text to be output in multiple line form on the material list. Type the value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
395
Styles
MaterialList Variable Layout Object

The properties of the MaterialList VariableLayout object control the layout of the material list. This object contains the properties defining the alternative Style2 material list. This is a variation of the basic Style1 type, with additional user options that permit further variations of the basic material list. A Style2 material list requires column header and data entries to be defined in the material list definition (MLD) file. The Style2 object is a collection of column definitions. Column headers are stored in a single long string in this object. The MaterialList VariableLayout object also has a collection called TextColumns, which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output on the material list. The Count property, defined by the software, indicates the number of objects in the TextColumns collection. When you click the MaterialList VariableLayout object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel displays all of the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. DefaultDescriptionWidth (on page 397) HeaderLines (on page 397)
396
Styles InsertBlankLines (on page 397) Layout (on page 397) LineSpacing (on page 398) MLType (on page 398) RightSide (on page 398) ShowDividingLines (on page 399) TextSize (on page 399) UserTextSize (on page 399) TextWeight (on page 400) TextWidth (on page 400) Count (on page 400)
See also
MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection (on page 400)
DefaultDescriptionWidth
Controls the number of characters to use for the description, maximum value is 130. Type an appropriate value.
HeaderLines
Specify the text string for the column header. \ - Starts a new line. | - Produces a vertical break.
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the material list definition (MLD) file.
InsertBlankLines
Control of the insertion of blank lines following single line material list entries. True - Blank lines inserted. False - Blank lines not inserted following single line entries. This provides the possibility of the material list being shorter.
Defines OS 26 Pos 2
397
Styles
Layout
Controls the material list headings layout. Standard - For the standard sectionalized type with group headings and component subgroup headings. Continuous - For continuous style listing without headings and sub-headings. This type of list is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups, such as Pipe, Flanges, Fittings, and so on. If required, you can use the ShowDividingLines property to switch off the dividing lines.
Defines OS 23 Pos 5
See also
ShowDividingLines (on page 399)
LineSpacing
Controls the line spacing distance on a plotted material list. The default value is 100. Type a value to increase/decrease the line spacing distance in the ratio Value/100. For example, a value of 90 reduces the line spacing, while a value of 110 increases it. Defines OS 29
MLType
Controls the type of material list. Normal - Default for non-special type material list. Special - Special type material list where every item is given a separate entry except gaskets and bolts, which are accumulated. Pulled bends get U prefixes, and welds have W or B prefixes. Normal with Alpha Pointers - Uses an alpha system of material list pointers - A, B, C, and so on, instead of the default numeric system.
Defines OS 23 Pos 2
RightSide
Controls whether the material list is printed on the left-hand or right-hand side of the isometric. True - Material list printed on the right-hand side. False - Material list printed on the left-hand side.
Defines OS 25 Pos 1
398
Styles
ShowDividingLines
If the Layout property is set to continuous, then this property controls whether the dividing lines are shown or not. True - List is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups, such as. PIPE, FLANGES, FITTINGS, and so on. False - No horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups.
Defines OS 23 Pos 5
See also
Layout (on page 369)
TextSize
Controls the physical size of the characters that are used for the plotted material list. Small (2.1 mm) - For small characters - 2.1mm high. Medium (2.5 mm) - Default - for medium size characters - 2.4mm high. Large (2.8 mm) - For large size characters - 2.8mm high. XLarge (3.5 mm) - For extra large characters - 3.5mm high. XXLarge (4.2 mm) - For extra large characters - 4.2mm high. XXXLarge (4.9 mm) - For extra large characters - 4.9mm high. Or User - For characters with a height defined in UserTextSize property.
Defines OS 27 Pos 1
See also
UserTextSize
UserTextSize
Controls the text size in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. Set the value (real number) required. Only applicable if TextSize is set to Or User. Defines OS 27 Pos 1, 2
See also
Options (on page 77) TextSize (on page 399)
399
Styles
TextWeight
TextWidth
Controls the text width (Fixed fonts only) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box. Type the value required as a real number. Defines OS 27 Pos 3, 4
See also
Count
Displays the number of columns in the VariableLayout material list plotted on the isometric.
400
Styles
MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection

The MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns collection is used to store the definitions of the data to be output for the different types of lists. You can modify the following properties: AttributeName (on page 401) Justification (on page 401) Start (on page 402) MaxChars (on page 402)
To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Justification, Start and MaxChars properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then press Enter.
See also
401
Styles Justification Defines the justification for the text. Specify either Left or Right. Start Defines the start column for the output data on a fixed format file, and specifies a field number for a delimited file. MaxChars Defines the maximum number of characters.
402
Styles
MaterialList SummaryFile Object

The MaterialList SummaryFile object contains the properties for the material control file. The object also contains a collection called TextColumns, which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output for the different types of lists. The Count property, defined by the software, indicates the number of objects in the TextColumns collection. When you click the MaterialList SummaryFile object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel displays all of the properties that currently defined for that object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Enabled (on page 404) Path (on page 404) Append (on page 404) FileFormat (on page 404) Delimiter (on page 404) ShowHeaders (on page 405) HeaderLines (on page 405) 403
Styles MaterialHeadings (on page 405) IncludeBolts (on page 405) IndividualEntries (on page 405) TitleText (on page 406) ShowTitles (on page 406) UserDefined (on page 406) Count (on page 406)
See also
MaterialList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection (on page 406)
Enabled
Controls whether file is created or not. True - File is created. False - File is not created.
Path
Defines the path for the file. 1. Double-click the Path box. 2. In the Specify path for file dialog box, navigate to the appropriate file and then click OK.
Append
Defines whether the file is opened in Append mode or Overwrite mode. True - File is appended. False - File is overwritten.
FileFormat
Defines whether the output file is a fixed format or delimited file. Fixed - Outputs a fixed format file. Delimited - Outputs a delimited file.
404
Styles
Delimiter
Defines the character used as a delimiter when the file format is delimited. The possible characters are Blank Comma (,) Semi-colon (;) Colon (:)
ShowHeaders
Controls whether the header lines are shown or not. True - Shows header lines. False - Does not show header lines.
HeaderLines
MaterialHeadings
Controls whether there is a single output of material headings or for each pipe/drawing. Pipeline - Output headings for each pipeline. Drawing - Output headings for each drawing. Single - A single output of the headings.
IncludeBolts
Controls whether bolts are included in the material control file. True - Bolts are included in the material control file (default). False - Bolts are excluded from the material control file
Defines OS 65 Pos 1
405
Styles
IndividualEntries
Controls whether Individual entries are output to the material control file when material accumulation is being used on the material list. This allows components with different attributes to be listed correctly but avoids non-accumulation of materials which can often create overflow drawings. True - Individual entries are written. False - Individual entries are not written.
TitleText
Type the text to be used for the title.
ShowTitles
Controls whether the title line is shown or not. True - Shows the title line. False - Does not show the title line.
UserDefined
Controls whether the material control file uses the properties of the SummaryFile object to control the data output to the material control file, or the old standard material control file is created. True - Use the SummaryFile object properties. False - Standard material control file.
See also
MaterialList SummaryFile Object (on page 402)
Count
Displays the number of attributes to be output in the Material list Summary file (material control file).
406
Styles
MaterialList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection

The MaterialList SummaryFile TextColumns collection is used to store the definitions of the data to be output for the different types of lists. You can modify the following properties: AttributeName (on page 407) Justification (on page 407) Start (on page 408) MaxChars (on page 408)
See also
407
408
Styles
MaterialList Transfers Object

The MaterialList Transfers object is used to store the information that allows you to move a component from one sort group to another on the material list. For example, a blank flange can be moved to the FLAN sort group. The MaterialList Transfers object also has a collection called MLTransfers (see "MaterialList Transfers MLTransfers Collection" on page 410), which is used to store the components to be transferred. The object itself has only a single property called Count, which is defined by the software, and indicates the number of objects in the MaterialList MLTransfers collection.
See also
Count (on page 409) MaterialList MLTransfers Collection (see "MaterialList Transfers MLTransfers Collection" on page 410)
Count
Displays the number of items in the MLTransfers collection (see "MaterialList Transfers MLTransfers Collection" on page 410). Each one represents a material that is to be assigned to a group other than its default.
409
Styles
MaterialList Transfers MLTransfers Collection

The MaterialList MLTransfers collection stores the list of components to be transferred from one sort group to another. You can define the following properties: RecordID (on page 410) NewGroup (on page 410) SKEY (on page 411)
See also
Add to Collection (on page 23) Remove from Collection (on page 23) RecordID This is the IDF record number for the component, such as 107 for a blank flange or 90 for a control valve.
410
Styles NewGroup This is the new group to which the component is to be transferred. The available groups are: PIPE VALV FITT INST FLAN SUPP GASK MISC BOLT WELD
SKEY The following transfers record ID 90 (instrument) to the valve group (VALV) but only instruments that have an SKEY of CV** (refers to a control valve with any end preparation).
RecordID Group SKEY 90 VALV CV**
411
Styles
WeldList
WeldList Object
The WeldList object contains information that defines all three ISOGEN styles of plotted weld list and the weld list summary file. The WeldList object itself defines which of the styles is to be used and the properties that apply to all weld list styles.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. ActiveList (on page 413) ExtraRPadWelds (on page 413) SlipOnFlangeWelds (on page 413) YTypeWelds (on page 414) TackWeldNumbers (on page 414) ClampWelds (on page 415)
412
Styles
See also
WeldList FixedLayout Object (on page 415) WeldList VariableLayout Object (on page 417) WeldList UserDefined Object (on page 421) WeldList SummaryFile Object (on page 428)
ActiveList
Defines which of the three weld list styles is being used. UserDefined (see "WeldList UserDefined Object" on page 421) FixedLayout (see "WeldList FixedLayout Object" on page 415) VariableLayout (see "WeldList VariableLayout Object" on page 417)
ExtraRPadWelds
Controls the quantity of extra weld numbers generated at reinforcement pads. You can type 0, 1, or 2. 0 - Generates no extra weld numbers.
1 - Generates one extra weld number.
2 - Generates two extra weld numbers.
These are extra weld numbers because they are created in addition to the normal single and double branch connection weld numbers that are generated at set-on tee and cross positions. Defines OS 77 Pos 2
413
Styles
SlipOnFlangeWelds
Controls the quantity of weld numbers generated at slip-on flanges. You can generate either one or two weld numbers at slip-on flanges. Type a value of 1 or 2. 1 - Generates one weld number. 2 - Generates two weld numbers. 2 is the default setting.
Defines OS 77 Pos 1
Visible
Controls whether the weld list is plotted or not. True - Plots the weld list. False - Does not plot the weld list.
Defines OS 53 Pos 2
YTypeWelds
Controls the allocation of weld numbers on the fabricated Y-type components. You can type 1 or 2. 1 - One weld number.
2 - Two weld numbers
Defines OS 77 Pos 4
414
Styles
TackWeldNumbers
Controls the allocation of weld numbers on tack welds. True - Allocates weld numbers. False - Does not allocate weld numbers.
Defines OS 77 Pos 5
ClampWelds
Controls the number of weld numbers allocated to Victaulic welded/gorged ring type clamps (CLVR). Type a value in the range of 1 to 9. If set to 0 (the default value), two weld numbers are allocated. Defines OS 77 Pos 7
415
Styles
WeldList FixedLayout Object

The WeldList FixedLayout object is used for the original ISOGEN weld list. It has one property, ShowOperationsBox. The ActiveList property on the WeldList object must be set to Fixed.
To set the ShowOperationsBox property, double-click the current value and then select the new value in the list.
See also
ActiveList (on page 413) ShowOperationsBox (on page 416)
416
Styles
ShowOperationsBox
Controls whether the weld operations box is shown or not. True - Shows the weld operations box. Replaces the original weld list, if set, to be shown by the Visible property on the WeldList object . False - Does not show the weld operations box. As a result, the original weld list is plotted if the Visible property on the WeldList object is set to True.
Defines OS 53 Pos 2
417
Styles
WeldList VariableLayout Object

The WeldList VariableLayout object has a collection called TextColumns, which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output on the weld list. The WeldList VariableLayout object has two properties, Headerlines , which is user-defined, and Count , which is defined by the software. Count is the number of definitions in the TextColumns (see "MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection" on page 400) collection. The ActiveList property on the WeldList object must be set to Variable.
See also
ActiveList (on page 413) Count (on page 419) Headerlines (on page 419) WeldList Object (on page 412)
418
Styles
HeaderLines
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the weld definition file (WDF).
Count
Displays the number of definitions in the TextColumns collection. This is a system-defined value.
See also
WeldList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection (on page 419)
419
Styles
WeldList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection

The WeldList VariableLayout TextColumns collection is used to store the definitions of the data to be output for the weld list. You can define the following properties: AttributeName (on page 420) Justification (on page 421) Start (on page 421) MaxChars (on page 421)
See also
420
Styles Justification Defines the justification for the text. Specify either Left or Right. Start Defines the start column for the output data on a fixed format file, and specifies the field number for a delimited file. MaxChars Specifies the maximum number of characters.
421
Styles
WeldList UserDefined Object

The WeldList UserDefined object contains the properties for a user-defined weld list. This type of list is created and plotted into a drawing frame that contains a pre-existing table (with header texts) into which the weld list is plotted. The object also contains a collection called XYColumns, which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output on the weld list. The Count property, defined by the software, specifies the number of definitions in the XYColumns collection. The ActiveLlist property on the WeldList object must be set to UserDefined. DrawingLayer (on page 423) DrawingColour (on page 423) ListDown (on page 424) MaxEntries (on page 424) MaxRows (on page 424) MaxCols (on page 424) StartX (on page 424) StartY (on page 424) TextFont (on page 424) TextHeight (on page 425) TextWeight (on page 425) TextWidthFactor (on page 425) HorizontalSpacing (on page 425) TableLayout (on page 425) VerticalSpacing (on page 426)
The WeldList UserDefined object controls the following properties:
422
Styles Count (on page 426)
See also
WeldList Userdefined XYColumns Collection (on page 426)
DrawingLayer
Sets the drawing layer for the weld list. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.
DrawingColour
Type an integer number that represents the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).
423
Styles
ListDown
Controls the direction in which the weld list is printed with reference to the StartX and StartY properties of the WeldList UserDefined object . True - Prints the material list down. False - Prints the material list up.
See also
StartX (on page 424) StartY (on page 424)
MaxEntries
Controls the maximum number of entries in the weld list.
MaxRows
MaxCols
Defines the maximum number of columns before a new row is started when using multiple tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is horizontal.
StartX
Sets the start X position of the weld list on the drawing in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
StartY
Sets the start Y position of the weld list on the drawing in mm, or Inches (as a real number) depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
TextFont
Specifies the font used when outputting text on the weld list.
424
Styles
TextHeight
Sets the text height to be used for the weld list in mm or inches (as a real number), ,depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
TextWeight
TextWidthFactor
Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height to be used for output of the weld list on the isometric.
HorizontalSpacing
Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the weld list output when the table is horizontally formatted or two dimensional. Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number)depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
TableLayout
Controls the order in which a Weld list table is to be organized, either Horizontal
Vertical
425
Styles
VerticalSpacing
Specifies the vertical spacing between each horizontal line in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
Count
Indicates the number of definitions in the XYColumns collection.
See also
WeldList Userdefined XYColumns Collection (on page 426)
426
Styles
WeldList UserDefined XYColumns Collection

The WeldList Userdefined XYColumns collection is used to define the data output for the userdefined weld list. This must be used with a backing sheet, as the positions given are for the X coordinate only. You can define the following properties: AttributeName (on page 450) Offset (on page 428) MaxChars (on page 428)
To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Offsett and MaxChars properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then press Enter.
See also
Add to Collection (on page 23) Remove from Collection (on page 23) SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide 427
Styles AttributeName Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute. Offset Specifies the offset in mm from the StartX and StartY. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) StartX (on page 424) StartY (on page 424) MaxChars Defines the maximum number of characters.
428
Styles
WeldList SummaryFile Object

The WeldList SummaryFile object contains properties for the weld summary file. There is also a TextColumns collection, which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output in the weld summary file. The Count property, which is defined by the software, specifies the number of objects in the TextColumns collection. The WeldList Summary File object controls the following properties: Enabled (on page 430) Path (on page 430) Append (on page 431) FileFormat (on page 431) Delimiter (on page 431) HeaderLines (on page 431) ShowHeaders (on page 432) TitleText (on page 432) ShowTitles (on page 432) Count (on page 432)
When you click SummaryFile in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
429
See also
WeldList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection (on page 432)
Enabled
Controls whether weld summary file is created or not. True - Creates the weld summary file. False - Does not create the weld summary file.
430
Styles
Path
Defines the path for the file. 1. Double-click in the Path box. 2. In the Specify path for file dialog box, navigate to the file and then click OK .
Append
Defines whether the file is opened in Append mode or Overwrite mode. True - Appends the file. False - Overwrites the file.
FileFormat
Defines whether the output file is a Fixed format or Delimited file. Fixed - For fixed format file. Delimited - For a delimited file. The delimiter is specified in the Delimiter property.
See also
Delimiter (on page 431)
Delimiter
431
Styles
HeaderLines
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the welding list definition file (WLD).
ShowHeaders
Controls whether the header lines are shown or not. True - Shows header lines. False - Does not show header lines.
TitleText
ShowTitles
Count
Displays the number of definitions in the TextColumns collection.
See also
WeldList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection (on page 432)
432
Styles
WeldList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection

The WeldList SummaryFile TextColumns collection is used to store the definitions of the data to be output for the weld summary list. You can define the following properties" AttributeName (on page 434) Justification (on page 434) Start (on page 434) MaxChars (on page 434)
To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Offset and MaxChars properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then press Enter.
See also
433
Styles AttributeName Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute. Justification Defines the justification for the text. Specify either Left or Right. Start Defines the start column for the output data on a fixed format file, and specifies the field number for a delimited file. MaxChars Specifies the maximum number of characters.
434
Styles
CutList
CutList Object
The CutList object controls the definition of the cut list output on both the drawing and to a summary file. The properties of the CutList object set general information for the cut list, whereas the sub-objects control the type of cut list and the properties required for each type. When you click the CutList object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel displays all of the currently defined properties.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. ActiveList (on page 436) IncludeAdditionalMaterial (on page 436) CutPieceID (on page 436) CutPieceSequence (on page 436) DecimalInchOutput (on page 437)
435
Styles LengthToCL (on page 437) LengthToBranchPoint (on page 437) OffshoreAllowance (on page 438) OnShoreAllowance (on page 438) ShopWeldAllowance (on page 439) UseWeldGapData (on page 439) UseTangentData (on page 439) Visible (on page 439)
ActiveList
Controls the style of layout used for the cut list on the isometric. Fixed - Use the properties of the FixedLayout object. User Defined -Use the properties of the FixedLayout object.
See also
CutList FixedLayout Object (on page 440) CutList UserDefined Object (on page 442)
IncludeAdditionalMaterial
Controls how additional material is handled in the cut list. None - No entry to cut list for additional material. Pipe Only - Add entry to cut list for additional material (PIPE). Misc Only - Add entry to cut list for additional material (MISC). Pipe and Misc - Add entry to cut list for additional material (PIPE and MISC).
Defines OS 2 Pos 9
CutPieceID
Controls whether the cut piece identifiers are Numeric or Alphabetic. Numeric - For numeric cut piece identifiers. Alphabetic - For alphabetic cut piece identifiers.
Defines OS 2 Pos 3
436
Styles
CutPieceSequence
Controls whether the cut piece identifier is per pipeline or per drawing. Continuous - Cut piece list and cut piece identifiers generated per pipeline. Per drawing - Cut piece identifiers starting at 1 (one) or A on each isometric drawing, depending on the setting of the CutPieceID property.
Defines OS 2 Pos 1
See also
CutPieceID (on page 436)
DecimalInchOutput
Controls the supplementary output of cut length in decimal inches. True - For supplementary output of cut lengths in decimal inches format in the REMARKS column of the new style cut piece list. This option only applies to Imperial units users. False - For standard cut lengths only.
Defines OS 2 Pos 4
LengthToCL
Controls the calculation of branch cut length to centre of main pipeline. True - Calculation to the center line of the main pipeline in all situations. False - Calculation of the cut length to whatever the branch point position implies, that is, no adjustment to cut length is made.
LengthToCL and LengthToBranchPoint are mutually exclusive; setting one True sets the other one to False. Defines OS 2 Pos 5
See also
LengthToBranchPoint (on page 437)
437
Styles
LengthToBranchPoint
Controls the calculation of branch cut length to the branch point position. True - Calculation of the cut length to whatever the branch point position implies, that is, no adjustment to cut length is made. False - Calculation to the centre line of the main pipeline in all situations.
LengthToCL and LengthToBranchPoint are mutually exclusive; setting one True sets the other one to False. Defines OS 2 Pos 5 = 2
See also
LengthToCL (on page 437)
OffshoreAllowance
Controls the amount of extra pipe that is added at loose flange and field fit weld (FFW) positions for Offshore piping. Extra pipe is added both to cut pipe length dimensions and to pipe quantities on the isometric. 0 or Blank - Obtains 0mm allowance. Value - Where value (real number) is an alternative allowance in mm, or Inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
OnShoreAllowance
Controls the amount of extra pipe that is added at loose flange and field fit weld (FFW) positions for Onshore piping. Extra pipe is added both to cut pipe length dimensions and to pipe quantities on the isometric. 0 or Blank - Obtains 0mm allowance. Value - Where value (real number) is an alternative allowance in mm, or Inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
438
Styles
ShopWeldAllowance
Controls the amount of extra pipe that is added for shop test purposes where certain welds are cut-off together with a short length of pipe after testing. 0 or Blank - Obtains 0mm allowance. Value - Where value (real number) is an alternative allowance in mm, or Inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. ShopWeldAllowance is only applied to shop test welds. Defines OS 22 Pos 7, 8, 9 See also Options (on page 77)
UseWeldGapData
If set to True, the data stored in the WeldGaps property at the project level is written to the welding definition file (WDF). This data is used for setting the various weld gaps. When you import a style, if the WDF contains a WELD-GAPS entry, the WeldGaps and the WeldGapData properties are both set to True.
See also
Import Style Settings (on page 73) WeldGaps (on page 94)
UseTangentData
If set to True, the data stored in the ElbowConversion property at the project level is written to the drawing definition file. This data is used for cut list calculations when elbows have been converted to bends in SmartPlant Spoolgen. If there is data in the ElbowConversion property, then this property must be set to True; otherwise, any cut lengths can be wrong. When importing a style, if the DDF contains a STANDARD-BEND-LENGTHS entry, the ElbowConversion and the UseTangentData properties are both set to True.
See also
ElbowConversion (on page 94) Import Style Settings (on page 73)
439
Styles
Visible
Controls whether the cut list is shown on the isometric drawing. The cut list is a report on the cut pieces that ISOGEN has determined to be in the pipeline. The type of cut list report can be Fixed or UserDefined. The ActiveList property controls which list is used. True - Shows the cut piece list and numbers on the isometric drawing. False - Does not show the cut piece list and numbers on the isometric drawing.
Defines OS 2 Pos 1
See also
ActiveList (on page 436) CutList FixedLayout Object (on page 440) CutList UserDefined Object (on page 442)
440
Styles
CutList FixedLayout Object

The CutList FixedLayout object is used for either the old or extended cut list output, which is controlled by the Content property. If either of these types of cut list is required, the ActiveList property on the CutList object must be set to Fixed. When you click FixedLayout in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the currently defined value for the Content property.
See also
ActiveList (on page 436) Content (on page 441) CutList Object (on page 435)
441
Styles
Content
Controls whether the old style cut list with limited information or new style cut list with full information is generated. Standard - Generates the old style cut list. Extended - Generates the new style cut list.
Defines OS 2 Pos 2
442
Styles
CutList UserDefined Object

The CutList UserDefined object properties control the UserDefined cut list. There is an XYColumns collection, which defines the data to be output on the cut list. The Count property, which is defined by the software, specifies the number of objects in the XYColumns collection. The CutList UserDefined object controls the following properties: AllowOverflowDrawings (on page 444) DrawingLayer (on page 445) HorizontalDirection (on page 445) HorizontalSpacing (on page 445) Layout (on page 445) MaxColumns (on page 446) MaxRows (on page 447) ShowEnclosure (on page 447) StartX (on page 447) StartY (on page 447) TextFont (on page 447) TextHeight (on page 447) TextWeight (on page 447) TextWidthFactor (on page 448) VerticalDirection (on page 448) VerticalSpacing (on page 448) Count (on page 448)
443
Styles When you click UserDefined in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
See also
UserDefined XYColumns Collection (see "CutList UserDefined XYColumns Collection" on page 448)
444
Styles
AllowOverflowDrawings
Controls whether the cut list causes an overflow drawing. True - Cut list can cause an overflow drawing. True is the default setting. False - Cut list cannot cause an overflow drawing. If AllowOverflowDrawings is set to False, and there was no overflow drawing created for any other reason, then the cut list overflow data is lost.
DrawingLayer
Sets the drawing layer for the cut list text. Type a numerical value in the range of 1 to 50.
HorizontalDirection
Sets the horizontal direction for the cut list. Right - Cut list is to the right. Left - Cut list is to the left.
HorizontalSpacing
Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the cut list output when the table is horizontally formatted or two dimensional. Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
Layout
Controls whether the table is horizontal, vertical, or multiple style. SingleVertical - Same data items output vertically against their relevant heading. Number of columns output dependant on the MaxRows property.
445
Styles SingleHorizontal - Same data items output horizontally against their relevant heading. Number of columns output dependant on the MaxRows property.
MultipleVertical (Across/Down) - Layout of data items is Across > Down. Number of columns output dependant on the MaxRows property.
MultipleHorizontal (Down/Across) - Layout of data items is Down > Across. Number of columns output dependant on the MaxRows property.
See also
MaxRows (on page 447)
446
Styles
MaxColumns
Defines the maximum number of columns before a new row is started when using multiple tables or the maximum number of entries for a single horizontal table.
MaxRows
ShowEnclosure
Controls whether cut list enclosures are shown. True - Cut list enclosures are shown. False - Cut list enclosures are not shown.
StartX
Defines the bottom left hand X position of the first line of the cut list in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
StartY
Defines the bottom left hand Y position of the first line of the cut list in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
TextFont
Defines the font to be used. Select an appropriate font from the list.
TextHeight
Set the text height to be used on the cut list in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
447
Styles
TextWeight
Controls the character thickness. Define a value between 1 and 9. Only used for MicroStation.
TextWidthFactor
Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height to be used for output of the cut list.
VerticalDirection
Sets the vertical direction for the cut list. Up - Cut list goes up. Down - Cut list goes down.
VerticalSpacing
Sets the vertical spacing required between each row of the cut list output when the table is vertically formatted or two dimensional. Type a value in mm or inches (real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
Count
Displays the number of columns in the UserDefined cut list report plotted on the isometric drawing.
448
Styles
CutList UserDefined XYColumns Collection

The CutList UserDefined XYColumns collection is used to define the data output for three userdefined lists: material, weld and cut lists. This must be used with a backing sheet, as the positions given are for the X coordinate only. You can define the following properties: AttributeName (on page 450) Offset (on page 450) MaxChars (on page 450)
To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Offset and MaxChars properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then press Enter.
See also
449
Styles AttributeName Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute. Offset Specifies the offset in mm from the StartX and StartY. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) MaxChars Defines the maximum number of characters.
450
Styles
CutList SummaryFile Object

The CutList SummaryFile object controls which type of cut list summary file is created - Fixed or UserDefined. The following properties control such things as the type of file--Append or Overwrite--and in the case of a user-defined file, set the header and title information for the file. Enabled (on page 452) Path (on page 452) Append (on page 452) UserDefined (on page 453) FileFormat (on page 453) Delimiter (on page 453) HeaderLines (on page 453) ShowHeaders (on page 454) TitleText (on page 454) ShowTitles (on page 454) Count (on page 454)
451
Styles When you click SummaryFile in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows all of the properties that are currently defined for the selected object.
Enabled
True - Enables the export of cut list summary details to the material list definition file (MLD). False - Suppress the export of cut list summary details to the material list definition file (MLD).
Path
Specify the path to the cut list summary file to be created by ISOGEN.
452
Styles
Append
UserDefined
Controls whether the cut list summary file uses the properties of the CutList SummaryFile object to control the data and headings output to the cut list summary file, or if the old, standard cut list summary file is created. True - Uses the properties of the CutList SummaryFile object. False - Uses the old style cut list summary file.
See also
CutList SummaryFile Object (on page 450)
FileFormat
Delimiter
Defines the character used as a delimiter when the file format is delimited. The possible characters are: Blank Comma (,) Semi-colon (;) Colon ():
453
Styles
HeaderLines
Specifies the text string for the column header. You can use the following: \ - Start a new line. | - Produces a vertical break.
ShowHeaders
Controls whether header lines are shown. True - Shows the header lines. False - Does not show the header lines.
TitleText
ShowTitles
Count
Displays the number of attributes to be output to the material list cut list summary file.
454
Styles
CutList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection

The CutList SummaryFile TextColumns collection stores the definitions of the data to be output to the cut list summary report file. You can define the following properties: AttributeName (on page 455) Justification (on page 456) Start (on page 456) MaxChars (on page 456)
See also
455
Styles AttributeName Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute. Justification Defines the justification for the text. Use the list to select either Left or Right. Start Defines the start column for the output data on a fixed format file, and specifies the field number for a delimited file. MaxChars Specifies the maximum number of characters.
456
Styles
Supplementary Object
The Supplementary object itself has no properties, but it does contain several other sub-objects, as follows: AdditionalData object (see "Supplementary AdditionalData Object" on page 458) AuxiliaryPrograms object (see "Supplementary AuxiliaryPrograms Object" on page 460) BendingReport object (see "Supplementary BendingReport Object" on page 462) CentreOfGravity object (see "Supplementary CentreOfGravity Object" on page 464) DataFiles object (see "Supplementary DataFiles Object" on page 468) DetailSketches object (see "Supplementary DetailSketches Object" on page 495) DwgInfoFile object (see "Supplementary DwgInfoFile Object" on page 506) EquipmentTrim object (see "Supplementary EquipmentTrim Object" on page 510) Fonts object (see "Supplementary Fonts Object" on page 512) HeatTreatment object (see "Supplementary HeatTreatment Object" on page 514) InstrumentSKEYS object (see "Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS Object" on page 519) PipeLineAtts object (see "Supplementary PipeLineAtts Object" on page 520) ReferencePlanes object (see "Supplementary ReferencePlanes Object" on page 525) RepeatFile object (see "Supplementary RepeatFile Object" on page 528) ReportFiles object (see "Supplementary ReportFiles Object" on page 532) SiteWeldFile object (see "Supplementary SiteWeldFile Object" on page 536) SpoolInformation object (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation Object" on page 542) TableAttributes object (see "Supplementary TableAttributes Object" on page 546) TitleTexts object (see "Supplementary TitleTexts Object" on page 551)
457
Styles Traceability object (see "Supplementary TitleTexts Object" on page 551)
458
Styles
Supplementary AdditionalData Object

The Supplementary AdditionalData object allows data to be added to the data definition file (DDF) by specifying the additions as a text string. When you click the Supplementary AdditionalData object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel displays all the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Enabled (on page 459) DDFLines (on page 460)
459
Styles
Enabled
Controls whether the data in the DDFLines property is added to the drawing definition file (DDF). True - Data is included. False - Data is excluded.
See also
DDFLines (on page 460)
DDFLines
Specifies the text to be added to the data definition file. When you double-click the DDFLines box, the software opens a text editor and displays the current text (if any exists). You can use the text editor to set the data lines to be added to the data definition file.
Click File > Update to add the text, or click File > Cancel to close the text editor without saving the changes.
460
Styles
Supplementary AuxiliaryPrograms Object

The Supplementary AuxilliaryPrograms object controls the running of auxiliary programs-custom pre- or post-processing utilities. When you click the Supplementary AuxilliaryPrograms object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows all of the properties that are currently defined for the selected object. StartProgram (on page 461) StartTimeout (on page 462) StopOnError (on page 462) EndProgram (on page 462)
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.
461
Styles
StartProgram
Allows a pre-processor program to be specified, which is run before Personal ISOGEN runs. 1. Double-click in the StartProgram data field. 2. In the Specify path for file, click Browse click OK. and navigate to the appropriate file and then
StartTimeout
Defines a time in seconds after which the pre-processor or post-processor program does not run.
StopOnError
Controls whether Personal ISOGEN is run if the pre-processor program experiences an error and fails. True - Personal Isogen does not run if the pre-processor fails. False - Personal Isogen still runs if the pre-processor fails.
EndProgram
Allows a post-processor program to be specified, which is run after Personal ISOGEN runs. 1. Double-click in the EndProgram data field. 2. In the Specify path for file, click Browse click OK. and navigate to the appropriate file and then
462
Styles
Supplementary BendingReport Object

The Supplementary BendingReport object controls the content and output of the bending and cutting information report file. When you click the Supplementary BendingReport object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel displays all the currently defined properties for that object. Enabled (on page 463) Path (on page 464) Append (on page 431) ReportContents (on page 464)
463
Styles
Enabled
Controls whether file is created. True - File is created. False - File is not created.
Path
1. Double-click in the Path data field. In the Specify path for file, click Browse OK. and navigate to the appropriate file and then click
Append
ReportContents
Controls the contents of the bending report. Standard - Pipe fabrication information including details of each cut piece, listing the length, diameter, end preparation, material part number, and other related details to assist manufacturing. In addition bending information giving distances to/between bends, angle and radius details are also output. Full - Pipe fabrication information as for Standard, but also including details to enable profiling the shaped ends of pipe and the cutting of holes, such as for tees, olets, crosses, and so on.
464
Styles
Supplementary CentreOfGravity Object

The Supplementary CentreOfGravity object controls the data which is output for center of gravity and wet (pipe contains fluid) and dry (pipe empty of fluid) weight calculations, including or excluding insulation weight. When you click the Supplementary CentreOfGravity in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows all of the properties that are currently defined for the selected object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Enabled (on page 465) ForDryPipe (on page 466) ForWetPipe (on page 466) PerPipeLine (on page 467) ShowInsulationWeight (on page 467) ShowWetWeight (on page 467)
465
Styles
Enabled
Controls whether any center of gravity and weight calculations are done. True - Those center of gravity and weight calculations which are set by ForDryPIpe , ForWetPipe , ShowInsulationWeight and ShowWetWeight properties are calculated. False - All four center of gravity and weight calculations suppressed.
Defines OS 82 Pos 1
See also
ForDryPIpe (on page 466) ForWetPipe (on page 466) ShowInsulationWeight (on page 467) ShowWetWeight (on page 467)
ForDryPipe
Controls which center of gravity calculations are done for dry (empty) pipe. Not Required - Center of gravity for dry pipe not required. Calc C of G - Center of gravity calculated for dry pipe. Calc C of G with Insulation - Center of gravity calculated for insulated dry pipe. Calc C of G with and without Insulation - Center of gravity calculated for dry pipe and insulated dry pipe.
Calculated values can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities, or output in a Weight/CofG summary report. Defines OS 82 Pos 4
ForWetPipe
Controls which center of gravity calculations are done for wet (full) pipe. Not Required - Center of gravity for wet pipe not required. Calc C of G - Center of gravity calculated for wet pipe. Calc C of G with Insulation - Center of gravity calculated for insulated wet pipe. Calc C of G with and without Insulation - Center of gravity calculated for wet pipe and insulated wet pipe.
Calculated values can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities, or output in a Weight/CofG summary report. Defines OS 82 Pos 5
466
Styles
PerPipeLine
Controls whether the center of gravity and weight calculations are per pipeline or per drawing/spool. The Enabled property must also be set to True. True - Calculations are per pipeline. False - Calculations are per drawing/spool.
Defines OS 82 Pos 1
See also
Enabled (on page 465)
ShowInsulationWeight
Controls whether insulation weight is calculated. True - Insulation weight is calculated. False - Insulation weight not calculated.
Insulation weight can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities, or in a Weight/CofG summary report. Defines OS 82 Pos 3
ShowWetWeight
Controls whether wet (full) weight is calculated. True - Wet weight is calculated. False - Wet weight not calculated.
Wet weight can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities, or in a Weight/CofG summary report. Defines OS 82 Pos 2
467
Styles
Supplementary DataFiles Object

The Supplementary DataFiles object has a collection called ISOGENFiles, which is used to store the names of input files used by ISOGEN, and the file path for the particular file. The object contains a single property, Count, which is set by the software and indicates the number of objects in the ISOGENFiles (see "Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles Collection" on page 469) collection.
See also
Count (on page 468) Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 469)
468
Styles
Count
Displays the number of local detail sketches/information notes in the LocalSketch collection.
Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles Collection

The Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles collection stores the types and path of each individual input data file used by ISOGEN (this style). FileType (on page 470) FilePath (on page 471) FileText (on page 535)
See also
469
Styles FileType Double-click in the FileType data box and then use the FileType list to select the type of input data file. You can choose from the following:
ASCII-SYMBOL (see "ASCII-SYMBOLS" on page 471) BENDING-DATABASE-FILE (see "Supplementary BendingReport Object" on page 462) BINARY-SYMBOLS (on page 471) BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE (on page 471) COMPONENT-INFORMATION (see "COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE" on page 471) FUNCTION-DEFINITION (see "FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE" on page 473) INSULATION-WEIGHT (see "INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE" on page 475) PROJECT-MATERIAL-DATA (see "PROJECT-MATERIALDATA" on page 476) PROJECT-MATERIAL-MANAGER (see "PROJECT-MATERIALMANAGER" on page 476) PROJECT-PIPELINE (on page 476) REMARKS (on page 478) OPTION-SWITCH-LONG DRAWING-DEFINITION POSITIONED-TEXT ALTERNATIVE-TEXT MATERIAL-LIST-DEFINITION WELDING-DEFINITION TITLE-BLOCK SPECIAL-INSTRUMENTS SPECIFIC-GRAVITY (see "INSULATIONWEIGHT-FILE" on page 475) Contains the specific gravity values for pipeline fluid or gas contents. User now have the option of specifying an alternative file (in the Supplementary DataFiles). ASCII version of the ISOGEN symbol file. Bending, cutting and hole information file.
Binary version of the ISOGEN symbol file. Bolting information file. Contains detailed information related to individual components. Defines the content and structure of other files that form part of the Component Information facilities. Contains weights of insulation on a bore / unit length basis for each Insulation specification. System specified.
System specified.
System specified. Remarks data file. User alternative control files.
470
Styles
FilePath Defines the file path. 1. Double-click the FilePath box. 2. In the Specify path for file dialog box, navigate to the appropriate file and then click OK.
FileText 1. Double-click the FileText box. 2. In the text editor that displays, edit the data as necessary. 3. Click File > Update to save your changes. To close the text editor without saving your changes, click File > Cancel.
File Types
ASCII-SYMBOLS
This file contains definitions of the user-defined ISOGEN symbols, such as new and re-defined SKEYS. Information in this file is used to override default ISOGEN behavior when plotting shapes in the isometric drawing to represent components in the pipeline. This item points to the ASCII (human-readable) form of the symbol data. It can be created using the ISOGEN Symbols editor software.
BINARY-SYMBOLS
This file contains definitions of the user-defined ISOGEN symbols, such as new and re-defined SKEYS. Information in this file is used to override default ISOGEN behavior when plotting shapes in the Isometric drawing to represent components in the pipeline. This item points to the BINARY (computer-readable) form of the symbol data. It can be created using the ISOGEN Symbols editor software.
BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE
The BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE contains the look up data to allow ISOGEN to produce reports on the bolted connections in the pipeline. For a description of the contents of this file, see FDF BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT (on page 478).
471
Styles
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE
For each component entry, the CIF holds the following items of information: Design contractor's item code (the Item code in the input Piping data file). Main and secondary component bores. Main and secondary Thickness/Ratings. Fabricator's item code. Fabricator's material description. Component weight.
This is the maximum amount of information that can be held for each component. What actually appears depends upon what facilities are actually being used. The structure/layout of the CIF file is defined by the COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE Section of the FUNCTION DEFINITION FILE.
CIF Rules Summary

1. Weight data in the CIF takes precedence over weights in the Piping data file; however, in the event of missing values, SmartPlant Spoolgen can supplement the data in the CIF by searching the Piping data file. 2. I the C of G facility is to be used then component weight information must be available in either the CIF or the Piping data files. 3. Several ITEM-CODE-IDENTIFIER entries can be made in the CIF to cater for a variety of different Design Contractor or Fabricator item codes. (The actual ones to be used are specified in the COMPONENT- INFORMATION-SELECTION section of the FDF file). 4. For those who want to handle projects with Metric bore Piping data files and Imperial bore Piping data files, if required, two sets of N.S. and N.S.SEC information can be included in a CIF, with both projects sharing the one CIF. However, where this is done, two separate FDFs are required in order to specify the required N.S. to be used on a particular project.
Item Codes in the CIF

Item codes for components in the CIF can be constructed (and hence specified) in two different ways, thus: 1. In the form of unique codes with built-in bore information: E.g. E-90-CS1-40:3 - this is an elbow of 3" bore E-90-CS1-40:4 - this is the same elbow, but of 4" bore R-C-CS1-40:4X3 - this is a concentric reducer of bore 4" X 3". This type of Item code does not need N.S. and N.S.SEC data fields to specify the bore information because this is built-in to the Item code. 1. Codes having separate bores: E.g.
472
Styles E-90-CS1-40 R-C-CS1-40 This type of Item code does need N.S. and N.S.SEC data fields to completely identify the component. There are no rules as to whom should use which of the two types of item code construction. Some Design contractors use the first type.
See also
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE Section (on page 481) FUNCTION DEFINITION FILE. (on page 473)
FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE
The function definition file (FDF) provides the following functions: 1. It defines the units (see "UNITS-DEFINITION Section" on page 489) for Lengths Weights Nominal sizes
2. It defines the content and structure of other files that form part of the Component Information Facilities, namely: COMPONENT INFORMATION FILE (CIF) (on page 471) INSULATION WEIGHT FILE (IWF) (on page 475) SPECIFIC GRAVITY FILE (SGF) (on page 478)
3. Through a system of cross-reference pointers in the COMPONENT-INFORMATIONSELECTION Section, (on page 483) it defines the functions of the various columns of data in the COMPONENT INFORMATION FILE (on page 471) . 4. Bend Radius (see "MISC-DEFINITIONS Section" on page 485) identification. 5. The format of the Weight and C of G summary file (on page 490) . 6. Definition of IDF changes (on page 484) - where nominated IDF record types can have their normal use either changed or deleted. 7. The format of the Bolting output (on page 478) Pipeline attribute file (on page 475) HeatTreatment/NDE file ( on page 474) Site Assembly report ( on page 486) Spool attribute file (on page 488)
473
Styles The FDF has several sections, each having a keyword identifier UNITS-DEFINITION ( on page 489) COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (on page 481) COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION (on page 483) INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE (on page 485) SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE (on page 486) MISC-DEFINITIONS (on page 485) WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE ( on page 490) IDF-REVISIONS (on page 484) BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT (on page 478) PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (on page 475) HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE (on page 474) SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT (on page 486) SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (on page 488)
Each of these sections then has its own list of data inputs.
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE
This FDF section defines the format of the HeatTreatment/NDE file, which must be defined in the Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles collection. The section heading HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE is followed by the following identifiers and associated data: DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the HeatTreatment/NDE attribute file. (Optional). IGNORE_CHARACTER data - Where data is any character that should be ignored when the software is extracting data for the HeatTreatment/NDE attribute file if it is a delimited file. (Optional). Data Items - The data items are the -900 to -999 series text type record identifiers, followed by either start-col,. end-col,. or position in file dependent upon whether a delimiter character is set. The data after the ! is a comment for user information, as shown in the following example:
FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE DELIMITER-CHARACTER , -950 2 ! PWHT N.S. RANGE -951 3 ! PWHT TEMPERATURE -952 4 ! PREHEAT N.S RANGE -953 5 ! PREHEAT TEMPERATURE -954 6 ! % RT -955 7 ! % MT -956 8 ! % PT -957 9 ! % BHN
See also
Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 469)
474
Styles
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE
Contains weights of insulation on a bore/unit length basis for each insulation specification. This is needed if Insulation weights are to be calculated and output. CAL199 CAL199 CAL199 CAL199 CAL199 CAL199 CAL199 1/2 3/4 1 1.04 1.04 1.04
1.1/4 1.04 1.1/2 1.19 2 1.49 2.1/2 1.63
OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE
You can specify an OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE file, which can contain specific values for particular option switches:
130 6 139 12
The switches in the previous example override any value output by SmartPlant I-Configure. Alternatively, switch positions can be specified using a * to indicate an unchanged switch position. For example, to set switch 1 position 3 to 4, type the following in the file:
1 4**
Likewise, to set switch 10 position 5 to 1, and position 2 to 3, type the following:

10 1**3*
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE
This FDF section defines the format of the Pipeline attributes file, which must be defined in the Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles collection. The section heading PIPELINEATTRIBUTE-FILE is followed by the following identifiers and associated data. DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the Pipeline attribute file. (Optional). IGNORE_CHARACTER data - Where data is any character that should be ignored when the program is extracting data for the Pipeline attribute file if it is a delimited file. (Optional).
The data items are the -900 to -999 series text type record identifiers, followed by either startcol. end-col. or position in file dependent upon whether a delimiter character is set. The data after the ! is a comment for user information.
FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE DELIMITER-CHARACTER , -900 1 ! LINE REF. -901 2 ! P-ID FROM -902 3 ! P-ID TO -903 4 ! UNIT NO.
475
Styles
-904 -905 -906 -907 -908 -909 -910 -911 -912 -913 -914 -915 -916 5 ! SERVICE CODE 6 ! PAINT CODE 7 ! OPERATING TEMP. 8 ! DESIGN TEMP. 9 ! OPERATING PRESSURE 10 ! DESIGN PRESSURE 11 ! TEST PRESSURE 12 ! TEST TYPE 13 ! INSULATION THKS. 14 ! HEAT TRACING 15 ! INSULATION CODE 16 ! DESIGN CODE 17 ! MATERIAL
If the pipeline attribute mechanism is being used, do not add the same record to the project defaults. Doing so overwrites the data when the isometric is being created by the data in the Pipeline attributes file.
See also
Project Defaults (on page 37) Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 469)
PROJECT-MATERIALDATA
The file contains data to add to, or override the information in the SystemMaterialData.xml file. This defines the available component types, SKEYs, PCF data and groups (and the mapping between them) for use in other software, such as SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen. This item only needs to be set on one of the mandatory import styles such as SGImport or ISImport - if such a file has been created for use on a particular project.
PROJECT-MATERIALMANAGER
The file contains data that adds to or overrides the information in the SystemMaterialManager.xml file. This defines the attributes available for materials used in other software, such as SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen. This item only needs to be set on one of the mandatory import styles such as SGImport or ISImport - if such a file has been created for use on a particular project.
PROJECT-PIPELINE
The file contains data that adds to or overrides the information in the SystemPOD.xml file. This defines the attributes available for different objects, such as pipelines, components, and welds, that are used in other products such as SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen. By default this item is set on the mandatory SGImport and ISImport styles delivered with SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen respectively. This setting should not normally be changed.
REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION
ISOGEN can be configured to display the coordinates of nominated points in the pipeline relative to a reference plane, rather than as absolute values. The nominated points are indicated by the presence of LOCATION-POINT entries in the PCF. The reference plane can be a set of
476
Styles steel columns and floor levels in a process plant, or it can be a set of decks and bulkheads in a ship. The reference planes are defined in a file and properties of this object are used to control how ISOGEN behaves when plotting the location points. A location point table can be defined and plotted on the isometric drawing. Optionally, location points can be shown with coordinates. Six AlternateText numbers have been assigned to output relative directions. -443 ^ + ? (used for positive relative position in e/w plane). -444 ^ - ? (used for negative relative position in e/w plane). -445 ^ + ? (used for positive relative position in n/s plane). -446 ^ - ? (used for negative relative position in n/s plane). -447 ^ + ? (used for positive relative position in u/d plane). -448 ^ - ? (used for negative relative position in u/d plane). ^ is substituted with the reference plane name. ? is substituted with the distance from the reference plane.
An AlternateText record has been assigned to be output as a delimiter text between the relative direction and its relative position. -449 = (default setting)
449 AlternateText set to blank only outputs the relative position.
477
Styles
See also
Supplementary ReferencePlanes Object (on page 525) Location Points (on page 588)
REMARKS
The Remarks file contains a set of texts (remarks) that can be associated with components in the pipeline by setting the Remark property. The file has the following format:
Remark# Remark 1 Remark1 2 Remark2
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY
Contains the specific gravity values for pipeline fluid or gas contents. Each pipeline in the project needs to have an entry in this file if the weight of full--or wet weight--pipelines are required to be output.
4"-DDE-4325 4"-ARR-6000 6"-ASC-6900 1.1 1.0 1.2
FDF Sections
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT
This FDF section defines the format of the output for Bolted connections on the Erection operations list. The section heading BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT is followed by the following three sub-section headings, each of which has its own data items: BOLTING-INFO-CONTROLS List - (MANDATORY) The form of list to be output, either:
CONTINUOUS-DOWN CONTINUOUS-UP
478
Styles Start Position - (MANDATORY) Information to identify the START - POSITION for the output of the bolting Information (where X pos and Y pos are input in mm--real (one decimal place) or integer, such as 225, or 225.0, or 225.5).
START-POSITION X pos Y pos
Vertical Spacing - (MANDATORY) The vertical spacing required between each horizontal line of text on the bolting information list (where value is input in mm--real (one decimal place) or integer, such as 6, 6.0, or 6.2).
VERTICAL-SPACING value
Max Number of Lines - (MANDATORY) The maximum number of output lines that can fit on the backing sheet (where the value is an integer number).
MAXIMUM-ENTRIES value
Text Height - The height of the characters in the text to be output on the bolting information list (where value is real (one decimal place) or integer, such as 2, 2.0, or 2.3_)
TEXT-HEIGHT value (in mm)
Drawing Layer - (OPTIONAL) Identification of the drawing layer for outputting the text on to (where value is an integer number that is valid for the graphics system being used).
DRAWING-LAYER value
Text Thickness (Weight) - (OPTIONAL) Identification of the text thickness (weight) for all output text to the bolting information list (where value is an integer number that is valid for the graphics system being used).
TEXT-THICKNESS value

BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT - - - - - - BOLTING-INFO-CONTROL CONTINUOUS-DOWN START-POSITION VERTICAL-SPACING TEXT-HEIGHT MAXIMUM-ENTRIES DRAWING-LAYER TEXT-THICKNESS Section Header
450.0 4.0 2.5 12 16 2
106.0
BOLTING-DATA-ITEMS BOLT-SET NO - Bolted connection number - generated by the system. N.S. - Nominal size at bolted connection. Output in this format: - 4" = 040. BOLT-UP-TYPE - One of these values from the related piping specification entry in the bolting information file (-146 type).
HT HW MW NW
BOLT-DIA - Diameter of the bolts used for the flanged connection. Taken from the 115 bolt record in the IDF. Output in this format: - " = 050 " = 007 1" = 010 . BOLT-QUANTITY - Number of bolts required for the flanged connection. Taken (two digits) from the 115 bolt record in the IDF. TENSION-A: Any value set in the BIF (-146) file against the relevant piping specification / size combination. 479
Styles TENSION-B: Any value found to go into relevant column on operations list. TORQUE-SETTING Each of the previous is followed by the X position for location on the drawing frame. Consider the following example:
BOLTING-INFO-DATA-ITEMS 'BOLT-SET-NO' 450.0 'N.S.' 463.0 'BOLT-UP-TYPE' 486.0 'BOLT-DIA' 504.0 'BOLT-QUANTITY' 522.0 'TENSION-A' 540.0 'TENSION-B' 558.0 'TORQUE-SETTING 576.0
BOLTING-INFO-FILE 'PIPINGSPEC MINN.S. MAXN.S. BOLTUPTYPE TENSIONA TENSIONB Start Col Start Col Start Col Start Col Start Col Start Col End Col End Col End Col End Col End Col End Col
TORQUESETTING Start Col End Col Where Start Col and End Col indicate the extremities of each data column in the file. MINN.S. and MAX-N.S. - Must be stated in the Units specified at the top of the FDF file. BOLTUPTYPE - Must be one of the following: HT = Hydraulic Tensioner HW = Hydraulic Wrench MW = Manual Torque Wrench NW = Non Mandatory (Hand Tightening)
TENSION-A, TENSIONB or TORQUESETTING -
All entries on the list are triggered by the presence of a Bolt Record (-115 type) in the IDF or the attribute BOLT in a PCF. Each bolted connection is indicated on the isometric using the following properties: SiteAssemblyIDs (on page 273) SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 272) SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing (on page 274) SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 270)
480
Styles The site assembly uses AText -478, default J to prefix the flange assembly identification (J1 or JA). Considering the following example:
BOLTINGINFOFILE PIPINGSPEC MINN.S. MAXN.S. BOLTUPTYPE TENSIONA TENSIONB TORQUESETTING 1 15 23 32 35 50 65 12 20 29 33 45 60 75
See also
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT (on page 486)
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE Section
This FDF Section provides a cross-reference to entries in the Component Information File (CIF) by defining the layout and content of that file. The section heading COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE is followed by the following identifiers and associated data.
ITEM-CODE-IDENTIFIER N.S. N.S.SEC N.S.THIRD N.S.THICKNESS/RATING N.S.SEC.THICKNESS/RATING N.S.WALL-THICKNESS N.S.SEC.WALL-THICKNESS DESCRIPTION COMPONENT-WEIGHT COMPONENT-CONTENT-WEIGHT EQUIVILANT-INSULATION-LENGTH N.S.CONVERSION-CODE RADIUS-DIAMETERS RADIUS-MM RADIUS-INCH DETAILED-SKETCH INFORMATION-NOTE COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 (-190 tom -199) MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE10 (-80 to -89) User Defined Names matching those used in the PCF file
DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the Component Information File (on page 471).
481
Styles Each of the following is followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending on whether a delimiter character is set.
FDF Identifier ITEM-CODE-IDENTIFIER Used For 1) Design contractors item code. 2) Fabricator's item code. N.S. The main bore of a component specified in accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in the UNITS-DEFINITION section of the FDF. The secondary bore of a component - specified in accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in the UNITS-DEFINITION section of the FDF. A third bore of a component specified in accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in the UNITS-DEFINITION section of the FDF. Thickness/Rating for the main bore of a component. Thickness/Rating for the secondary bore of a component. The outside diameter of the main bore of the component. The outside diameter of the secondary bore of the component. The wall thickness of the main bore of the component. The wall thickness of the secondary bore of the component. Fabricator's Material descriptions. The weight of a component - in the weight units specified in accordance with the UNITSWEIGHT Identifier in the UNITSDEFINITION section of the FDF. The weight of the components water volume specified in accordance with the UNITSWEIGHT Identifier in the UNITSDEFINITION section of the FDF. For PIPE the weight specified heres the weight per unit length for the length units specified in the UNITS-LENGTH Identifier in the UNITS-DEFINITION section of the FDF. The main bore of a component specified in accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in the UNITSDEFINITION section of the FDF. The secondary bore of a component specified in accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in the UNITSDEFINITION section of the FDF. A third bore of a component specified in accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in the UNITSDEFINITION section of the FDF. Thickness/Rating for the main bore of a component. Thickness/Rating for the secondary bore of a component. The outside diameter of the main bore of the component. The outside diameter of the secondary bore of the component. The wall thickness of the main bore of the component. The wall thickness of the secondary bore of the component. Fabricator's Material descriptions. The weight of a component - in the weight units specified in accordance with the UNITS-WEIGHT Identifier in the UNITS- DEFINITION section of the FDF. The weight of the components water volume specified in accordance with the UNITS-WEIGHT Identifier in the UNITS- DEFINITION section of the FDF. For PIPE the weight specified heres the weight per unit length for the length units specified in the UNITS-LENGTH Identifier in the UNITS-DEFINITION section of the FDF. Used For 2) Fabricator's item code.
N.S.SEC
N.S.THIRD
N.S.THICKNESS/RATING N.S.SEC.THICKNESS/RATING N.S.OUTSIDE-DIAMETER N.S.SEC.OUTSIDE-DIAMETER N.S.WALL-THICKNESS N.S.SEC.WALL-THICKNESS DESCRIPTION COMPONENT-WEIGHT
COMPONENT-CONTENT-WEIGHT
482
Styles
FDF Identifier EQUIVILANT-INSULATIONLENGTH Used For Used to equate the component insulation weight to a length based weight. Values here are the equivalent length of insulation in accordance with the weight and length units in the UNITS- LENGTH and UNITS-WEIGHT Identifiers in the UNITS- DEFINITION section of the FDF. This is used where the N.S. and N.S. Header output on the Weld list and Weld summary outputs is to be replaced by a user supplied code. Bend radius specified as a number of diameters. Bend radius specified in mm. Bend radius specified in mm. Detail sketch file name. Information note name. Data for Component attributes. Used For Used to equate the component insulation weight to a length based weight. Values here are the equivalent length of insulation in accordance with the weight and length units in the UNITS- LENGTH and UNITS-WEIGHT Identifiers in the UNITS- DEFINITION section of the FDF. This is used where the N.S. and N.S. Header output on the Weld list and Weld summary outputs is to be replaced by a user supplied code. Bend radius specified as a number of diameters. Bend radius specified in mm. Bend radius specified in mm. Detail sketch file name. Information note name. Data for Component attributes.
N.S.CONVERSION-CODE
RADIUS-DIAMETERS RADIUS-MM RADIUS-INCH DETAILED-SKETCH INFORMATION-NOTE COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to MATERIAL- ATTRIBUTE10 User-defined names matching those used in the PCF file.
Data for Material attributes. Data for user-defined names.
Data for Material attributes. Data for user-defined names.
The actual number of these data items present will depend upon which of the available facilities are being used. The maximum width of the file is 500 characters and any characters outside this limit are ignored.
483
Styles
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION Section
This FDF section provides a link between the Design contractor's item code that appears in the Piping data file and the location of the corresponding entry for that component in the COMPONENT INFORMATION-FILE. (on page 471) This FDF section defines: Design Contractors Item Code Alternative Item Code Alternative Description
The section heading COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION is followed by the following Identifiers:

ITEM-CODE-INPUT data ITEM-CODE-OUTPUT data DESCRIPTION data Where data is either a start column or file position, dependent upon whether the Component Information file is a delimited file or not. The minimum requirement in this section is the Input Item code: COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION (section identifier) ITEM-CODE-INPUT 1 Alternatively, if Item Code Transposition and Material Description Substitution were being used the file would look like this: COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION (section identifier) ITEM-CODE-INPUT 1 ITEM-CODE-OUTPUT 51 DESCRIPTION 76 Or for a Delimited file. COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION (section identifier) ITEM-CODE-INPUT 1 ITEM-CODE-OUTPUT 7 DESCRIPTION 10
484
Styles
IDF-REVISIONS Section
The IDF-REVISIONS FDF section allows you to delete or change the meaning of the numeric record identifiers that are present in all IDFs in order to make them fully compatible with ISOGEN. This facility is particularly useful to those customers who use the Component Information facility, but who are handling non-standard Alias IDFs, such as IDFs generated by PDMS. The IDF-REVISIONS section heading is followed by one or several of these entries, depending on what manipulation of records needs to be performed: DELETE-RECORD data - Where data = any invalid record number that is to be ignored. CHANGE-RECORD data1 data2 - Where data1 = any invalid record number and data2= the replacement record number for data1. REDEFINED-SKEY data1 data2 - Where data 1 is the SKEY in the IDF file and data2 is the SKEY to be used instead.
The previous examples are for illustrative purposes only--do not use them. If you need assistance, contact Intergraph Support.
IDF-REVISIONS DELETE-RECORD -900 CHANGE-RECORD 707 877 REDEFINED-SKEY LWWN FLWN
INSULTATION-WEIGHT-FILE Section
This FDF section provides a cross reference to entries in the insulation weight file (IWF) by defining the layout and content of that file. The INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE section heading can be followed by the following identifiers and associated data: DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the insulation weight file, as shown in the following example:
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE DELIMITER-CHARACTER : INSULATION-SPECIFICATION 1 N.S. 2 INSULATION-WEIGHT 3
Start-col. End-col. - Position in the file dependent upon whether a delimiter character is set, as shown in the following example:
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE INSULATION-SPECIFICATION 1 14 N.S. 15 24 INSULATION-WEIGHT 25 34
485
Styles
MISC-DEFINITIONS Section
This FDF section is for facilities that do not warrant their own separate section. Currently, it is only used to define BEND RADIUS values. The input structure in this FDF section is a section heading:
MISC-DEFINITIONS
followed by the bend radius definition:

BEND-RADIUS data units
where data = the pipe bend radius. units = Inch or mm, when radius is a value, and D when the radius is a number of pipe diameters.
MISC-DEFINITIONS BEND-RADIUS 5 D Other typical data inputs are: BEND-RADIUS 3 D BEND-RADIUS 5.5 D BEND-RADIUS 12 INCH BEND-RADIUS 18.5 INCH BEND-RADIUS 220 MM BEND-RADIUS 1250 MM
Consider the following:
Bend radius information is used by both the C of G and weights facilities.
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE Section
This FDF section provides a cross reference to entries in the specific gravity file (SGF) by defining the layout and content of that file. The SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE section heading is followed by the following identifiers and associated data. DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the specific gravity file . PIPELINE-REFERENCE - Followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending on whether a delimiter character is used. SPECIFIC-GRAVITY - Followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending on whether a delimiter character is used.
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE PIPELINE-REFERENCE SPECIFIC-GRAVITY
Start col. end col. Example

1 20 21 30
Delimiter Example
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE DELIMITER-CHARACTER : PIPELINE-REFERENCE SPECIFIC-GRAVITY 1 2
486
Styles
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT
This FDF section defines the format of the output for the Site assembly report. The section heading SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT is followed by 2 sub section heading: SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-COLUMN-HEADINGS - The column headings are arranged and spaced out just as they are required to appear in the output report file, as shown in the following example:
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-COLUMN-HEADINGS LINEREF DRG ASSY NS BOLT NO ASSY NO NO DIA OFF ATT1
The column headings look out of line in the example as the space character is narrower than an actual character. SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-DATA-ITEMS - Permissible data items are: Unique Name PIPELINEREFERENCE DRG REVISION BATCH AREA PROJECTIDENTIFIER PIPING-SPEC NOMINAL-CLASS NOMINAL-RATING DATE-DMY INSULATION-SPEC TRACING-SPEC PAINTING-SPEC PIPELINE-TEMP MISC-SPEC1 MISC-SPEC2 MISC-SPEC3 MISC-SPEC4 MISC-SPEC5 IDF Record Number -6 -8 -10 -10 -9 -11 -12 -12 -14 -15 -16 -17 -19 -41 -42 -43 -44 -45
487
Styles Unique Name BOLT-SET-NO N.S. BOLT-UP-TYPE BOLT-DIA BOLT-QUANTITY TENSION-A TENSION-B TORQUE-SETTING ATTRIBURE0 to ATTRIBUTE99 ATTRIBUTE100 to ATTRIBUTE199 ASSEMBLYATTRIBUTE1 to ASSEMBLYATTRIBUTE10 Consider the following example:
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-DATA-ITEMS 'PIPELINE-REFERENCE' 1 L 'DRG' 10 L 'BOLT-SET-NO' 15 L 'N.S.' 21 L 'BOLT-DIA' 26 L 'BOLT-QUANTITY' 36 L 'ASSEMBLY-ATTRIBUTE1' 45 L
IDF Record Number -600 to -699 -900 to -999 -190 to -199
All the above is carried out in SmartPlant I-Configure, the Assembly attribute is set in the software (SmartPlant Spoolgen) by selecting each bolt and then setting the value for the Assembly attribute on that bolt. The data items BOLT-UP-TYPE, TENSION-A, TENSION-B and TORQUESETTING require the bolting info file (BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT section of FDF).
See also
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT (on page 478)
488
Styles
SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE
This FDF section defines the format of the spool attribute file, which must be defined in the Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles collection. The SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE section heading is followed by the following identifiers and associated data. DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the Spool attribute file. (Optional). IGNORE_CHARACTER data - Where data is any character that should be ignored when the program is extracting data for the Spool attribute file if it is a delimited file. (Optional).
The data items are -28, -91, -170 to -179, followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending on whether a delimiter character is set. This can be followed by an ! as a comment for user information. Consider the following example:
SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE DELIMITER-CHARACTER ; IGNORE-CHARACTER -28 1 ! Spool Name -170 2 ! Spool Attribute 1 -171 3 ! Spool Attribute 2
See also
Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 469)
489
Styles
UNITS-DEFINITION Section
This FDF section defines the following units for data items listed in the COMPONENTINFORMATION-FILE (CIF): Unit Length Weight Nominal Size (N.S.)
The section heading UNITS-DEFINITION is followed by the following identifiers and associated data. UNITS-BORE data - Where data = Inch or mm. UNITS-LENGTH data - Where data = Foot (Weights / Foot) or Meter (Weights / Meter). UNITS-WEIGHT data - Where data = Kgs. or Lbs.
UNITS-DEFINITION UNITS-BORE INCH UNITS-LENGTH METRE UNITS-WEIGHT KGS
Input Data Formats

Inch bores - You can type 1/2, 0.1/2, 0.5, 1, 1.0, 1.1/2, 1.5, 2, 10 (1 1/2 is also permitted for 1). mm bores - You can type. 50 or 50.0. Weights - You can type. 25 or 25.0
Units Selection Process

Usually, it is expected that the units' settings in OS 41 and the FDF match, as they should do. However, if they do not match, the following sequence is followed. Units for Weights & Lengths - The units specified in OS 41 are regarded as the master units. For example, if OS 41 specifies weights in LBS but the weights in the CIF are kgs, then all kgs values are converted to lbs. on output. A similar procedure is applied to length units. Units for N.S. - The unit settings in the FDF and Piping data file must be the same. A check is performed between the N.S. units as defined by O.S.41 and the UNITS-BORE attribute in the FDF. If they differ, the run is terminated with Error Code 35:1126.
490
Styles
WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE Section
This FDF Section defines the required content and layout structure of the weight and center of gravity printed output summary file. The input definition for this section is in three separate parts:
SUMMARY-FILES-TITLES
The section heading SUMMARY-FILE-TITLES is followed by the title data. There are two different types of title data information items: 1. Variable user-defined descriptive title text, such as PROJECT NO. or AREA REF. 2. Fixed data items. These are standard keywords or equivalent I/D numbers that are used to describe a required data field. They are written inside single quote marks ( ' ' ) to distinguish them from the variable user-defined title text. The two types are used together to make-up the required file heading. The following rules apply to the title data section SUMMARY-FILE-TITLES text: Both user-defined descriptive title text and fixed keyword text are positioned in the output file on the exact line and in the column position at which they are input. User-defined descriptive title text can be written in upper- or lower- case characters and is re-produced as specified in this respect. Fixed data items can be defined either as keywords written in upper-case characters and enclosed in single quotes, or can be represented by their standard text record numbers (inside single quotes). Empty lines for spacing purposes are created by the instruction Blank. Use the characters ' ' in conjunction with the word PAGE to obtain page numbers. For example, PAGE ' ' automatically produces PAGE 1, PAGE 2, and so on, at the top of each printed output page.
SUMMARY-FILE-COLUMN-HEADINGS
The section heading SUMMARY-FILE-COLUMN-HEADINGS is followed by the column headings data (this section is optional). All column headings data are reported in the output file exactly as it is specified in the FDF. The text should be positioned to suit the data items layout that follows it.
491
Styles
SUMMARY-FILE-DATA-ITEMS
The section heading SUMMARY-FILE-DATA-ITEMS is followed by the data item entries. Each data item entry in this part of the FDF is input using either two, three, or five parameters, depending on the type of data item being specified. C of G with a vertical layout uses three parameters. C of G with a horizontal layout uses five parameters. All others including weight output use two parameters.
The first part is a keyword that must be enclosed in single quotes ( ' ' ). Typical entries would appear like this:
Most keywords have an equivalent numeric identifier which can be used as an alternative to the text. For example, the numeric equivalent of PIPELINE-REFERENCE is -6. Numbers, when used, must also be enclosed by single quotes ' '.
492
Styles Character justification letters. L Left R Right N Number (the column position in this case is the decimal) V Vertical output E3252 N1020 EL -1566 H Horizontal output E3252 N1020 EL -1566 V and H parameters are only used on C of G output data because this type of data has three output values, not one, and their output layout direction must be specified. The V parameter gives an automatic Vertical layout but where Horizontal justification is specified, extra starting column information must be given one for each C of G output value, as shown in the following example: 'COFG-POSITION-DRY' 44 58 72 L H Data items available for output in the WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARYFILE. Key Name AREA or BATCH COFG-POSITION-DRY COFG-POSITION-DRY+INSU COFG-POSITION-WET COFG-POSITION-WET+INSU DATE DRG ERECTION-WEIGHT-DRG ERECTION-WEIGHT-PIPELINE FABRICATION-WEIGHT-DRG FABRICATION-WEIGHT-PIPELINE INSULATION-SPEC OFFSHORE-WEIGHT-DRG -706 -719 -705 -718 -15 -707 -706 -719 -705 -718 -15 -707 Equivalent I/D Number -10 -714 -715 -716 -717 -14 Equivalent I/D Number -10 -714 -715 -716 -717 -14 For example:
For example:
493
Styles Key Name OFFSHORE-WEIGHT-PIPELINE PIPELINE-REFERENCE PIPING-SPEC PROJECT-IDENTIFIER REVISION SPECIFIC-GRAVITY SYSTEM-REFERENCE TOTAL-DRY-WEIGHT-DRG TOTAL-DRY-WEIGHT-PIPELINE TOTAL-INSULATION-WEIGHT TOTAL-WET-WEIGHT Equivalent I/D Number -720 -6 -11 -9 -8 -18 -25 -704 -711 -713 -712 Equivalent I/D Number -720 -6 -11 -9 -8 -18 -25 -704 -711 -713 -712
If a -143 Specific Gravity File (SGF) is present then values from that file will be used in preference to any Specific Gravity value found in an IDF -18 record (see table above). Consider the following example:
The name of the output C of G summary file is specified in SmartPlant I-Configure in the Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles collection (on page 534). Also, the properties on the Supplementary CentreOfGravity object (on page 464) in SmartPlant I-Configure control the data generated for center of gravity.
494
Styles
Supplementary DetailSketches Object

The Supplementary DetailSketches object stores the properties for detail sketches and information notes. Set the properties as appropriate. When you click the Supplementary DetailSketches object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. FileFormat Path (on page 496) Colour (on page 496) LabelLayer (on page 496) LabelType (on page 496) LabelX (on page 497) LabelY (on page 497)
495
Styles SketchHeight (on page 498) SketchPosition (on page 498) SketchWidth (on page 500) TextHeight (on page 500) TextWeight (on page 353) TextFont (on page 353) PositionFix (on page 501) NoteFormat (on page 501) NoteHeight (on page 501) NotePosition (on page 501) NoteWidth (on page 503) PositionFix (on page 501)
Path
Specifies either the directory where the DXF files are located or the filename for the MicroStation Cell.
Colour
Sets the drawing color for the detail sketch. This value is expressed as an integer number representing the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).
LabelLayer
Controls the drawing layer for the cross-reference character used on the detail sketch. Use the LabelLayer list to select the appropriate layer.
LabelType
Controls whether the cross reference used for the detail sketch is numeric or alphabetic. Alpha - The cross reference is alphabetic.
496
Styles Number - The cross reference is numeric.
LabelX
Specifies the X position of the cross-reference on the detail sketch.
Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
LabelY
Specifies the Y position of the cross-reference on the detail sketch.
Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
497
Styles
SketchHeight
Sets the height of the detail sketch in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
SketchPosition
Controls the position of the detail sketch on the isometric. Default - Across the top of the drawing.
498
Styles Local - Locally positioned around the isometric in free spaces.
Overflow - On a separate overflow drawing.
499
Styles
SketchWidth
Sets the width for the detail sketch in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
TextHeight
Specifies the text height in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
500
Styles
TextWeight
TextFont
Defines what font is used. Use the TextFont list to specify the font type.
PositionFix
Controls positioning of detail sketches along top of drawing border. True - Detail sketches positioned left to right along top of drawing border. False - Normal detail sketch placement observed - sketches run right to left along top of drawing border.
NoteFormat
Sets the file format for the information note. Use the NoteFormat list to select the appropriate format. The format of the detail sketch, information note and, drawing output, must be consistent. If the FileFormat is DXF, then the NoteFormat and OutputFormat properties must also be DXF. These properties change automatically when the OutputFormat or TemplateFormat properties change.
See also
OutputFormat (on page 186) TemplateFormat (on page 338)
NoteHeight
Sets the height (as a real number) of the Information note in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
501
Styles
NotePosition
Controls the position of the information note on the isometric. Default - Across the bottom of the drawing.
Local - All notes are automatically placed along the bottom of the isometric, from left to right.
502
Styles OverFlow - In the case of duplicate occurrences, only one copy of each unique Information note is output on a single isometric.
NoteWidth
Sets the width (as a real number) for the information note in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
503
Styles
Supplementary DetailSketches LocalSketches Object

The Supplementary DetailSketches LocalSketches object contains the LocalSketch collection, used to store the properties for local detail sketches and information notes. The object also contains a single property called Count, which is defined by the software and indicates the number of definitions stored in the collection.
See also
Count (on page 504) Count Displays the number of data files--input files to be read by ISOGEN--currently defined in the style.
504
Styles Supplementary DetailSketches LocalSketches LocalSketch Collection The Supplementary DetailSketches LocalSketches LocalSketch collection stores the properties for local detail sketches and information notes. You can define the following properties: ID (on page 505) Height (on page 506) Width (on page 506) LabelX (on page 506) LabelY (on page 506)
See also
505
Styles
ID
The detail sketch or Information note string identifier. The following are examples: Detail Sketch - SK1.dxf Information Note - note_G.dxf or note_S.dxf For AutoCAD and SmartSketch, the file format extension must be shown in the ID, such as SK1.dxf or SK1.igr. For MicroStation, specify just the name of the sketch as found in the graphic cell library, as in SK1. Inclusion of _G --as in GenNote_G.dxf or GenNote_G--as part of the information note name signifies a general note, which is output on every sheet. Inclusion of _S--as in SpecNote_S.dxf or SpecNote_S--signifies a specific note, which is only output on the sheet on which the component having this particular note attached is output.
Height
Single value for the height of the detail sketch / Information note in mm.
Width
Single value for the width of the detail sketch / information note in mm.
LabelX
Specifies the horizontal cross-reference position measured from the bottom left corner of the detail sketch in mm.
LabelY
Specifies the vertical cross-reference position measured from the bottom left corner of the detail sketch in mm.
506
Styles
Supplementary DwgInfoFile Object

The Supplementary DwgInfoFile object stores the definitions for the Drawing Information Cross Reference output file in the TextColumns collection . When you click the Supplementary DwgInfoFile object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel displays its properties: Enabled (on page 507) Path (on page 508) HeaderLines (on page 508) Count (on page 508)
Enabled
507
Styles
Path
1. Double-click in the Path data box. 2. In the Specify path for file, navigate to the appropriate file and then click OK.
HeaderLines
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the material list definition (MLD) file .
Count
Displays the number of columns in the Drawing Information Cross Reference file to be output.
508
Styles
Supplementary DwgInfoFile TextColumns Collection

The Supplementary DwgInfoFile TextColumns collection is used to store the definitions of the data to be output to the Drawing Cross Reference summary report file. You can define the following properties: AttributeName (on page 509) Justification (on page 456) Start (on page 510) MaxChars (on page 428)
To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Offset t and MaxChars properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then press Enter.
See also
Add to Collection (on page 23) Remove from Collection (on page 23) AttributeName Specifies the name of the attribute to be output to the drawing information file.
509
Styles Justification Defines the justification for the text. Specify either Left or Right. Start Specifies the character position at which the attribute is output. MaxChars Defines the maximum number of characters to be output.
510
Styles
Supplementary EquipmentTrim Object

The Supplementary EquipmentTrim object controls the various functions related to the generation of equipment trim (vessel trim) drawings and associated material control files. DataFile (on page 511) MaterialFile (on page 512) PartNos (on page 512)
511
Styles
DataFile
Specifies whether the information is for a single pipeline or multi-pipeline file. One Pipeline per file - Single pipeline type file (where there is only one set of header records). Multiple Pipelines per file - Multiple pipeline type file (where there are multiple sets of header records).
Defines OS 52 Pos 3
MaterialFile
Controls the content of the material control file for equipment trims. Accumulate Per Item - All components related to a single equipment item accumulated and written to the material control file under a single Pipeline entry. Equipment Trim Reference is used as the Pipeline Reference for identification purposes. Accumulate Per Nozzle - Components for each nozzle kept separate and written to the material control file using the individual Pipeline Reference associated with each nozzle.
Defines OS 52 Pos 2
PartNos
Controls the part number sequencing on the material list for equipment trim drawings. Start at 1 per nozzle - Single pipeline type file (where there is only one set of header records). Start at 1 per drawing - Multiple pipeline type file (where there are multiple sets of header records).
Defines OS 52 Pos 1
512
Styles
Supplementary Fonts Object

The Supplementary Fonts object controls the use of the ISOGEN font information file. If required, it can be used to turn Off the use of fonts in the ISOGEN output files. By default, there is always a supplementary fonts path. If one does not exist--for example, you delete it--it is recreated automatically. However, if you set the Enabled switch, this setting is persisted. When importing a style, the Enabled property is set OFF before import starts, and only resets if there was previously a FONT- INFORMATION-FILE (or IDF -152 record) reference in the imported style.
You can modify each of the properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Enabled (on page 513) Path (on page 514)
513
Styles
Enabled
Controls whether fonts are enabled or not. True - Fonts are enabled. False - Fonts are disabled.
Path
Specifies the path to font information file.
514
Styles
Supplementary HeatTreatment Object

The Supplementary HeatTreatment object is used to set up heat treatment /NDE testing data. When you click the Supplementary HeatTreatmen object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Enabled (on page 515) Path (on page 516) Text (on page 516)
Enabled
515
Styles
Path
Specifies the path to the heat treatment/NDE file.
Text
When you double-click the Text property box, the software opens the Edit Text dialog box, in which you can type the data for heat treatment/NDE testing. This data is written to the data definition file (DDF) when the Enabled property is set to True.
The data required is as follows: 1. The link between the piping data file and the data in the heat treatment / NDE file. The form of this depends upon whether the heat treatment file is a delimited file or not. a. Columnized style file:
ELEMENT1 ELEMENT2 ELEMENT1 ELEMENT2 'Data Identifier' 'Data Identifier' 'Data Identifier' 'Data Identifier' Start Pos Start Pos End pos End pos
b. Delimited file:
'Data Field no' 'Data Field no'
516
Styles In both cases a 'Data Identifier can be either: i) FIXED DATA IDENTIFIER (PIPING SPEC) (SERVICE / COMMODITY) (BATCH) etc ii) IDF RECORD No. -10 -11 etc iii) ATTRIBUTE ID No. -900 to -999 The Start Pos / End Pos or 'Data Field No.' entries are the location in the heat treatment / NDE file of the required data items that are to be matched to the declared Data Identifier. Any number of ELEMENTS can be used for matching up to a maximum of 10. 2. An optional selection based on nominal size. The form of this depends upon whether the heat treatment file is a delimited file or not. a. Columnized style file
N.S.-CHECK Start Pos End Pos Start Pos End Pos
or
N.S.-CHECK-WELD Start Pos End Pos Start Pos End Pos
b. Delimited file
N.S.-CHECK Data Field No. Data Field No. N.S.-CHECK-WELD Data Field No. Data Field No.
In both cases the first data nominated must be the N.S. information, and the second - the related data to be output. Any number of N.S. - CHECK or N.S. - CHECK - WELD entries up to a maximum of 10. Typical use of the N.S. - CHECK - WELD facility is for P.W.H.T. and PREHEAT requirements in specific nominal sizes or size ranges only. Whenever N.S. - CHECK or N.S. - CHECK - WELD is used, the N.S. information and any related data must be in separate data fields. N.S. information is restricted to only using the following characters. < > = 18 Less than Greater than Equal to Integer number representing a N.S. in either inches or mm.
517
Styles Typical entries can be (all using inch bores): = 54 > = 18 Data only output if N.S. is 54. Data only output if N.S. is 18 or above.
> = 42 < = 48 Data only output if N.S. is 42 to 48 inclusive. A combined data column to signal Y (for YES) N (for NO) or a N.S. entry can be used in association with a related data column. This would be done say P.W.H.T. information where the requirement was for a simple Y / N indication in generated data files, but the actual P.W.H.T. temperature was required to be output on any plotted isometric and the requirement for P.W.H.T. was also N.S. related. Example of text entered in text box:
ELEMENT1 N.S.-CHECK 'PIPING-SPEC' 2 3 1
The section heading HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILEUSE- DEFINITION heading is generated by SmartPlant I-Configure. The corresponding entry in FDF:
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE (Delimited type file) DELIMITE-CHARACTER , IGNORE-CHARACTER -950 1 ! Piping Specification -951 2 ! PWHT N.S. range -952 3 ! PWHT Temperature -953 4 ! Design Code -954 5 ! Service / Commodity
518
Styles
Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS Object

The Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS object contains a collection called InstrumentSKEYs (see "Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYs Collection" on page 520), which is used to store the SKEY of components to be treated as instruments. The object also includes a single property called Count, defined by the software, which indicates the number of definitions stored in the InstrumentSKEYs collection.
See also
Count (on page 519) Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYs Collection (on page 520)
Count
Displays the number of SKEYS to be treated as instruments, instead of their default type.
519
Styles
Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYs Collection

The Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYs Collection controls which SKEYs are treated like Instruments.
See also
Add to Collection (on page 23) Remove from Collection (on page 23) ISKEYText Set the SKEY required in the ISKEYText box. The Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYS collection contains a list of SKEYs that ISOGEN treats as Instruments. This property holds one SKEY from that list.
See also
Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYS Collection (on page 520)
520
Styles
Supplementary PipeLineAtts Object

The Supplementary PipeLineAtts object is used to set up PIPELINE-REFERENCELOCATION-DEFINITION in the data definition file (DDF). When you click the Supplementary DetailSketches object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Enabled (on page 523) Path (on page 523) Text (on page 523)
The link between the pipeline and the data in the Pipeline attributes file, the format of which is specified in the Function Definition File (FDF), is specified as follows:
521
Styles
RECORD-ID data1 data2

Where data1 specifies which IDF record is to be used as the key match field and data 2 is the data record in the Pipeline Attributes file.
RECORD-ID -6 -900
In the previous example, it is the -6 record (pipeline reference) which is used to match the -900 in the pipeline attribute file. which should also be the pipeline reference.
FULL-REFERENCE data
Where FULL-REFERENCE means the Pipeline Reference in the IDF and data is the data record in the Pipeline Attributes File, which corresponds to the Pipeline Reference.
FULL-REFERENCE -900
ELEMENTNo. Start Pos End Pos Attribute No.

ELEMENT1 Start Pos End Pos Attribute No. ELEMENT2 Start Pos End Pos Attribute No. ELEMENT3 Start Pos End Pos Attribute No.
Where Start Pos and End Pos are the positions in the Pipeline Reference of the required data that will be used to look for a match in the Pipeline Attribute File. Attribute No. is the -900 series Attribute ID that has been allocated to the particular element in the Pipeline Attribute File, as shown in the following example of an actual pipeline reference (-6 record):
PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION ELEMENT1 4 6 -902 ELEMENT2 8 9 -903 ELEMENT3 10 12 -904
Corresponding entry in FDF:

PIPELINE - ATTRIBUTE - FILE (Delimited type File) DELIMITER - CHARACTER , IGNORE - CHARACTER -900 1 ! P & ID From -901 2 ! P & ID To -902 3 ! Unit No. -903 4 ! Service / Commodity -904 5 ! Sequence No. -905 6 ! Paint Code
522
Styles
Extracting a Service/Commodity Value from the Pipeline Reference

This information can be extracted from the Pipeline Reference by setting the following in the DDF. Section heading:
SERVICE/COMMODITY-DEFINITION
Followed by: LOCATION-IN-PIPELINE-REF start pos end pos Where Start Pos and End Pos are the positions in the Pipeline Reference (-6 record) of the required Service/Commodity identifier Using the previous example this would be:
SERVICE/COMMODITY-DEFINITION LOCATION-IN-PIPELINE-REF 8 9
This identifier is available as a data item in both the Spool information file and the Site weld information file.
Enabled
Controls whether file is created or not. True - Creates the file. False - Does not create the file.
Path
Specifies the path to the Pipeline attributes file.
Text
When you double-click the Text property box, the software opens the Edit Text box, in which you can type in the data required for the PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION in the DDF. This data is written to the Data definition file (DDF) when the Enabled property is set to True.
523
Styles The link can be specified either as:

RECORD-ID data1 data2
Where data1 specifies which IDF record is to be used as the key match field, and data2 is the data record in the Pipeline Attributes file
RECORD-ID -6 -900
In the previous example, the -6 record (Pipeline Reference), which is used to match the -900 in the Pipeline attributes file, is also used in the Pipeline Reference. Or the link can be specified as:
FULL-REFERENCE data
Where FULL-REFERENCE means the Pipeline Reference in the IDF, and data is the data record in the Pipeline attributes file, which corresponds to the Pipeline Reference.
FULL-REFERENCE -900
Elements are specified as follows:

ELEMENT1 Start Pos End Pos Attribute No. ELEMENT2 Start Pos End Pos Attribute No. ELEMENT3 Start Pos End Pos Attribute No.
In the previous example, Start Pos and End Pos are the positions in the Pipeline Reference of the required data that is used to look for a match in the Pipeline attributes file. Attribute No is the -900 series Attribute ID that has been allocated to the particular element in the Pipeline attributes file. Any number of elements can be used up to a maximum of 10. Actual Pipeline Reference (-6 record)
ELEMENT1 ELEMENT2 ELEMENT3
4 6 -902 8 9 -903 10 12 -904
The PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION heading is generated by SmartPlant I-Configure. Corresponding entry in FDF:

PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (Delimited type File) DELIMITER-CHARACTER , IGNORE-CHARACTER -900 1 ! P & ID From -901 2 ! P & ID To -902 3 ! Unit No. -903 4 ! Service / Commodity -904 5 ! Sequence No. -905 6 ! Paint Code
524
Styles
Supplementary ReferencePlanes Object

The Supplementary ReferencePlanes object is used to set up the data required for the output of location point data on the isometric. When you click the Supplementary ReferencePlanes object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Enabled (on page 526) Path (on page 526) LocationPtStyle (on page 526) CoordStyleAtLocationPts (on page 526) CoordStyle (on page 527)
See also
REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION (on page 476) Location Points (on page 588) SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide 525
Styles
Enabled
Controls processing of the reference plane file. True - Enable the processing of the reference plane file. False - Suppresses the processing of the reference plane file.
Path
Specifies the path to the reference plane file.
LocationPtStyle
Controls how the location point message is output on the isometric. Special Text - Shows a box containing ****.
Square Ended Box - Shows a box containing the contents of AText nnn, such as AText 471 LOCATION$POINT?
526
Styles
CoordStyleAtLocationPts
Controls how ISOGEN shows co-ordinates at each LOCATION-POINT entered in the PCF/IDF. None - No co-ordinates are displayed. World Co-ordinates - Location point co-ordinates are shown in world, or absolute coordinates.
Relative Co-ordinates - Location point co-ordinates are shown in relative co-ordinates, with respect to the nearest reference plane.
Defines OS 66 Pos 7
527
Styles
CoordStyle
Controls how ISOGEN shows coordinates at branches and elbows. None - No coordinates are displayed. World Coordinates - Coordinates are shown in world, or absolute co-ordinates. Relative Coordinates - Coordinates are shown in relative c-ordinates, with respect to the nearest reference plane.
Defines OS 66 Pos 7
528
Styles
Supplementary RepeatFile Object

The Supplementary RepeatFile object controls what data is going to be repeated from an ISOGEN run. When you click the Supplementary RepeatFile object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Enabled (on page 530) Path (on page 530) ByPass (on page 530) ComponentInfo (on page 530) Content (on page 530) MatList (on page 531) SplitPoints (on page 531) SpoolID (on page 532)
529
Styles StartPoint (on page 532) WeldNos (on page 532)
Enabled
Controls whether repeatability return file is created. True - File is created. False - File is not created.
Path
Specifies path for the repeatability return file.
ByPass
Controls whether by-pass component re-ordering is done. True - Re-ordering of components at by-pass closure points to be done. False - No re-ordering of components at by-pass closure points.
ComponentInfo
Controls whether and how component information is written to the repeatability return file. Off - Component information not to be written to the repeatability return file. With Numeric - For numeric component information to be written to the repeatability return file. With Alphabetic - For full alphanumeric component information to be written to the repeatability return file. (Maximum of 4 characters).
530
Styles
Content
Controls the type of repeatability return file output. Standard - Default for standard repeatability return file type (FOR052) containing just a list of successfully processed pipelines. Original - For a repeatability repeatability return file containing the original repeat information. Revised - For a repeatability return file containing the original repeat information and new records for spool information. Original ASCII - ASCII version of Original. Revised ASCII - ASCII version of Revised.
MatList
Controls whether material list part number information is written to the repeatability return file. True - Material list part number information to be written to the repeatability return file. False - Material list part number information not to be written to the repeatability return file.
531
Styles
SplitPoints
Controls whether split points are to be written to the repeatability return file. True - Split point information to be written to the repeatability return file. False - Split point information not to be written to the repeatability return file.
SpoolID
Controls whether and how the SpoolID information is written to the repeatability return file. Off - SpoolID information not to be written to the repeatability return file. Numeric - SpoolID information to be written to the repeatability return file. Alphabetic - For full alphanumeric SpoolID information to be written to the repeatability return file. (Maximum of 4 characters).
StartPoint
Controls whether the start point for data extraction is written to the repeatability return file. True - Data extraction start point to be written to the repeatability return file. False - Data extraction start point not to be written to the repeatability return file.
WeldNos
Controls whether Weld number information is written to the repeatability return file. True - Weld number information to be written to the repeatability return file. False - Weld number information not to be written to the repeatability return file.
532
Styles
Supplementary ReportFiles Object

The Supplementary ReportFiles object is used to store the names of output files that ISOGEN can create and the file path to be used for the particular file. The object has one property, Count-set by the program, which indicates the number of data entries in the ISOGENFiles collection. When you click the Supplementary ReportFiles object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object. .
See also
Count (on page 533) Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 534)
Count
Displays the number of data entries stored in the ISOGENFiles collection (see "Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection" on page 534).
533
Styles
Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection

The Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles collection stores the output files and their paths which ISOGEN creates during runtime. System environment variables such as TEMP, USERNAME or COMPUTERNAME can be used in folder or file paths for report files.
You can modify each of the properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. FileType (on page 535) FilePath (on page 535) FileText (on page 535)
534
Styles FileType Double click the FileType list to select the type of output report file:
FilePath Defines the file path. 1. Double-click the FilePath box. 2. In the Specify path for file dialog box, navigate to the appropriate file and then click OK.
Set the actual filename required. The filename itself can be dynamic (see "Dynamic File Naming" on page 582), using the Pipeline Reference, for example, as part of the filename.
535
Styles FileText 1. Double-click the FileText box. 2. In the text editor that displays, edit the data as necessary. 3. Click File > Update to save your changes. To close the text editor without saving your changes, click File > Cancel.
Supplementary SiteWeldFile Object

The Supplementary SiteWeldFile object has a collection called TextColumns, which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output in the Site weld file. It also has a Count property, is set by the program, which indicates the number of definitions in the TextColumns collection. When you click the Supplementary SiteWeldFile object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.
536
Styles You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Enabled (on page 537) Path (on page 537) FileFormat (on page 537) Delimiter (on page 537) HeaderLines (on page 537) Count (on page 538)
Enabled
Controls whether site weld file is created or not. True - File is created. False - File is not created.
Path
Specifies path for the site weld file.
FileFormat
Delimiter
HeaderLines
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the weld definition file (WDF).
537
Styles
Count
Displays the number of data entries stored in the TextColumns collection (see "Supplementary SiteWeldFile TextColumns Collection" on page 538).
Supplementary SiteWeldFile TextColumns Collection

The Supplementary SiteWeldFile TextColumns collection stores the definitions of the data to be output for the site weld summary file. You can define the following properties: AttributeName (on page 539) Justification (on page 539) Start (on page 540) MaxChars (on page 540)
538
Styles
See also
539
Supplementary SpoolAttributes Object

The Supplementary SpoolAttibutes object is used to set up the data required for the output of spool attributes data on the isometric and to summary report files, such as the spool Information file.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. 540 Enabled (on page 541) Path (on page 541) SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
Styles ReferenceIDLocation (on page 541) Count (on page 541)
Enabled
Controls the creation of spool attributes. True - Attributes are created. False - Attributes are not created.
Path
Specifies path for the spool attribute file.
ReferenceIDLocation
Sets the spool record as the key to map spool attributes. Value - Spool records for possible mapping to spool attribute file:
-28 -91 - 170 to -179
The following is an example of the typical input in the DDF file:

SPOOL-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION RECORD-ID -28
Count
Displays the number of SpoolAttEnclosure definitions defined.
541
Styles
Supplementary SpoolAttributes SpoolAttEnclosure Collection

The Supplementary SpoolAttributes SpoolAttEnclosure collection controls the assignment of enclosure styles to spool attributes used to plot them on the isometric. You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. AttributeName (on page 542) EnclosureType (on page 542)
AttributeName Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute. EnclosureType Specify the name of the enclosure type. Use the EnclosureType list to select the required description.
542
Styles
Supplementary SpoolInformation Object

The Supplementary SpoolInformation object stores the definitions for the spool information file in the TextColumns collection. Enabled (on page 544) Path (on page 544) FileFormat (on page 544) Delimiter (on page 544) HeaderLines (on page 544) Count (on page 544)
The Count property, set by the software, indicates the number of data entries in the TextColumns collection.
See also
Supplementary SpoolInformation TextColumns Collection (on page 544)
543
Styles
Enabled
Controls whether the creation of the spool information file. True - File is created. False - File is not created.
Path
Specifies path for the spool information file.
FileFormat
Delimiter
HeaderLines
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the data definition file (DDF).
Count
Displays the number of data entries stored in the TextColumns collection (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation TextColumns Collection" on page 544).
544
Styles
Supplementary SpoolInformation TextColumns Collection

The Supplementary SpoolInformation TextColumns collection stores the definitions of the data to be output to the spool information file. The value in parentheses after the name is a count of how many definitions are stored in the collection. AttributeName (on page 546) Justification (on page 546) Start (on page 546) MaxChars (on page 546)
See also
Add to Collection (on page 23) Count (on page 556) Remove from Collection (on page 23)
545
Styles AttributeName Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute. Justification Defines the justification for the text. Specify either Left or Right. Start Defines the start column for the output data on a fixed format file, and specifies a field number for a delimited file. MaxChars Defines the maximum number of characters.
Supplementary TableAttributes Object

The Supplementary TableAttributes object has a collection called DFTableAttributes, which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output as a table on the isometric. The object contains a single property called Count, which is set by the software and indicates the number of definitions in the collection. The existing Supplementary TableAttributes object contains the same information as the DrawingFrame TableAttributes object. You can use either object to modify the properties, although the DrawingFrame TableAttributes object supports real numbers in the XPos and YPos properties.
546
Styles
See also
Count (on page 547) DrawingFrame TableAttributes Object (on page 343)
Count
Displays the number of definitions in the DFTableAttributes collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547).
Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection

The Supplementary TableAttributes DFTablesAttributes collection stores the definitions of the data to be output as a table on the isometric.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. AttributeName (on page 548) CharHeight (on page 548) Xpos (on page 548) Ypos (on page 548)
547
Styles Font (on page 548) BarCode (on page 548) CharWidth (on page 549) Justification (on page 549) Layer (on page 549) Color (see "Colour" on page 549) RotationAngle (on page 549) TextWeight (on page 549) ColumnsNumber (on page 549) Direction (on page 549) LinesNumber (on page 549) XSpacing (on page 550) YSpacing (on page 550)
AttributeName Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute. CharHeight Sets the character height for the text. Type the required size in mm or Inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
See also
Options (on page 77) Ypos Defines the Y position for the text in mm or inches (set as real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See also
Options (on page 77) Font Defines the font to be used when plotting the attribute in the table.
548
Styles BarCode Several barcode standards exist worldwide to suit different industries, but Alias has standardized on just three. Type 1, 2 or 3 for the appropriate barcode: 1 - Barcode 39 2 - Barcode 25 3 - Barcode 25 Interleaved
See also
Options (on page 77) Justification Defines the justification for the text. Specify either Left or Right. Layer Specify the integer number that identifies the required layer (in the Drawing Layers collection (see "Drawing Layers Layers Collection" on page 300)) to which the definition is applied. Colour Type the integer number that represent the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD). RotationAngle Defines the angle of rotation in degrees clockwise. TextWeight Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used for MicroStation only ColumnsNumber Specifies the number of columns in the table. Direction Specifies the table direction.
549
Styles LinesNumber Specifies the number of lines in the table. XSpacing Specifies the table offset dimension in X (horizontal) direction. Type a value in mm or inches (set as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch. The value can be a negative number.
See also
See also
550
Styles
Supplementary TitleTexts Object

The Supplementary TitleTexts object has a collection called TitleTexts, which is used to store the text to be used as titles. The object also has one property called Count , which is set by the software and indicates the number of definitions in the TitleTexts collection.
See also
Supplementary TitleTexts TitleTexts Collection (on page 552)
Count
Displays the number of definitions in the TitleTexts collection (see "Supplementary TitleTexts TitleTexts Collection" on page 552).
551
Styles
Supplementary TitleTexts TitleTexts Collection

The definitions in the Supplementary TitleTexts TitleTexts collection each store one line of text to be used for the titles. The collection contains a single property called TText (on page 552).
See also
Add to Collection (on page 23) Remove from Collection (on page 23) TText Contains the text for each title line.
552
Styles
Supplementary Traceability Object

The Supplementary Traceability object is used to define a unique part numbers table that can be output on the isometric and a traceability output file. The object has a TextColumns collection, which is used to define the data output to the traceability file. When you click the Supplementary Traceability object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the currently defined properties for the selected object.
You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries -click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Enabled (on page 554) Path (on page 554) UniquePartNumber (on page 554) IdentifierSuffix (on page 554) PlotUniquePtNoTable (on page 554) ContinuousDown (on page 554) StartX (on page 555) StartY (on page 555) 553
Styles VerticalSpacing (on page 555) TextHeight (on page 555) MaxEntries (on page 555) TableOverflow (on page 556) DrawingLayer (on page 556) Count (on page 556)
Enabled
Controls the creation of the traceability file. True - File is created. False - File is not created.
Path
Defines the output path of the traceability file.
UniquePartNumber
Controls the type of suffix used for the unique part number and whether unique part numbers are used. Alpha - Suffix is alphabetic. Numeric - Suffix is numeric. Off - All unique part number facilities are switched off.
IdentifierSuffix
Controls sequencing of the IdentifierSuffix used for part numbering on the isometric. Continuous - Unique part number suffixes are generated as a continuous sequence across all output drawings, such as 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.7 to 6.11 on Drg 2 of 2 , and so on. PerDrawing - Unique part number suffixes are generated with a new sequence for each drawing, such as 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.1 to 6.5 on Drg 2 of 2 , and so on.
PlotUniquePtNoTable
Controls whether the unique part numbers table is plotted. True - Table is plotted. False - Table is not plotted.
554
Styles
ContinuousDown
Controls the direction of the unique part numbers table. True - Table direction is down. False - Table direction is up.
StartX
Defines the starting X position of the list in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
StartY
Defines the starting Y position of the list in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
VerticalSpacing
Sets the vertical spacing between each horizontal line in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
TextHeight
Sets the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See also
555
Styles
MaxEntries
Controls the maximum number of entries before an overflow drawing is created if the TableOverflow property is set to True.
See also
TableOverflow (on page 556)
TableOverflow
Controls whether an overflow drawing is created when MaxEntries is exceeded. True - An overflow drawing is created. False - No overflow drawing is created.
See also
MaxEntries (on page 555)
DrawingLayer
Sets the drawing layer for unique part number table. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.
Count
Displays the number of definitions in the TextColumns collection (see "Supplementary Traceability TextColumns Collection" on page 556).
556
Styles
Supplementary Traceability TextColumns Collection

The Supplementary Traceability TextColumns collection stores the definitions of data for the output of unique part numbers. The value in parentheses after the name is a count of how many definitions are stored in the collection. AttributeName (on page 557) Justification (on page 558) Start (on page 558) MaxChars (on page 558)
To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Justivication, Start and MaxChars properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then press Enter.
See also
Add to Collection (on page 23) Count (on page 556) Remove from Collection (on page 23)
557
Styles AttributeName Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute. Justification Defines the justification for the text. Specify either Left or Right. Start Defines the start column for the output data on a fixed format file, and specifies a field number for a delimited file. MaxChars Defines the maximum number of characters.
Copy and Paste a Style

1. In the Project View panel, select a style and then click Copy . Alternatively, you can click Edit > Copy or right-click the style in the Project Panel and then click Copy.
558
Styles 2. Click Paste . Alternatively, you can click Edit > Paste or right-click in the Project Panel and click Paste. The software displays the name of the copied style is now shown in the right-hand box at the bottom of the window.
3. In the New Style Name dialog box, type a name for the new style in the New style name box and then click OK. The software displays a default name based on the style being copied.
Create a Style
New styles are based on one of the templates (on page 12) that are delivered with the SmartPlant I-Configure. 1. Do one of the following: a. Create an isometric directory (see "Create an Isometric Directory" on page 88) and project (see "Create a Project" on page 121). b. Select an existing project in the Project View panel. 2. Click New Style . Alternatively, you can click File > New > Style. 3. In the New Style dialog box, select the product to which the style applies in the Application list. The software displays all the template styles that are available for the selected product. 4. Un-check all of the style templates which you do not want to create and ensure that the required template is checked. 5. Double-click the Name box of the selected style, highlight the existing style name, and then type the new style name. 6. Click OK. The software displays the new style under the project in the Project View panel. You can edit the properties of the new style as required. 559
Styles If you leave all style templates checked and click OK, any existing styles with the same name under the project are duplicated, and _1 is appended to the style name. For example, Final-Basic becomes Final-Basic_1. You can also create styles when a new project is created.
See also
Copy and Paste a Style (on page 558) Delete a Style (on page 560) Export a Style (on page 560) Import Style (see "Import Style Settings" on page 73) Save a Style (on page 561) Select a Style (on page 561)
Delete a Style
Deleting a style cannot be undone. 1. In the Project View panel, click the style you want to delete. 2. Click Delete .
Alternatively, you can click Edit > Delete. You can also right-click the style in the Project View panel and then click Delete.
560
Styles
Export a Style
Before a style can be used, it must first be exported. When you export a style, a variety of control files that ISOGEN requires, such as option switches, to process isometrics and reports are created. Click Export Style .
Alternatively, you can click File > Export. The settings are written to the Style.xml file.
See also
Export (on page 35) CanExport (on page 127) ExportBehaviour (on page 126) StyleState (on page 126) Style.xml (on page 15)
Save a Style
Before any changes that you make to a style can be used, you must first save the style. Settings are saved to the Style.xml file. Click Save Style .
Alternatively, you can click File > Save.
See also
Style.xml (on page 15)
Select a Style
In the Project View panel click a style in the tree view. As in Windows Explorer, you can click tree view. and to expand and close the nodes in the
The status bar updates to show that this is the current style. You can use the objects in the Detail panel to modify the selected style.
561
Styles
562
SECTION 7
Techniques
Bar Codes
To output a bar code on the isometric, such as the following example for the pipeline reference, you must create an attribute.
1. In the DFAttributes collection, create an attribute:
563
Techniques 2. Set the following properties as indicated: AttributeName (on page 548) to Pipeline Reference. BarCode (on page 342) to one of the valid codes (1,2 or 3). CharHeight (on page 548) to appropriate value. Font (on page 548) to the font that matches the bar code value (Bar Code 39, Bar Code 25, Bar Code 25 Interleaved). XPos (on page 548) to the X position for start of bar code. YPos (on page 548) to the Y position for the start of bar code.
The required bar code must be installed in your system fonts directory. For AutoCAD users, the backing sheet must have the bar code font defined in it.
See also
AutoCAD Barcode (on page 564) DFAttributes Collection (on page 547)
AutoCAD Barcode
To add the barcode font to an AutoCAD backing sheet, open the DWG, or DXF file and add a new text style.
Style Name - Set the style name to the name of the font file without the extension. In the example shown, this is Bar39.ttf. Ensure that the style name matches the filename specified in the ISOGEN font information file (FONTSTD.FIF)
ISOGEN-FONT 151 FAMILY T DESCRIPTION Bar Code 39 FILENAME BAR39.ttf
564
Techniques Font Name - Select the font name in the list, and must be set to the required font. In the example shown, this is Bar Code 39. If the backing sheet is a DWG file, the backing sheet just needs saving. However, if it is a DXF file, then the file must be saved as DXF release12 format. Use a text editor to edit the DXF file by finding the second occurrence of the text style name (Bar39) and change the txt entry following that to the font name (Bar Code 39). These actions are necessary because of restrictions in SmartPlant Spoolgen, which cannot handle DXF files later that AutoCAD Release 12. Also, the DXFOUT routine in AutoCAD for a Release 12 version DXF does not allow references to True type fonts to be made; they are changed to txt.
See also
Bar codes (on page 563)
Bends and Elbows

Bends
You can control the way bends are depicted on the isometric using the BendRadius and BendRepresentation properties of the Drawing Format object. The dimensioning for bends is controlled by the Drawing Dimensions object's CoordInateOutputBends and SeparatePulledBend properties.
See also
CoordOutputBends (on page 204) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) Drawing Format Object (on page 239) SeparatePulledBend (on page 217)
Elbows
You can control the elbows are depicted on the isometric using the ElbowRadius and ElbowRepresentation properties of the Drawing Format object. Elbows can also be converted to bends in SmartPlant Spoolgen. The project property ElbowConversion is used to define the rules for this.
See also
Drawing Format Object (on page 239) ElbowConversion (on page 94) ElbowRadius (on page 253) ElbowRepresentation (on page 253)
565
Techniques
External Data
Used to load data from an external data source, such as a database, on import. The external data configuration (GED Configuration) properties and External Data on Import on the Project Defaults dialog box need to be set lo allow the external data to be loaded on import. You must also define the external data source and create an XML configuration file, which defines the external data.
See also
External Data Source (on page 566) GED Configuration (on page 102) Project Defaults (on page 37) XML Configuration File (on page 567)
External Data Source

External data can be in any ODBC compliant form. In order to use the data source, you must Control Panel to define a Data Source Name (DSN). In Windows 2000, for example, click Start> Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Data Sources.
In the previous illustration, PROJECT1 is the DSN name and has been set up as a Microsoft Excel data source.
566
Techniques The type of data that is linked to depends on the ODBC database drivers currently installed on the machine. Drivers for Access, Excel, SQL Server and Oracle databases are commonly available. Setting up a new DSN is dependent on the database being set-up, but in each case, the DSN is given a name and this name is used in the XML Configuration file referenced by the software which uses it.
XML Configuration File

The following example shows the basic structure of the XML configuration file:
<EXTERNAL-DATA Version="POS3"> <PIPELINE> <!Data specifying how to retrieve pipeline data --> (see "Pipeline Data" on page 567) </PIPELINE> <COMPONENT> <!Data specifying how to retrieve component data --> (see "Component and Information Data" on page 569) </COMPONENT> <INFORMATION> <!Data specifying how to retr ieve Information data --> (see "Component and Information Data" on page 569) </ INFORMATION> </EXTERNAL-DATA>
Multiple PIPELINE, COMPONENT and INFORMATION entries are permitted in the configuration file.
Macros
A macro can appear in the SQL or FILTER tags defined below. A macro is a string that is substituted at run time with a value taken from the current open POD (Pipeline object data) file. A macro starts and finishes with a $ character. Macros take the general form $OBJECT.PROPERTY_OR_ATTRIBUTE$. For example, $P.PIPELINE-REFERENCE$ means the Pipeline object PIPELINE-REFERENCE attribute. The following macros are available to reference PODFILE objects: $P = PIPELINE ... $P.PIPELINE-REFERENCE = PIPELINE PIPELINE-REFERENCE ATTRIBUTE $C = COMPONENT ... $C.PIPING-SPEC = COMPONENT PIPING-SPEC ATTRIBUTE $M = MATERIAL ... $M.ItemCode = MATERIAL ItemCode property $I = INFORMATION ... $I.MESSAGE-TEXT = MESSAGE-TEXT ATTRIBUTE
See also
Component and Information Data (on page 569) Example XML Configuration File (on page 570) External Data Source (on page 566) Pipeline Data (on page 567)
567
Techniques
Pipeline Data
Within the <PIPELINE> tags, the following tags can appear.
<DSN>
The <DSN> tag contains the name of the DSN created to point to the database containing the external data. For example:
<DSN> PROJECT1 </DSN
<SQL>
The <SQL> tag contains the definition of a query to be executed against the DSN. It is a string that can contain macros that at run time are substituted with the value of the specified property or attribute. For example, the following table (named PIPEDATA), contains data for two pipelines.
The <SQL> tag must be specified so as to create a query that can identify which row of the table contains the data to be imported into the application. Typically this is done using the PIPELINEREFERENCE property, as shown in the following example:
<SQL> SELECT * FROM PIPEDATA WHERE PIPELINE = $P.PIPELINEREFERENCE$ </SQL>
In the previous example, PIPEDATA is the name of the table in the external database. In a POD file, with the PIPELINE-REFERENCE attribute set to APL-BUG-1, the software generates the following query and returns one row of data.
SELECT * FROM PIPEDATA WHERE PIPELINE = 'APL-BUG-1'
White space (tabs, carriage returns, spaces) are not important in the <SQL> tag. In SmartPlant Spoolgen, pipeline properties are referred to by the PCF attribute name to which they are exported.
<EXTERNAL-MAP>
There can be any number of these tags. Each one defines the SmartPlant Spoolgen pipeline attribute that is to receive data, and the name of the field (column) in the row returned by the query that contains the data. The SmartPlant Spoolgen pipeline attribute can be referred to by either its ISOGEN attribute or Display Name as defined by the SmartPlant I-Configure in the project properties. The following example uses SmartPlant Spoolgen pipeline attribute - Isogen attribute.
<EXTERNAL-MAP <EXTERNAL-MAP <EXTERNAL-MAP <EXTERNAL-MAP <EXTERNAL-MAP Name="PROJECT-IDENTIFIER" ExternalName="Project ID" /> Name="AREA" ExternalName="AREA" /> Name="ATTRIBUTE1" ExternalName="Client" /> Name="ATTRIBUTE2" ExternalName="Site" /> Name="ATTRIBUTE3" ExternalName="Designer" />
568
Techniques The data in the previous example defines a mapping between the five SmartPlant Spoolgen attributes specified in the Isogen Attribute field and the column in the external data specified by the ExternalName field. The next example uses SmartPlant Spoolgen pipeline attribute - DisplayName
<EXTERNAL-MAP ID" /> <EXTERNAL-MAP <EXTERNAL-MAP <EXTERNAL-MAP <EXTERNAL-MAP DisplayName="ProjectIdentifier" ExternalName="Project DisplayName="Batch/Area" ExternalName="AREA" /> DisplayName="Client" ExternalName="Client" /> DisplayName="SiteRef" ExternalName="Site" /> DisplayName="Designer" ExternalName="Designer" />
The data in this example defines a mapping between the five SmartPlant Spoolgen attributes specified in the DisplayName field and the column in the external data specified by the ExternalName field.
See also
Component and Information Data (on page 569) Example XML Configuration File (on page 570) External Data (on page 565) External Data Source (on page 566) XML Configuration File (on page 567)
Component and Information Data

The structure of the <COMPONENT> and <INFORMATION> tags is the same and is largely identical to the pipeline data. However, in addition to the <SQL> tag there is a <FILTER> tag, which defines a supplementary filter to be applied at each component. The query in the <SQL> tag is executed once, at the onset of the Get External Data command. It is used to specify a set of data relating to all the components in the pipeline and can return more than one row. Typically the PIPELINE-REFERENCE property is specified in a $P.PIPELINE-REFERENCE$ macro in this query.
<SQL>  SELECT * FROM COMPDATA WHERE PIPELINE = '$P.PIPELINE-REFERENCE$' </SQL>
COMPDATA is the name of the table in the external database.
569
Techniques The <FILTER> tag is built up from external field names and values that allow a single row in the set of records defined by the <SQL> query to be identified. For example, the following table contains component data:
The following query, then, returns three records;

SELECT * FROM COMPDATA WHERE PIPELINE=APL -BUG-1
If you define the following filter expression, the software evaluates the expression at each component in the iso file. Any component with REPEAT-PART-NUMBER = 1 matches row 1 only.
<FILTER> PART-NO = '$C.REPEAT-PART-NUMBER </FILTER>
You can use all Component, ComponentKeyPoint, ComponentLeg and Material properties and attributes in filter expressions. For example, the component ItemCode is a property of the material with which the component is associated. A filter of this form can be used to match a row in the external data with the specific component.
<FILTER> IC = '$M.ITEMCODE </FILTER>
See also
Example XML Configuration File (on page 570) External Data Source (on page 566) Pipeline Data (on page 567) XML Configuration File (on page 567)
Example XML Configuration File

The following is a simple example of an XML configuration file.
<EXTERNAL-DATA Version="POD3"> <PIPELINE> <DSN> PROJECT1 </DSN> <SQL> SELECT * FROM PIPEDATA WHERE [LINE REF] = '$P.PIPELINEREFERENCE$' </SQL> <EXTERNAL-MAP DisplayName="P+ID-From" ExternalName="P+IDFROM" /> <EXTERNAL-MAP DisplayName="P+ID-To" ExternalName="P+ID TO" /> </PIPELINE> <COMPONENT> <DSN> PROJECT1 </DSN> <SQL> SELECT * FROM COMPDATA WHERE [LINE REF] = '$P.PIPELINEREFERENCE$' </SQL> <FILTER> ITEMCODE = '$M.ItemCode$' </FILTER> <EXTERNAL-MAP Name="COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1" ExternalName="DATA1" /> <EXTERNAL-MAP Name="COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2" ExternalName="DATA2" /> </COMPONENT> </EXTERNAL-DATA>
570
Techniques In the previous example, the external data source PROJECT1 has two tables, PIPEDATA (pipeline data) and COMPDATA (component data). The attributes P+ID-From and P+ID-To have been added to the Project Defaults Pipeline attributes.
See also
Component and Information Data (on page 569) External Data (on page 565) External Data Source (on page 566) Pipeline Data (on page 567) Project Defaults (on page 37) XML Configuration File (on page 567)
Welding
Weld Lists
There are four types of plotted weld list: 1. Fixed original 2. Fixed operations box 3. Variable layout 4. User-defined Setting the ActiveList property on the WeldList object controls this. If this property is set to Fixed, then the ShowOperationsBox property on the FixedLayout object below the Weldlist object is used to control whether it is an Original or Operations box weld list. If the property is set to Variable, then the data for the VariableLayout object needs to be set. If this property is set to User defined, then the data for the Userdefined object needs to be set. Also, for the user-defined weld list there must be a backing sheet, which has the columns and headings required for the weld list.
The properties on the WeldList object need to be set for all types of weld lists, as these control the number of welds at special situations. The VariableLayout object's HeaderLines property sets up the text header line for the variable layout, and the contents (MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns ) define to ISOGEN the data, start column, and justification on the horizontal line. The UserDefined object's properties and contents (XYColumns collection) define to ISOGEN how the data is positioned on the isometric, such that it lines up with the columns on the backing sheet. The properties define the start position, layout, and font for the data, and the XYColumns collection stores each data item to be output.
Printed Weld List

The properties of the SummaryFile object below the WeldList object control the format, titles and headers, and so on, for the printed weld list. The XYColumns collection below the
571
Techniques SummaryFile object stores each data item to be output, and their position along the line in the file.
See also
ActiveList (on page 413) MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection (on page 400) ShowOperationsBox (on page 416) SummaryFile Object (see "WeldList SummaryFile Object" on page 428) Userdefined Object (see "WeldList UserDefined Object" on page 421) VariableLayout Object (see "WeldList VariableLayout Object" on page 417) WeldList Object (on page 412)
Weld Logic
Logic used to control welds. Four properties control ISOGEN behavior regarding welds and weld numbers: ShowWelds (on page 303) ShowWeldNumbers (on page 303) WeldTypes (on page 327) WeldNumberSize (on page 326) All weld numbering options are suppressed. That is, ShowWeldNumbers, WeldTypes and WeldNumberSize are ignored. OS 53.1 = 0 (all weld numbers are suppressed) OS 54 = 1 (all welds are suppressed) else (ShowWelds is TRUE) If ShowWeldNumbers is TRUE WeldTypes and WeldNumberSize are used to control setting of OS 53.1, OS 53.4 and OS 54 as shown in the following table: Weld Types WeldNumberSize
Small Medium Large
If ShowWelds is FALSE:
OS53 Pos 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
OS53 Pos 4
0 0 0 2 2 2
OS5 4
0 0 0 3 3 3
All
Fabrication Only
Small Medium Large
572
Techniques
Weld Types
WeldNumberSize
Small Medium Large
OS53 Pos 1
7 8 9 1 2 3 1 2 3
OS53 Pos 4
2 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0
OS5 4
2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4
Erection Only
OffShore Only
Small Medium Large
All - Implied Erect as Fabrication
Small Medium Large
else (ShowWeldNumbers = FALSE) WeldTypes and WeldNumberSize properties are ignored OS 53.1 = 0 (Weld numbers are suppressed) OS 53.4 = 2 (Offshore weld numbers are suppressed)
573
Techniques
Weld Constructions
Below are details for all the weld construction types used in ISOGEN. Bores are indicated so that in those cases where there are two or more, it is clear what the size is for a given weld on the weld list summary on the isometric, and in printed output summary file. The AText numbers listed in the panels are used to change the weld type characters from the defaults shown to the users' own definitions, if required. 90 Set On Branch
90 Reinforced Set On Branch
At reinforced set on branches like this, ISOGEN can be set to generate either three weld numbers as shown in the previous illustration, or just two weld numbers. When the setting is for only two weld numbers, number three is omitted.
574
Techniques Angled Set-On Branch
Reinforced Angled Set-On Branch
At reinforced set on branches like this, ISOGEN can be set to generate either three weld numbers as shown in the previous illustration, or just two weld numbers. When the setting is for only two weld numbers, number three is omitted.
575
Techniques Olet
Half Coupling
Tee Bend
Tee Elbow
Trunnion Support - Dummy Tee Bend
Trunnion Support - Un Reinforced
576
Techniques
Angled Trunnion Support - Un Reinforced
Trunnion Support - Reinforced
At reinforced set on branches like this, ISOGEN can be set to generate either three weld numbers as shown above, or just two weld numbers. When the setting is for only two weld numbers, number three is omitted.
577
Techniques Angled Trunnion Support - Reinforced
At reinforced set on branches like this, ISOGEN can be set to generate either three weld numbers as shown above, or just two weld numbers. When the setting is for only two weld numbers, number three is omitted.
See also
ExtraRPadWelds (on page 413)
Cut Lists
The cut list can be either plotted on the isometric or printed to file, each being controlled separately. Plotted Cut List - There are three types of plotted cut lists: (1). Fixed Standard; (2). Fixed Extended; and (3). User Defined. Setting the ActiveList property on the CutList object controls this. If this property is set to Fixed, then the Content property on the FixedLayout object below the CutList object is used to control whether it is a Standard or Extended Fixed cut list. If this property is set to Userdefined, then the data for the Userdefined object needs to be set.
The properties on the CutList object need to be set for all types of material list If the user-defined material list is being defined, then there must be a backing sheet, which has the columns and headings required for the Cut list. The UserDefined object's properties and contents (XYColumns Collection) define for ISOGEN how the data is positioned on the isometric, such that it lines up with the columns on the backing sheet. The properties define the start position, layout, and font for the data, and the XYColumns collection stores each data item to be output. Printed Cut list - There are two types of printed cut list: (1). Standard and (2). Userdefined. This is controlled by the UserDefined property on the SummaryFile object. If set to False then the old standard cut list is printed. If set to True, then the-user defined cut list specified by the properties and contents of the SummaryFile object is printed. The Path, Append, and Enable properties are used for both types of printed list.
578
Techniques For the user-defined printed cut list the properties of the SummaryFile object setup the headings, and titles for the cut list. The TextColumns collection stores each data item to be output.
See also
CutList Object (on page 435) CutList FixedLayout Object (on page 440) CutList SummaryFile Object (on page 450) CutList UserDefined Object (on page 442)
Detail Sketch and Information Notes

The settings for detail sketches and Information notes are stored in the properties of the Supplementary DetailSketches Object (on page 495).
Controlling Properties
The following properties control the size and plotted position of the detail sketch or information note. FileFormat Path (on page 496) Colour (on page 496) LabelLayer (on page 496) LabelType (on page 496) LabelX (on page 497) LabelY (on page 497) SketchHeight (on page 498) SketchPosition (on page 498) SketchWidth (on page 500) TextHeight (on page 500) TextWeight (on page 500) TextFont (on page 501) PositionFix (on page 501) NoteFormat (on page 501) NoteHeight (on page 501) NotePosition (on page 501) NoteWidth (on page 503)
The following properties control the size and plotted position of the detail sketch or information note. FileFormat Path (on page 496) 579
Techniques Colour (on page 496) LabelLayer (on page 496) LabelType (on page 496) LabelX (on page 497) LabelY (on page 497) SketchHeight (on page 498) SketchPosition (on page 498) SketchWidth (on page 500) TextHeight (on page 500) TextWeight (on page 500) TextFont (on page 501) PositionFix (on page 501) NoteFormat (on page 501) NoteHeight (on page 501) NotePosition (on page 501) NoteWidth (on page 503)
AText
The following AText are associated with the detail sketches and information notes. -456 Used for Detail sketches. Default = SEE DETAIL ? This text is plotted at the pipeline sketch location as shown below, the question mark being replaced by the Cross reference label controlled by the property LabelType (on page 496) .
-541
Specifies the Suffix used for General notes. Default = _N These notes apply to the whole of the pipeline and are output on all the isometrics for a pipeline. They only need to be probed in once per pipeline. -542
580
Techniques Specifies the Suffix used for Specific notes. Default = _S These notes may apply to either a specific component or Spool. Although a Specific note may be probed in at more than one location on a pipeline - it will only be produced once on the isometric. -543 Specifies the text used for cross reference to specific note.
Default = Blank The following AText are associated with the detail sketches and information notes. -456 Used for Detail sketches. Default = SEE DETAIL ? This text is plotted at the pipeline sketch location as shown below, the question mark being replaced by the Cross reference label controlled by the property LabelType (on page 496) .
-541
Specifies the Suffix used for General notes. Default = _N
581
Techniques These notes apply to the whole of the pipeline and are output on all the isometrics for a pipeline. They only need to be probed in once per pipeline. -542 Specifies the Suffix used for Specific notes. Default = _S These notes may apply to either a specific component or Spool. Although a Specific note may be probed in at more than one location on a pipeline - it will only be produced once on the isometric. -543 Specifies the text used for cross reference to specific note.
Default = Blank The format of the detail sketch, information note and drawing output must be consistent. If the output is DXF, then the FileFormat and NoteFormat properties must also be DXF. DXF sketches and notes must be saved in AutoCAD Release 12 format (to 6 decimal places) and must not contain blocks.
See also
FileFormat NoteFormat (on page 501)
582
Techniques
Dynamic File Naming

It is possible to pre-process the ISOGEN.fls files to substitute a macro for one of the PCF header attributes taken from the current file. The following PCF attributes are supported in macros:
PCF Attribute
$PIPELINE-REFERENCE$ $REVISION$ $PROJECT-IDENTIFIER$ $PIPING-SPEC$
Description/Comment
Pipeline reference Revision Applies to the PROJECT-IDENTIFIER attribute in the PCF/IDF, not the SmartPlant I-Configure project. Piping specification
$INPUT-FILE$ Name of input file without the extension. For example, in the Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles collection you can use the $PIPELINE-REFERENCE$ to set the FilePath as shown in the following illustration:
The following is written in the ISOGEN.fls file: CENTRELINE/INSULATIONLENGTH WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARYAPPEND C:\IsoDir\Project\Final\$PIPELINEREFERENCE$-CL.TXT C:\IsoDir\Project\Final\Reports\$PIPELINEREFERENCE$-COG.TXT
If the required attribute is not present in the PCF/IDF, then the attribute NAME is substituted. System environment variables such as TEMP, USERNAME or COMPUTERNAME can be used in folder or file paths for report files.
See also
FilePath (on page 535) Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 534)
583
Techniques
Flange Rotation
When flanges are connected it is normal practice to position the flange so the bolt holes are off center, as shown in the following illustration.
The flange rotation function is provided so that the isometric generates a message showing the angle the flange needs to be rotated when the flange is connected to a pipe that is not moving in a primary direction. You can control if ISOGEN generates a message when a flange rotation angle is required, and the type of enclosure style (if any) to include for the message. This is done by setting the ShowFlangeRotation on the Drawing Content object and FlangeRotationStyle properties on the Drawing Format object. Flange rotations are caused by pipe directions moving in a skew direction instead of directly in a principle plane. For example, if a pipe direction (as viewed on the face of the flange - see rules below) is Up, and at the elbow, then turns to move North + West at an angle of, say, 45 degrees, then the North + West section is said to be in a skew.
584
Techniques
Flange Rotation Rules

Rules that are followed when determining the rotation angle. 1. Always look at the flange face.
2. Set the flange to the normal OFF CENTRES position with respect to the first change in direction that is found by moving along the spool away from the flange being positioned. This can be one of the following: a. The next leg of the spool following a bend / elbow. b. A branch connection. c. A flange at the other end of the spool if it is a straight pipe. d. A component direction or a branch direction that is specifically identified by SmartPlant Spoolgen, using one of the ATexts -487 to -491. These are for use on spools where the only suitable reference plane is not covered by a), b), or c) previously discussed.
AText ID Number -487 Default Text Purpose
*** REFERENCE FLAT ***
Used to identify which item is to be used as a reference plane for any output flange rotation angle.
-488 -489 -490 -491 -492
*** REFERENCE SPINDLE *** *** REFERENCE SUPPORT *** *** REFERENCE BRANCH *** *** REFERENCE WINDOW *** FLAT DIRECTION Used to point to any 2D or 3D triangles on flat spool isometrics.
-493 -494 -495 -496 -497
SPINDLE DIRECTION SUPPORT DIRECTION BRANCH DIRECTION WINDOW DIRECTION FLANGE ROTATION ? (The calculated angle is output where the ? character is located).
Used to identify all flange rotation angles on the plotted part of a flat spool drawing. 1. Having set the flange off center to the identified reference plane, rotate the flange in a clockwise direction by the angle indicated.
585
Techniques All flange rotation angles are calculated (with all of the necessary compensations to accommodate the pipe movements) such that they are all in the clockwise direction.
Outputting a Table of Flange Rotations

It is possible to generate a table of flanges and the associated flange rotation. This is achieved by using the DFTableAttributes collection to set up a table to output the flange part number and flange rotation angle. The material list must be set to non-accumulation
See also
Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes collection (on page 547) Drawing Content Object (on page 167) Drawing Format Object (on page 239) ShowFlangeRotation (on page 171) FlangeRotationStyle (on page 255)
586
Techniques
HeatTreatment-NDE
To output heat treatment - NDE attributes on the isometric, the following Supplementary HeatTreatment object properties need to be set: Enabled (on page 463) property set to True. Path (on page 516) property set to the data file containing the heat treatment data. Text (on page 516) property
Double-clicking in the Text property opens the following:
The data entered is the link between the IDF and the data in the Heat treatment / NDE file. The format of the HeatTreatment/NDE file is specified in the function definition file (FDF). Consider the following example:
ELEMENT1 'PIPING-SPEC' N.S.-CHECK-WELD N.S.-CHECK 1 2 4 3 5
. See the Supplementary HeatTreatment object Text property for all the possible data settings The section heading HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILEUSE- DEFINITION is required in the data definition file before this data can be output. A function definition file containing the Heat treatment attributes definition must be defined in the Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles collection
587
Techniques
FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE DELIMITER-CHARACTER , -950 2 ! PWHT N.S. RANGE -951 3 ! PWHT TEMPERATURE -952 4 ! PREHEAT N.S RANGE -953 5 ! PREHEAT TEMPERATURE -954 6 ! % RT -955 7 ! % MT -956 8 ! % PT -957 9 ! % BHN
The attributes to be output need to be added to the DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttribute collection or the Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttribute collection. If using this mechanism, the attributes should not be defined in the Project defaults (on page 37).
See also
DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttribute Collection (see "DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection" on page 339) Function Definition File (see "FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE" on page 473) Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles Collection (see "Supplementary DataFiles Object" on page 468) Supplementary HeatTreatment Object (on page 514) Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttribute Collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547)
Location Points
Location points are used to output a coordinate offset to the nearest main steelwork column or floor. The location point is positioned in the design system, and the steelwork grid and floor levels are defined in the Supplementary AdditionalData object The plotted symbol used for the location point is user-definable. The default is shown in the following illustration.
The number is only output if more than one location point is used on the drawing. The associated text is controlled by AText - 471, the default being LOCATION POINT? where the ? character is the cross-reference number when more than one location point is used.
588
Techniques The output of the location point reference position, or floor level information on the drawing frame, is achieved by using the text positioning facilities:
E3200 N1448 OF C5 EL2286 ABOVE 2nd.FL
Location point information will only be output on the following types of isometrics. 1. Combined isometric 2. Erection isometric 3. System isometric Location point records found in the pipeline data file when generating any other type of isometric are ignored.
Text Positioning
There are two types of location point output in the text positioning facility: LOCATION-POINT-ELEVATION Used for offset above nearest floor level. The format of the output generated by the program is:
One space (blank) is automatically inserted between each element. The following are typical examples: EL2286 ABOVE 2nd.FL EL7'-6" ABOVE 2nd.FL No.1 EL2286 ABOVE 2nd.FL No.2 EL610 ABOVE 4th.FL LOCATION-POINT-TO-STEEL Used for offset to nearest steelwork stanchion. (Single Location Point - Metric Units) (Single Location Point - Imperial Units) (Multiple Location Points on single drawing)
589
Techniques The format of the output generated by the program is:
One space (blank) will be automatically inserted between each element. The following are typical examples:: E3200 N1448 OF C5 E10'-6" N4'-9" OF C5 No.1 E3200 N1448 OF C5 No.2 E1875 N2950 OF E3 (Single Location Point - Metric Units) (Single Location Point - Imperial Units) (Multiple Location Points on single drawing)
AText
The following AText are used. -472 -473 -474 No.? (Generated Cross Reference Number output in ? position). OF ABOVE
Drawing Definition File

The section header is STEELWORK-LOCATION, which is followed by four sub-headings each having their own data entries. 1. ROWS Sub-heading (mandatory). Data entries are: Row identifier - Unique identifier for a row in the steelwork grid, One line entry for each row. Coordinate position - Position of row in Site N, S, E or W positions can be used, such as N12000.
2. COLUMNS Sub heading (mandatory). Data entries are: Column identifier - Unique identifier for a column in the steelwork grid, one line entry for each column. Co-ordinate position - Position of column in site N, S, E or W positions can be used. e.g. E18500. 590 SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
Techniques 1. FLOOR-LEVELS Sub heading (optional). Data entries are: Floor identifier - Unique identifier for a floor in the steelwork structure, one line entry for each floor. Floor elevation - Elevation of floor in structure elevations to be positive by default, e.g. EL8500. Negative elevations if floor is below zero, such as - EL-500.
2. EXCLUDED-STEELWORK Sub heading (optional). Data entries are: Steelwork identifier - List of stanchions that are not required as part of the structure steelwork identifier is a combination of row/column identifiers that uniquely identify a particular stanchions . Floor identifier - Only required if floor levels are being used.
Input identifiers 1. Single entry 2. Multiple entries 3. ALL Each entry to be separated by at least one Blank character, as shown in the following example:
STEELWORK-LOCATIONS ROWS A N2000 B N9000 C N16000 D N23000 E N30000 F N37000 COLUMNS 1 E5000 2 E12000 3 E19000 4 E26000 5 E33000 6 E40000 7 E47000 FLOOR-LEVELS G.L. EL500 1st.FL EL8500 2nd.FL EL16500 3rd.FL EL24500 4th.FL EL32500 EXCLUDED-STEELWORK A6 3rd.FL B6 3rd.FL C6 3rd.FL D6 3rd.FL E6 3rd.FL F6 3rd.FL A7 3rd.FL
591
Techniques
B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 3rd.FL 3rd.FL 3rd.FL 3rd.FL 3rd.FL
The previous example shows the use of metric location coordinates. Imperial locations would be of the following form:
A E1000-0 1 N200-6.1/2 1st.FL EL25-3
See also
Supplementary AdditionalData object (on page 458) Supplementary ReferencePlanes Object (on page 525) REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION (on page 476)
592
Techniques
Site Assemblies
Use the following guidelines to create a site assembly report and show the site assembly number on the isometric.
Site Assembly Numbers

To show site assembly numbers set the following properties on the Drawing Format object: SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize SiteAssemblyIDs SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing
Also, AText -478 (default J) controls the characters printed before the assembly number.
Site Assembly Report

Add a site assembly attribute to the bolt attributes on the Project Defaults dialog box.
593
Techniques 1. Click New to add a new attribute:
2. In the Isogen attribute list, select the Assembly Attribute, type the display name required and then click OK. The attribute is added to the list of bolt attributes.
3. Add an entry into the Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles collection.
594
Techniques There is also a SITE-ASSEMBLY-FILE-APPEND file type, if required. 4. Set up a Function Definition File in the Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles collection, if one does not already exist.
5. Add the data for specifying the report, as described in SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT (on page 486).
See also
Drawing Format Object (on page 239) Project Defaults (on page 37) SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 270) SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 272) SiteAssemblyIDs (on page 273) SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing (on page 274) Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 534)
Traceability and Unique Numbers

Traceability and unique part numbers have the following three types of output: 1. Unique part numbers shown at each component on the drawing. 2. A table of unique part number on the drawing. 3. An output file with unique part numbers with spool IDs and, optionally, a pipeline reference. The control of which facility is being used is as follows: The UniquePartNumber property on the Traceability object controls the generation of the unique part number. If this is set to OFF then no unique part numbers are generated and all facilities are disabled. If set to either Numeric or Alpha, then the unique part number is shown at each component with either a numeric or alpha suffix, such as 3.1 or 3.a. To output a table of unique part numbers, the PlotUniquePtNoTable property on the Traceability object must be set to True, and the following properties controlling the position and size of table must be set. The frame of the table must be part of the backing sheet. ContinuousDown (on page 554) StartX (on page 555) StartY (on page 555) VerticalSpacing (on page 555) TextHeight (on page 555) MaxEntries (on page 555) TableOverflow (on page 556) DrawingLayer (on page 556)
595
Techniques To output a file, the Path property on the Traceability object must be set to the path name for the file, and the Enabled property set to True.
See also
PlotUniquePtNoTable (on page 554) Traceability object (see "Supplementary Traceability Object" on page 552) UniquePartNumber (on page 554)
Work Measurement
There are three optional work measurement calculations. 1. Spool Weld Diameter Summation of weld diameter (inches/mm) multiplied by quantity for each spool and/or each drawing. Regardless of the number of welds in a pipeline and their size, spool weld diameter values are output on this basis: On spool isometrics--one value. On all other isometrics--one value per DRG, one value for each spool on the DRG, or both of these. In the spool information file--one value for each spool.
Output the Spool Weld Diameter on the Isometric 1. Add a data entry to the DFAttributes collection (see "DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection" on page 339) or the DFTableAttributes collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547). 2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select SPOOLWELD-DIA. 3. Set the other attributes as required to set the size and position of the text to be output. Output the Drawing Weld Diameter on the Isometric 1. Add a data entry to the DFAttributes collection (see "DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection" on page 339) or the DFTableAttributes collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547) . 2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select DRG-WELDDIA. 3. Set the other attributes as required to set the size and position of the text to be output. Output an Entry into the Spool Information File (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation Object" on page 542) 1. Add a data entry into the TextColumns collection (see "MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection" on page 400) on the SpoolInformation object (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation Object" on page 542) .
596
Techniques 2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select either SPOOLWELD- DIA/INCH or SPOOL-WELD-DIA/MM. SPOOL-WELD-DIA/MM - used for Mixed or Imperial units. SPOOL-WELD-DIA/INCH - Used for Metric units. 3. Set the other attributes as required to set the size and position of the text to be output. The calculated value output is the summation of the nominal size of all the welds on each spool or drawing. For example, if a spool contains welds as shown in the following example: 1" - 4 off 2" - 1 off 6" - 3 off The spool weld diameter is 1" X 4 = 4 2" X 1 = 2 6" X 3 = 18 24 The calculation is the summation of the N.S. of the following types of welds on each spool. Weld Type Butt Weld Socket Weld Mitre Weld Slip-on Flange Identifier BW SW MW SOF AText Number -417 -418 -419 -421 N.S. to be counted Pipe / Component Component size Pipe size Flange size (1 or 2 welds dependant upon setting of property SlipOnFlangeWelds (on page 413) Branch size Branch size Branch size Branch size Branch size Component size Component size
Set-on-Branch
SOB ?? ?? ?? ??
-422 -522 -523 -524 -528 -423 -525
Olet
Let ??
597
Techniques
Weld Type Reinforcement Pads
Identifier RPD LF ?? L4 ??
AText Number -507 -508 -526 -509 -527 -516 -529 -530 -531 -532
N.S. to be counted 3 x Branch size 2 x Branch size 2 x Branch size Branch size Branch size Trunnion Weld size Trunnion Weld size Trunnion Weld size Trunnion Weld size Trunnion Weld size
Trunnions
TRN ?? ?? ?? ??
1. Spool Centerline Length This value is calculated and output On each spool iso. In the spool Information file.
Output the Spool Centerline Length on the Isometric 1. Add a data entry to the DFAttributes collection (see "DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection" on page 339) or the DFTableAttributes collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547) . 2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list select SPOOL-CLLENGTH. 3. Set the other attributes as required to set the size and position of the text to be output. Output an Entry into the Spool Information File (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation Object" on page 542) 1. Add a data entry into the TextColumns Collection (see "MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection" on page 400) on the SpoolInformation object (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation Object" on page 542) . 2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select SPOOL-CLLENGTH. 3. Set the other attributes as required to set the size and position of the text to be output. The spool centerline length value is the true length of the spool (including any branches). The calculated length includes all flanges, fittings and pipe, including the true length around bends. Output values are given to the nearest 1/10th foot or meter. 1. Spool and Drawing Erection Factors
598
Techniques Output the Drawing Erection Factor on the Isometric: 1. Add a data entry to the DFAttributes collection (see "DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection" on page 339) or the DFTableAttributes collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547) . 2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select DRGERECTION-FACTOR. 3. Set the other attributes as required to set the size and position of the text to be output. Output the Spool Erection Factor on the Isometric 1. Add a data entry to the DFAttributes collection (see "DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection" on page 339) or the DFTableAttributes collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547) . 2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select SPOOLERECTION- FACTOR. 3. Set the other attributes as required to set the size and position of the text to be output. Output an Entry into the Spool Information File (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation Object" on page 542) 1. Add a data entry into the TextColumns collection (see "MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection" on page 400) on the SpoolInformation object (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation Object" on page 542) . 2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select either SPOOLFACTOR- DIA/MT or SPOOL-FACTOR-DIA/FT. SPOOL-FACTOR-DIA/MT - used for Mixed or Metric units. SPOOL-FACTOR-DIA/FT - used for Imperial units. 3. Set the other attributes as required to set the size and position of the text to be output.
599
Techniques The calculated factor value is the summation of the N.S. x Length for each size appearing on either a spool or full isometric. The length used to calculate the individual spool and full pipeline erection factors includes all flanges, fittings, pipe and branches, and using the true length around bends. Output values are given to the nearest 1/10th foot or meter.
Calculated values are output to isometrics using either the DFAttributes collection or the DFTableAttributes collection and optionally, to the spool Information file .
See also
DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection (on page 339) Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection (on page 547) Supplementary SpoolInformation Object (on page 542)
600
Index
2
-201 133 -202 133 -203 133 -204 133 -205 133 -206 133 -207 133 -208 133 -209 133 -210 133 -211 133 -212 133 -213 133 -214 133 -215 133 -216 133 -217 133 -218 133 -219 133 -220 133 -221 133 -222 133 -223 133 -224 133 -225 133 -226 133 -227 133 -228 133 -229 133 -230 133 -231 133 -232 133 -233 133 -236 133 -237 133 -238 133 -239 133 -240 133 -241 133 -242 133 -243 133 -244 133 -245 133 -246 133 -247 133 -248 133 -249 133 -250 151 -251 151 -252 151 -253 151 -254 151 -255 151 -256 151 -257 151 -258 151 -259 151 -260 151 -261 151 -262 151 -263 151 -264 151 -265 151 -266 151 -267 151 -268 151 -269 151 -270 151 -271 151 -272 151 -274 143 -275 133 -276 133 -277 133 -278 133 -279 133 -280 133 -281 133 -282 133 -283 133 -284 133 -285 133 -286 133 -287 133 -288 133 -289 150 -290 150 601
Index -291 150 -292 150 -293 150 -294 150 -295 150 -296 150 -297 150 -298 133 -299 157 -337 133 -338 133 -339 143 -340 143 -341 143 -342 143 -343 143 -344 143 -345 143 -346 133 -347 143 -348 143 -349 133 -350 133 -351 143 -352 143 -353 143 -354 143 -355 143 -356 133, 143 -357 133, 143 -358 133, 143 -359 143 -360 153 -361 153 -362 133, 143 -363 143 -364 143 -365 143 -366 143 -367 143 -368 143 -369 143 -370 143 -371 143 -372 143 -373 143 -374 143 -375 143 -376 143 -377 143 -378 143 -379 143 -380 143 -381 143 -382 143 -383 143 -384 133, 143
3
-300 143 -301 143 -302 143 -303 143 -304 143 -305 143 -306 143 -307 143 -308 143 -309 143 -310 143 -311 143 -312 143 -313 143 -314 143 -315 143 -316 143 -317 153 -318 153 -319 143 -320 143 -321 143 -322 143 -323 143 -324 143 -325 143 -326 143 -327 143 -328 143 -329 143 -330 143 -331 143 -332 154 -333 154 -334 143 -335 143 -336 154
602
Index
4
-400 153 -401 153 -402 153 -403 153 -404 153 -405 153 -406 153 -407 153 -408 153 -409 153 -410 153 -411 153 -423 133, 143 -450 133 -451 133 -452 133 -453 157 -454 133 -455 133 -456 133 -457 133 -460 133 -461 133 -462 133 -463 133 -464 133 -465 133 -466 133 -467 133 -468 133 -471 133 -472 143 -473 143 -474 143 -475 133 -476 133 -481 156 -482 156 -483 156 -484 156 -485 156 -486 156 -487 156 -488 156 -489 156 -490 156 -491 156
-492 156 -493 156 -494 156 -495 156 -496 156 -497 156 -498 133 -499 133
5
-500 143 -501 133 -502 133 -503 143 -509 158 -512 133 -514 143 -515 143 -533 133 -534 133 -535 133 -536 133 -537 143 -538 143 -539 133 -540 143 -541 133 -542 133 -543 133 -544 133 -545 133
A
About SmartPlant I-Configure 78 AccessRights 96 AccumulatedPipeDesc 377 AccumulatedPipePosition 377 AccumulatedPipeQuantity 377 ActiveList 356, 413, 436 ActiveSection 374 Add a New Attribute 48, 112 Add a Row 27 Add to Collection 23 AdditionalAllowanceFormat 202 AdditionalEnclosureStyle 246 AdditionalWeldEnclosure 248 AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces 249 AddRoundOff 202 603
Index All Weld Types 54 AllowOverflowDrawings 445 AlternateText 165 Alternative Texts ATexts Collection 164 AlternativeTexts 130 AlternativeTexts Object 163 AngleAccuracy 243 AngleStyle 243 AngleType 244 AppCount 93 Append 404, 431, 453, 464 AppendStandardExts 180 Application 97 AppliesTo 198 AppList 93 ASCII-SYMBOLS 471 Attribute Expressions 115 AttributeName 331, 341, 346, 380, 401, 407, 420, 428, 434, 450, 456, 509, 539, 542, 546, 548, 558 Attributes 106 Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard) 47 AutoCAD Barcode 564 AutoDrawingSplit 181 Category 199, 331 CategoryHeadingX 376 CategoryUnderline 376 Change Column Widths in the Attribute Grid 49 Change Settings for a Single Weld Type 53 Change Settings for All Weld Types 53 ChangeStyleList 95 CharHeight 341, 347, 548 CharWidth 342, 347, 549 ClampWelds 415 Clear 26 Collections 22 Color 199, 347, 496 Colour 342, 496, 549 ColumnOffset 393 ColumnsNumber 342, 348, 549 Comment 20 Component and Information Data 569 Component Attributes 110 ComponentInfo 530 COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE 472 COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE Section 481 COMPONENT-INFORMATIONSELECTION Section 484 ComponentLegLength 250 ComputeNozzleAxis 251 Configuration Files 12 Connect to a Network Project 18 Connect to Isometric Directory 33 Content 382, 442, 531 Context Sensitive Help 28 ContinuationGraphicsOnSpoolIsos 194 ContinuousDown 555 Controls 23 Coordinates Page (Dimensioning Wizard) 61 CoordOutputBends 205 CoordOutputBranches 205 CoordOutputHTCpts 205 CoordStyle 528 CoordStyleAtLocationPts 527 CoordSupports 205 CoordType 206 Copy 25, 36 Copy a Row 27
B
Backing Sheets 12 Bar Codes 563 BarCode 342, 347, 549 BendRadius 249 BendRepresentation 250 Bends 565 Bends and Elbows 565 BINARY-SYMBOLS 471 Bolt Attributes 111 BoltAccumulation 357 BoltDiameterUnits 358 BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE 471 BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT 478 BoltLengthUnits 359 BottomMargin 335 BranchBoreLimit 203 BranchCptLimit 204 ByPass 530
C
CanExport 127 CanWrite 127 604
Index Copy and Paste a Project 121 Copy and Paste a Style 558 Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory 90 Copy and Paste Attributes 50 Count 164, 196, 299, 329, 339, 344, 378, 400, 406, 409, 419, 426, 432, 448, 454, 469, 504, 508, 519, 533, 538, 541, 544, 547, 551, 556 CptAttributesEnclStyle 245 CptTagEnclStyle 251 CptTagsStyle 252 Create a Project 121 Create a Style 559 Create an Isometric Directory 88 Create User Templates 18 CreateTutorial_<application name>.xml 13 CurvedPipeAngleStyle 298 CurvedPipeDimensioning 239 CurvedPipeRadiusStyle 298 CustomHeight 336 CustomWidth 336 Cut Lists 578 CutList 435 CutList FixedLayout Object 441 CutList Object 435 CutList SummaryFile Object 451 CutList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection 455 CutList UserDefined Object 443 CutList UserDefined XYColumns Collection 449 CutPieceEnclosureStyle 253 CutPieceID 436 CutPieceNoLength 252 CutPieceSequence 437 Delete 37 Delete a Project 122 Delete a Row 27 Delete a Style 560 Delete an Attribute 114 Delete an Isometric Directory 89 Delimiter 405, 431, 453, 537, 544 Detail Panel 82, 127 Detail Sketch and Information Notes 579 DiagnosticLevel 182 Dimension Format Page (Dimensioning Wizard) 56 Dimensioning Style Page (Dimensioning Wizard) 57 Dimensioning Wizard 55 Direction 343, 348, 549 Disconnect Isometric Directory 34 DisconnectionMessage 182 DoubleUnits 206 Drawing 166 Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard) 42 Drawing Content Object 168 Drawing Controls Object 179 Drawing Definitions Definitions Collection 197 Drawing Definitions Object 195 Drawing Dimensions Object 200 Drawing Format Object 240 Drawing Layers Layers Collection 300 Drawing Layers Object 299 Drawing Object 166 Drawing Setup Wizard 39 Drawing Welds Object 301 Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures Collection 330 Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures Object 329 DrawingColour 375, 423 DrawingFrame 334 DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection 340 DrawingFrame Attributes Object 339 DrawingFrame Object 334 DrawingFrame SymbolTable Object 349 DrawingFrame TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection 345 DrawingFrame TableAttributes Object 344
D
DataFile 512 DataOffsetX 394 DataOffsetY 394 DateFormat 181 DateSource 182 DDFLines 460 DecimalInchOutput 437 Default Support Category 105 DefaultColour 299 DefaultDescriptionWidth 375, 397 DefaultText 165
605
Index DrawingLayer 351, 375, 390, 393, 423, 445, 556 DrawingSize 183 DrawingsPerFile 186 Drg1of1OnSingleIsos 359 DScale 199 DXFUnits 337 Dynamic File Naming 583 FabPrefix 305 FabSupportPrefix 315 FabSupportWeldEnclosure 315 FabSupportWeldStartNo 315 FabSuppWeldEnclSize 317 FabWeldEnclosure 306 FabWeldEnclSize 308 FabWeldsInPipe 207 FabWeldStartNo 305 FallCutOff 254 FallRepresentation 255 FDF Sections 478 File Menu 31 File Types 471 FileFormat 404, 431, 453, 537, 544 FilePath 471, 535 FileText 471, 536 FileType 470, 535 Find 67 Flange Rotation 584 FlangeRotationStyle 255 Flat Spools and Flange Rotation 156 FlowArrowScale 256 Font 342, 347, 548 ForceAllWeldsAsSpecial 332 ForDryPipe 466 Format 208 ForWetPipe 466 FourDigitYear 183 FtInTolerance 209 FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE 473
E
Edit an Attribute 113 Edit Menu 36 ElbowConversion 94 ElbowRadius 253 ElbowRepresentation 254 Elbows 565 Elevations/Vertical Dimensions Page (Dimensioning Wizard) 60 Enable Project 34 Enabled 392, 404, 430, 452, 460, 464, 466, 507, 514, 515, 523, 526, 530, 537, 541, 544, 554 EnclosureType 331, 542 EndProgram 462 ErecSuppWeldEnclSize 321 ErectAccumulation 357 ErectPrefix 309 ErectSupportPrefix 318 ErectSupportWeldEnclosure 318 ErectSupportWeldStartNo 318 ErectWeldEnclosure 309 ErectWeldStartNo 309 ErecWeldEnclSize 311 Example XML Configuration File 570 Examples 132 Exit 35 Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface 29 Export 35 Export a Style 561 Export Style Fragment 76 ExportBehavior 126 External Data 566 External Data Source 566 ExtraRPadWelds 413
G
Gasket Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard) 59 GasketAccumulation 357 GasketDimPrecision 211 Gaskets 210 GED Configuration 102 GeneralPrefix 303 GeneralWeldStartNo 303 Getting Started 11 GhostGapDimension 256 Graphically Move an Attribute 49 GroupHeadingX 376 Grouping of AText Listings 133 GroupUnderline 376
F
FabAccumulation 357 606
Index
H
HeaderLines 397, 405, 419, 432, 454, 508, 537, 544 HeaderOffsetX 392 HeaderOffsetY 392 HeatTracingOptions 183 HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE 474 HeatTreatment-NDE 587 Height 506 Help Menu 77 HorizontalDirection 445 HorizontalSpacing 351, 425, 445
ISOGENTextID 165 Isometric Directories 87 Isometric Directory 32 Isometric Directory Object Properties 87 IsometricText 213 IsometricType 184 IsoScale 184 ItemCodeLength 359
J
JacketDimensioning 212 Justification 342, 347, 402, 408, 421, 434, 456, 510, 540, 546, 549, 558
I
ID 506 IdentifierSuffix 554 IdfgenConnectionTolerance 238 IDF-REVISIONS Section 485 IgnoreUserSplitPoints 184 ImperialFormat 212 ImpliedWelds 303 Import a PipMan Project 70 Import a Spoolgen 4 Project 71 Import an I-Configure Project 72 Import Directory 101 Import PipeHeader Attributes 115 Import Project 69 Import Style Fragment 75 Import Style Settings 74 Imported Part Numbers 99 Imported Split Points 100 Imported Spool IDs 101 Imported Weld Numbers 98 Inches 212 Include a Report File 64 IncludeAdditionalMaterial 436 IncludeBolts 405 IndividualEntries 406 InsertBlankLines 369, 397 InstIDEnclosureSize 256 InstIDEnclosureStyle 258 InstIdentification 260 InsulationStyle 260 INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE 475 INSULTATION-WEIGHT-FILE Section 485 ISKEYText 520 IsoDirList.xml 13 SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
K
Keyboard 24
L
LabelLayer 496 LabelType 496 LabelX 497, 506 LabelY 497, 506 Layer 199, 342, 347, 549 LayerColour 300 LayerNumber 300 Layout 351, 369, 398, 445 LeftMargin 335 Legacy System Support 10 LengthToBranchPoint 438 LengthToCL 437 LinearQuantityStyle 360 LinearWeightDenominator 194 LinesNumber 343, 348, 550 LineSpacing 369, 398 LineStyle 199 LineStyleTable 196 ListDown 382, 387, 424 Location Points 588 LocationPtStyle 526 LockedBy 96 LowerBore 198
M
Material Attributes 112 Material Database 97 Material List Object 355
607
Index Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard) 46 MaterialFile 512 MaterialHeadings 405 MaterialList 355 MaterialList FixedLayout Object 368 MaterialList SummaryFile Object 403 MaterialList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection 407 MaterialList Transfers MLTransfers Collection 410 MaterialList Transfers Object 409 MaterialList UserDefined Object 373 MaterialList UserDefined OneSection Object 381 MaterialList UserDefined RemarksBox Object 389 MaterialList UserDefined SpoolTable Object 391 MaterialList UserDefined ThreeSection Object 386 MaterialList UserDefined TwoSection Object 383 MaterialList UserDefined XYColumns Collection 379 MaterialList Variable Layout Object 396 MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection 401 MaterialListOverflow 360 MaterialListSplitting 360 MaterialsBySpool 367 MatList 531 MaxCharacters 390 MaxChars 380, 402, 408, 421, 428, 434, 450, 456, 510, 540, 546, 558 MaxCols 424 MaxColumns 351, 447 MaxEntries 382, 390, 424, 556 MaxRows 351, 424, 447 Menus 31 MessageArrowHeads 305 MessageCircleEnclosure 260 MessageDiamondEnclosure 261 MessagePointedEnclosure 262 MessageRoundEnclosure 263 MessageSquareEnclosure 263 MessageTriangleEnclosure 264 MetresCoordinates 213 MetresDimensions 213 MinAngleOffset 185 MinOffset 214 MISC-DEFINITIONS Section 486 MLType 370, 375, 398 Modify the User ProjectConfig File 19 Mouse 24 Move Down a Row 27 Move Up a Row 27 MultiPortConnections 265
N
Name 93, 126, 300 New 32 NewGroup 411 NoColumns 393 NominalSize 214 NonLinearValves 215 NonSpecialPosition 333 NoOfDrawings 185 NorthArrowBox 265 NorthDirection 186 NoteFormat 501 NoteHeight 501 NotePosition 502 NoteWidth 503
O
Objects 20 Offset 380, 428, 450 OffshoreAccumulation 358 OffshoreAllowance 438 OffshorePrefix 312 OffshoreSupportPrefix 322 OffshoreSupportWeldEnclosure 322 OffshoreSupportWeldStartNo 322 OffshoreSuppWeldEnclSize 324 OffshoreWeldEnclosure 312 OffshoreWeldEnclSize 314 OffshoreWeldStartNo 312 OletBranchOrientationMessage 265 OnShoreAllowance 438 Options 77 OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE 475 OrientationFrom 266 OutputFormat 186 OutputLinesTube 395 Overall 216 SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
608
Index Overall Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard) 58 OverflowDrawingID 361 Overview Panel 81 OverwritePlotFile 187 PROJECT-MATERIALDATA 476 PROJECT-MATERIALMANAGER 476 PROJECT-PIPELINE 476 ProjectPipeline.xml 15 Projects 91 Properties 21 Properties Panel 80
P
PartNoEnclosureStyle 266 PartNoEnclSize 268 PartNoLength 269 PartNos 512 PartNoSpaces 269 PartNoVisible 269 Paste 26, 36 Path 93, 126, 404, 431, 452, 464, 496, 508, 514, 516, 523, 526, 530, 537, 541, 544, 554 PerPipeLine 467 PipeLength 352 Pipeline Attributes 108 Pipeline Data 568 PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE 475 PipeLineScale 187 PipeLineSplitting 188 PipeLineSplittingInTube 188 PipeNameInContMessages 188 PipeNameStyle 189 PipesThroughPenetrationPlates 238 PlotFileLength 189 PlotFilePath 189 PlotUniquePtNoTable 554 PositionFix 501 PostScriptSize 190 Preface v PreProcessor 102 Preview Drawing 65 Preview the Drawing 65 PrintedOutputPageLen 190 Project 32 Project Access Rights 76 Project Defaults 37, 96 Project ID Type 104 Project Object Properties 91 Project View Panel 79 Project Work Folder 103 Project_Data.xml 13 ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml 13 ProjectList.xml 15
R
RecordID 410 Reference Plane System 161 ReferenceIDLocation 541 ReferenceNameStyle 297 REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION 476 REMARKS 478 Remove a Report File 64 Remove Attributes 48 Remove from Collection 23 Remove Weld Types 53 Repeat Style 98 Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard) 43 ReportContents 464 Reports Wizard 63 ReservedAreaDrawing 337 ReservedAreaDrawingTop 337 ReservedAreaMatList 338 RightMargin 336 RightSide 370, 398 RotationAngle 342, 348, 549 Row Manipulation 26
S
Save 35 Save a Style 561 Search by File Section 68 Search by Option Switch 67 Search by Property 67 Section1Content 384, 387 Section1Down 384 Section1MaxEntries 384, 387 Section2Content 384, 387 Section2Down 384 Section2MaxEntries 384, 387 Section2YOffset 385, 388 Section3Content 388 Section3MaxEntries 388 609
Index Section3YOffset 388 Select a Style 561 Select an Attribute Graphically and Edit its Value in the Attributes Grid 49 SeparatePulledBend 217 SeparateSpoolUnion 270 Set up a Network Project 17 Set Up a Project on a Network Server 17 SetPipeLineDisconnected 190 SheetNumberFormat 367 ShopWeldAllowance 439 Shortcut Menu 24 ShowAccumulatedPipeData 376 ShowBIP 169 ShowCategoryHeadings 377 ShowClosedEnd 169 ShowContAtSplitPoint 170 ShowCoordAtRefItem 169 ShowCoordAtSplitPts 170 ShowCptFlowArrows 171 ShowDividingLines 370, 399 ShowDrainPosition 171 ShowEnclosure 447 ShowEquipConn 171 ShowErectSupportWeldNos 317 ShowErectSupportWeldPrefix 318 ShowErectWeldNos 308 ShowErectWeldPrefix 308 ShowFabSupportWeldNos 314 ShowFabSupportWeldPrefix 314 ShowFabWeldNos 304 ShowFabWeldPrefix 304 ShowFlangeRotation 172 ShowFlowArrows 270 ShowGroupHeadings 376 ShowHeaders 405, 432, 454 ShowInsulationWeight 467 ShowIsogenVer 191 ShowIsometricSpindles 172 ShowItemDescriptions 371 ShowMiscPosition 173 ShowNozzles 173 ShowNSUnitsInReports 174 ShowNSUnitsOnDrg 173 ShowOffshoreSupportWeldNos 321 ShowOffshoreSupportWeldPrefix 321 ShowOffshoreWeldNos 311 ShowOffshoreWeldPrefix 312 ShowOpenEnd 175 ShowOperationsBox 417 ShowPipeLineCont 175 ShowReferenceDims 175 ShowRemarks 375 ShowRPads 176 ShowSiteAssemblyTable 176 ShowSupports 177 ShowTapBrnchCoords 177 ShowTitles 406, 432, 454 ShowVentPosition 178 ShowWeldNumbers 303 ShowWelds 303 ShowWetWeight 467 Site Assemblies 593 SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure 270 SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize 273 SiteAssemblyIDs 274 SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing 274 SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT 487 SiteWeldsNotAssignedToSpools 274 SketchHeight 498 SketchPosition 498 SketchWidth 500 SkewAngleStyle 282 SkewDimStandout 275 SkewDimStyle 275 SkewHatchCptGap 276 SkewHatchCutOff 276 SkewHatchDimText 277 SkewHatching 277 SkewHatchPipeGap 278 SkewHatchSpacing 278 SkewInVerticalBranch 279 SkewMinCpts 280 SkewMixed 280 SkewOverall 281 SkewRepresentation 281 SKEY 411 SlipOnFlangeWelds 414 SmallxLargeNS 361 SmartPlant I-Configure Help 78 SmartPlant Integration 104 Source 93 SpecBrkEnclosure 282 SpecBrkRepresentation 283 SpecialPosition 333 Specification Change Indication 150
610
Index SPECIFIC-GRAVITY 478 SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE Section 486 Specify Alternative Texts 162 SplitPoints 532 Spool Attributes 112 SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE 489 SpoolDrawingID 289 SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display 158 SpoolID 532 SpoolIDAllocation 283 SpoolIDContinuation 283 SpoolIDEnclosure 284 SpoolIDEnclosureStyle 287 SpoolIDLength 288 SpoolIDSize 287 SpoolIDType 290 SpoolMatchesPipe 325 SpoolPrefix 291 SpoolsMatchFull 361 StandOutComposite 218 StandOutOverall 220 StandOutVertical 220 Start 402, 408, 421, 434, 456, 510, 540, 546, 558 StartDrawingNumber 191 StartPoint 532 StartProgram 462 StartTimeout 462 StartX 352, 375, 390, 424, 447, 555 StartY 352, 376, 390, 424, 447, 555 Status Bar 85 StopOnError 462 Straight Length 103 Style 33 Style Object Properties 125 Style.xml 15 Styles 125 StyleState 126 StyleType 127 SuppDimAsDim 221 SuppFormat 222 Supplementary AdditionalData Object 459 Supplementary AuxiliaryPrograms Object 461 Supplementary BendingReport Object 463 Supplementary CentreOfGravity Object 465 Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles Collection 469 Supplementary DataFiles Object 468 Supplementary DetailSketches LocalSketches LocalSketch Collection 505 Supplementary DetailSketches LocalSketches Object 504 Supplementary DetailSketches Object 495 Supplementary DwgInfoFile Object 507 Supplementary DwgInfoFile TextColumns Collection 509 Supplementary EquipmentTrim Object 511 Supplementary Fonts Object 513 Supplementary HeatTreatment Object 515 Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYs Collection 520 Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS Object 519 Supplementary Object 457 Supplementary PipeLineAtts Object 521 Supplementary ReferencePlanes Object 525 Supplementary RepeatFile Object 529 Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection 534 Supplementary ReportFiles Object 533 Supplementary SiteWeldFile Object 536 Supplementary SiteWeldFile TextColumns Collection 538 Supplementary SpoolAttributes Object 540 Supplementary SpoolAttributes SpoolAttEnclosure Collection 542 Supplementary SpoolInformation Object 543 Supplementary SpoolInformation TextColumns Collection 545 Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection 547 Supplementary TableAttributes Object 546 Supplementary TitleTexts Object 551 Supplementary TitleTexts TitleTexts Collection 552 Supplementary Traceability Object 553 Supplementary Traceability TextColumns Collection 557 SuppOptions 223 SupportAdditionsWeight 191 SupportIdentification 291
611
Index SupportsWithMatchingNamesAccumulation 366 SupportTagEnclStyle 291 SupportWeldNumbers 325 SupportWeldSeq 325 SupportWeldTypeNos 326 SuppStandOut 224 SymbolList 353 SymbolScale 352 SymbolSelect 352 The Printed Material List 154 The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas 151 The Weld Box Summary 154 ThicknessActual 199 ThicknessLogical 199 TitleblockPos 372 TitleBlockVisible 372 TitleText 406, 432, 454 Toolbar 78 Tools Menu 64 TopMargin 335 Traceability and Unique Numbers 595 TracingStyle 296 TrueScale 191 TruncationLength 342, 348 TText 552 Tutorial Project 16 TypeSequenceNumbers 326
T
TableLayout 425 TableOverflow 393, 556 TackWeldNumbers 415 TapBranchDimension 227 TapBranchInlineScale 292 TapBranchPipeScale 292 TapBranchSuppression 293 TapOnCpt 225 TapOnPipe 226 TapOnPipeFittings 239 Techniques 563 TeeBendBranchDimension 228 TeeCrossNS 293 Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard) 41 TemplateFile 338 TemplateFormat 338 Templates 12 TestIso 294 Text 516, 523 TextFont 294, 353, 361, 377, 424, 447, 501 TextHeight 353, 377, 390, 393, 425, 447, 500, 555 TextHeightMultiple 395 TextOffsetX 353 TextOffsetY 353 TextSize 295, 371, 399 TextWeight 296, 342, 348, 353, 372, 378, 390, 393, 400, 425, 448, 501, 549 TextWidth 296, 372, 400 TextWidthFactor 353, 378, 425, 448 The COMPIPE Material Control Links 157 The Isometric Drawing Area 133 The Line Summary Area 153 The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts 143
U
UniquePartNumber 554 Units 192 Units Formatting Page (Dimensioning Wizard) 62 UNITS-DEFINITION Section 490 UpperBore 198 USAStyle 229 UseI01TypeExts 193 UserDefined 406, 453 UserTextSize 295, 371, 399 UseTangentData 439 UseWeldGapData 439 Using Alternative Text 130
V
Values 21 ValveBW 230 ValveCP 231 ValveFL 232 ValveHY 233 ValveLimit 233 ValvePL 234 ValveSC 235 ValveSW 236 VerticalDirection 448 VerticalSpacing 354, 378, 390, 426, 448, 555 VertOption 237 SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide
612
Index View Isogen Controls 69 View Report File Output 66 View the Drawing 66 View the Message File 66 Visible 167, 338, 351, 362, 414, 440 WeldTypeIdentifiers 328 WeldTypes 328 What's New In SmartPlant I-Configure vii Width 333, 506 Wizards Menu 39 Work Measurement 596
W
WastageArea1 362 WastageArea2 362 WastageArea3 363 WastageArea4 363 WastageArea5 364 WastageArea6 364 WastageArea7 365 WastageArea8 365 WastageArea9 366 WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE Section 491 WeightOutput 193 WeightsStyle 366 Welcome to SmartPlant I-Configure 9 Weld Attributes 111 Weld Constructions 574 Weld Lists 571 Weld Logic 572 Weld Types 52 WeldAccumulation 358 WeldGaps 94 Welding 571 Welding Wizard 51 WeldList 412 WeldList FixedLayout Object 416 WeldList Object 412 WeldList SummaryFile Object 429 WeldList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection 433 WeldList UserDefined Object 422 WeldList UserDefined XYColumns Collection 427 WeldList VariableLayout Object 418 WeldList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection 420 WeldNos 532 WeldNumberLength 327 WeldNumbers 304 WeldNumberSequence 326 WeldNumberSize 327 WeldNumberType 327
X
XML Configuration File 567 Xpos 341, 347, 548 XSpacing 343, 348, 550
Y
Ypos 342, 347, 548 YSpacing 343, 348, 550 YTypeWelds 414
613

SPI-Configure Users Guide.

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

SPI-Configure Users Guide.

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

SmartPlant I-Configure

Version 2008 Service Pack 1

October 2008 / May 2009

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

What's New In SmartPlant I-Configure

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

What's New In SmartPlant I-Configure

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Welcome to SmartPlant I-Configure

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Welcome to SmartPlant I-Configure

Legacy System Support

Information for I-Configure 2.8 Users

Information for I-Sketch Users

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Convenient Style Wizards

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Using a User-Defined ProjectConfig_App.xml File

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Consider the following example:

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Command Line Switch

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Set up a Network Project

What do you want to do?

Set Up a Project on a Network Server

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Connect to a Network Project

Create User Templates

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Modify the User ProjectConfig File

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Path - Path to a file or folder. To enter a path value:

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

What do you want to do?

Remove from Collection

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Right-click an object (Definition/Row) of a Collection in the Properties panel:

What do you want to do?

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

What do you want to do?

What do you want to do?

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Move Down a Row

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Context Sensitive Help

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface

C - Project View Panel

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface